Drystar 5302

HEALTHCARE Technical
Global Services Organisation

Documentation
Order No.: DD+DIS150.05E
DRYSTAR 5302
*1YZO6N1*
1 Piece YZO6N MA1
Type 5366 / 100
1st Edition
printed in Germany 2005-09-09

Agfa Company Confidential
This page is intentionally left blank to enable print out of even and odd pages on duplex printers.
OVERVIEW Pictograms and conventions for this documentation
0. Order List This documentation uses certain conventions (pictograms, way of writing) for better
understanding and faster locating of the required information.
1. Controls, Connections and
Set Up Procedures Explanation of the pictograms
2. Functional Description High voltage ! Waiting time
3. Repair and Service

Attention ! Required tools
3.1 Machine specific safety and
repair information
3.2 Machine specific tools, software Info Removal
tools and auxiliary equipment
3.3 Troubleshooting
Installation
3.4 Electrical and mechanical
codes, fuses, LED's Hint
Mechanical adjustment
3.5 Replacement of parts Required spare part
3.6 Adjustments and calibrations
3.7 Software menus, settings Electrical adjustment
3.8 Software-Releases, Patches
Required time
3.9 Frequently Asked Questions Calibration
4. Reference and Circuit

Diagrams
5. Spare Parts List
6. Accessories
7. Field Modifications
8. Manufacturing Standard Conventions

Modifications
Actions Way of writing Sample
9. Maintenance
Action, Switch the machine on Switch the machine on

10. Field Service Bulletins explanation
Action with the mouse or the <omni-cd.exe> Double-click the

11. Installation Planning "Return" key <omni-cd.exe> icon
1 2 3
Required text input via the vips Enter vips and click on
12. Glossary and Key Word Index keyboard <Continue>
HEALTHCARE
Imaging Services Generic Safety Directions
Document No: DD+DIS238.06E
Generic Safety Directions

for HealthCare Imaging Products
► Purpose of this Document
This Generic Safety Directions document comprises the general safety relevant information including
relevant environmental and occupational safety instructions for the Service Engineer.
It is valid for all Agfa HealthCare Imaging Products and part of each Service Documentation as well as
Installation Planning document.
The latest version is available via MedNet, GSO Library path:
General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications => Service Manual
► Document History
Edition. Release Changes

Revision Date compared to previous Revision 1.2:
1.3 07-2009 • Updated table with laser classification to latest changes of the
corresponding standard. See section 3.3.
• Added section Environmental and occupational Safety Instructions.
See section 9.
• Added safety note concerning inroom installations of CR equipment
and corresponding X-ray shielding. See section 17.
• Added laser safety note and safety note concerning electrical checks
after repairs. See section 19.
• Added treatment for Lithium batteries in sections 19 and 21.
• Updated information concerning the recycling pass. See section 24.
► Referenced Documents
Document Title
Not applicable Not applicable
DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

The controlled version of this document resides on MedNet. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.
Edition 1, Revision 3
07-2009 printed in Germany Document Node ID: 11849633
eq_generic_safety_directions_e_template_v01
Agfa Company Confidential Copyright © 2009 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
DD+DIS238.06E Generic Safety Directions
► Manufacturer
Agfa HealthCare N.V.
Publisher
Agfa-Gevaert HealthCare GmbH
Tegernseer Landstraße 161
D - 81539 München
Germany
Copyright © 2009 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
All rights reserved.
Technical modifications reserved.
AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V.
WARNING:
Improper operation or service activities may cause damage or injuries.
INSTRUCTION:
(1) Read the "Generic Safety Directions" document
(see MEDNET GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on the
equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and on
the product.

Edition 1, Revision 3 Generic Safety Directions for HealthCare Imaging Products Page 2 of 28
07-2009 Agfa Company Confidential
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 DISCLAIMER......................................................................................................... 5
2 USED ICONS ........................................................................................................ 6
3 LABELS ................................................................................................................. 7
3.1 CE Mark................................................................................................... 7
3.2 System Labels ......................................................................................... 7
3.3 System Labels concerning Laser Radiation ............................................ 8
4 PRODUCT COMPLAINTS .................................................................................. 10
5 REFERENCES .................................................................................................... 10
6 INTENDED USE.................................................................................................. 11
7 INTENDED USER ............................................................................................... 11
8 QUALIFICATIONS FOR OPERATION AND SERVICE TASKS.......................... 11
9 ENVIRONMENTAL AND OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS............. 12
10 CONNECTIONS TO OTHER EQUIPMENT ........................................................ 13
11 ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS ................................................................ 14
12 COMPLIANCE..................................................................................................... 14
13 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR OPERATION......................................................... 17
14 RADIATION PROTECTION ................................................................................ 18
15 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR CLEANING AND DISINFECTION......................... 18
16 GENERAL SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR SERVICE ACTIVITIES ....................... 19
17 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION PLANNING ACTIVITIES ............ 20
18 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES................................ 22
19 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ACTIVITIES ........ 23
20 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR REMOTE SERVICE ACTIVITIES ......................... 26

21 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR TRANSPORT AND SHIPMENT OF SPARE

PARTS, ACCESSORIES AND DEVICES............................................................27
22 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING MODIFICATIONS.................................27
23 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING HAZARDOUS MATERIALS .................27
24 RECYCLING ........................................................................................................27
25 WASTE DISPOSAL .............................................................................................28
26 ERASING PROTECTED HEALTH INFORMATION (PHI) ...................................28

1 Disclaimer
The installation and service of equipment described herein is to be performed by qualified

personnel who are employed by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates or who are
otherwise authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates to provide such services.
Fitters, engineers and other persons who are not employed by or otherwise directly
affiliated with or authorized by Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates are directed to
contact one of the local offices of Agfa HealthCare or one of its affiliates before attempting
installation or service procedures.
No part of this document may be reproduced, copied, adapted or transmitted in any form
or by any means without the written permission of Agfa HealthCare.
Agfa HealthCare makes no warranties or representation, expressed or implied, with

respect to the accuracy, completeness or usefulness of the information contained in this
document and specifically disclaims warranties of suitability for any particular purpose.
Agfa HealthCare shall under no circumstances be liable for any damage arising from the
use or inability to use any information, apparatus, method or process disclosed in this
document.
Agfa HealthCare is not liable for resulting consequences, damages or injuries if you don’t
operate the product correctly or if you don’t have it serviced correctly.
Agfa HealthCare reserves the right to change the product, the characteristics and its
documentation without further notice to improve reliability, function or design.
NOTE:
In the United States, Federal Law stipulates that medical devices should only be sold to,
distributed and used by or by order of a licensed physician.

2 Used Icons
Icon Name and Circumstances

CAUTION: Possible dangerous situation: Light injuries or
damage to the equipment described in the manual and/or
damage to any other equipment or goods and/or environmental
pollution can be the consequence.
WARNING: Dangerous situation: Potential serious injury to a
user, engineer, patient or any other person and possible
mistreatment of patients can be the consequence.
DANGER: Direct, immediate danger: Death or heavy injuries
can be the consequence.
INSTRUCTION:
If used in combination with the warning or caution sign: Indicates
a specific instruction, which if followed exactly, avoids the
subject of the warning or caution.
If used without warning or caution sign: Indicates an instruction
where it is important to follow literally as described.
IMPORTANT:
Highlights very important actions which have to be carried out to
prevent malfunction.
NOTE:
Indicates advice to facilitate the following step or action.
Highlights unusual points.
Indicates background information.
Can be used to explain or highlight displays of the
graphical user interface.
Is additional information without influence on the action or step!

3 Labels
3.1 CE Mark
CE Mark This product carries the CE Mark. The CE Declaration (CE Conformity)
becomes invalid if the product is changed without explicit consent of the
manufacturer! This applies to all parts, not only to safety elements.
3.2 System Labels
All system labels and software version number locations are referred to within this service
document in the appropriate section.
Enclosed an overview of common labels, according to ISO 3864.
This list is not complete.
Hot Surface Laser Beam Magnetic Field Ionizing Radiation
Obstacles Corrosive Liquid High Voltage Hand Injuries

C&W_005.cdr

3.3 System Labels concerning Laser Radiation
According to its classification, laser radiation can lead to eye and skin injuries.
Each laser source is classified from class 1 to class 4, based on standard
DIN EN 60825-1:2007.
The table below lists the meaning of the different laser classes. Note the detailed
instructions in the user manual and technical documentation.
Class # Meaning Example Label
Class 1: Not dangerous to the human eye, even

when using optical instruments. Can
nevertheless produce irritating effects, CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
especially with low ambient light
conditions.
Class 1 M: Not dangerous to the human eye if no

optical instruments (magnifying glass or LASER RADIATION
binocular) are used. DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
Can nevertheless produce irritating OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
effects, especially with low ambient light CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT
conditions.
Class 2: Dangerous to the human eye for

intentional staring into the beam.
Not dangerous for short term exposure
< 0,25 seconds.
Using optical instruments does not
increase the risk of eye injury. LASER RADIATION
Can even for short term exposure < 0,25
seconds produce dazzling and irritating DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM
effects, especially with low ambient light CLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT

conditions.

Class # Meaning Example Label
Class 2M: Dangerous to the human eye when

staring into the beam or when using
optical instruments (magnifying glass or
telescope). No hazard for short term
exposure < 0,25 seconds (aversion
response of the eye) without use of LASER RADIATION
optical instruments. Can produce DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM
dazzling and irritating effects even for OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
short term exposure < 0,25 seconds, CLASS 2M LASER PRODUCT
especially at low ambient light conditions.
Class 3R: Possibly dangerous to the human eye for

direct view into the beam.
Risks of an eye injury is increasing with
duration of exposure.
Can produce dazzling and irritating
effects, especially with low ambient light LASER RADIATION
conditions.
AVOID DIRECT EYE EXPOSURE
CLASS 3R LASER PRODUCT
Class 3B: Normally dangerous to the human eye

for direct view into the beam.
Viewing diffuse reflections is normally not
dangerous.
Risk of small skin injuries or ignition of
explosive material if the power of the LASER RADIATION
laser beam is close to the upper limits of
class 3 B. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM
CLASS 3B LASER PRODUCT
Class 4: Dangerous to the human eye for direct

view into the beam or viewing diffuse
reflections.
Very often class 4 lasers also implicate a
fire hazard.
LASER RADIATION
AVOID EYE OR SKIN EXPOSURE
TO DIRECT OR SCATTERED
RADIATION
CLASS 4 LASER PRODUCT

4 Product Complaints
Any service person who has any complaints or has experienced any dissatisfaction in the
quality, durability, reliability, safety, effectiveness or performance of this product must
notify Agfa HealthCare by the Agfa HealthCare complaint procedure.
If the product malfunctions and may have caused or contributed to a serious injury of a
patient or an accident or if there are any hazards which may cause an accident
Agfa HealthCare must be notified immediately by telephone, fax or written
correspondence to the following address:
Agfa Service Support - local support addresses and phone numbers listed on:
www.agfa.com
Agfa – Gevaert N.V.

Septestraat 27
2640 Mortsel, Belgium.
Fax +32 3 444 4485
5 References
Technical Documentation is available via MedNet (PDF) and your local Agfa HealthCare
support organisation (Paper).
Access to MedNet:
IntraNet: http://docs.agfanet/bu/mi/mednet/mednetcso.nsf
ExtraNet: http://extranet.agfa.com/bu/mi/mednet/mednetcso.nsf

6 Intended Use
This Agfa HealthCare product should only be operated in a hospital or clinical radiological
environment by qualified staff.
It must only be operated according to its specifications and its intended use. Any
operation not corresponding to the specifications or intended use may result in hazards,
which in turn may lead to serious injuries or fatal accidents (for example electric shocks).
AGFA will not assume any liability whatsoever in these cases.
Make sure that the product is constantly monitored in order to avoid inappropriate
handling, especially by children.
The product must only be installed and put into operation under the specified conditions.
7 Intended User
This manual is written for Agfa trained Field Service Engineers and Clinical Application
Specialists, trained users of Agfa HealthCare products and trained diagnostic X–Ray
clinical personnel who have received proper training. Users are considered as the persons
who handle the equipment as well as the persons having authority over the equipment.
8 Qualifications for Operation and Service Tasks
This Technical Documentation describes adjustments and routines which must only to be
performed by qualified technical personnel.
The Agfa (trained) Field Service Engineers and Clinical Application Specialists must have
received adequate Agfa HealthCare training on the safe and effective use of the product
and applicable environmental and occupational safety matters before attempting to work
with it. Training requirements may vary from country to country.
Agfa (trained) Field Service Engineers and Clinical Application Specialists must make
sure that training is received in accordance with local laws or regulations that have the
force of law.
Your local Agfa HealthCare representative can provide further information on training.

9 Environmental and occupational Safety Instructions
Each Agfa (trained) Field Service Engineer and Clinical Application Specialist:
• Must make his or her personal contribution to improve safety and protect the
environment.
• When working on a customers site, has a duty to take reasonable care to avoid injury
to himself or herself or to others who may be affected by their acts or omissions.
• Is obligated to adhere strictly to regulations and instructions.
• Shall familiarise himself or herself with the provisions of the Agfa Healthcare
Health, Safety and Environment Policy and any specific rules or procedures relating to
occupational safety at work and the protection of the environment.
• Shall promptly report any near misses, accidents, incidents or dangerous occurrences
to their line manager and co-operate fully in any investigation.
• Shall co-operate with company management on matters relating to
health, safety and environment and, where appropriate, discuss with and / or assist
their manager in resolving matters relating to health, safety and environment.
• Shall ensure that any company equipment issued to them, or, for which they are
responsible, is correctly used and properly maintained.
• Shall wear protective equipment whenever instructed or if it is recommended to do so.
• Shall be responsible for good housekeeping in the area in which he or she is working.
• Shall report situations, which could put them at risk, on either company or
customers' premises, to their manager or supervisor; and, if warranted, directly and in
confidence, to the Health and Safety Co-ordinator, Global HSE Manager, or ultimately
to the Managing Director.
• Shall report any injuries, diseases or dangerous occurrences to his or her line
manager.
• Shall report any accidents, incidents or near misses to his or her line manager.
• Shall report any situation of which he or she is aware that is potentially dangerous.
• Shall comply with any health surveillance procedure instituted for his or her benefit or
for compliance with regulations.

10 Connections to other Equipment
Agfa HealthCare equipment must only be used in combination with other Agfa HealthCare
equipment or components if these are expressly recognized by Agfa HealthCare as
compatible. A list of such equipment and components is available from Agfa HealthCare
service on request.
Changes or additions to the equipment must only be carried out by persons authorized to
do so by Agfa HealthCare. Such changes must comply with best engineering practice and
all applicable laws and regulations that have the force of law within the jurisdiction of the
hospital.
The Agfa HealthCare products are designed to communicate with other devices in the
hospital network using DICOM protocols.
Connections to other equipment:

Warning:
Accessory equipment not complying with the safety requirements of this product
may lead to a safety hazard.
INSTRUCTION:
Consult the Technical Documentation before making any connections to other equipment.
Consideration relating to the choice of accessory equipment shall include:
• Use of the accessory equipment in the patient vicinity.
• Evidence that the safety certification of the accessory equipment has been performed
in accordance with the appropriate IEC 60601-1 and IEC 60601-1-1 harmonized
national standard.
In addition all configurations must comply with the medical electrical systems standard IEC
60601-1-1. The party that makes the connections acts as system Configurer and is
responsible for complying with the systems standard.
If required, contact your local service organization.

11 Accessories and Spare Parts
Parts and accessories replacement:

WARNING:
Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper operation.
INSTRUCTION:
• Replace defective parts with Agfa HealthCare original spare parts.
• Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the procedure.
• Only approved Agfa HealthCare accessories must be used. For a list of compatible
accessories contact your local Agfa HealthCare organization or www.agfa.com.
12 Compliance
Directive for HealthCare Imaging Products:

Council Directive 93/42/EEC of 14 June 1993 concerning medical devices
(OJ No L 169/1 of 1993-07-12)
• ANNEX I - ESSENTIAL REQUIREMENTS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The

products are designed and manufactured in such a way that, when used under the
conditions and for the purposes intended and, where applicable, by virtue of the
technical knowledge, experience, education or training of intended users, they will not
compromise the clinical condition or the safety of patients, or the safety and health of
users.
• ANNEX II - EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY: Full quality assurance system

ISO 13485
• ANNEX X - CLINICAL EVALUATION: The clinical evaluation follows a defined and

methodologically sound procedure.

Applied Standards for HealthCare Imaging Products
• IEC 60601-1, Ed. 3: Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General requirements for
basic safety and essential performance
• ISO 14971:2000, Medical devices – Application of risk management to medical devices
• IEC 60601-1-2, It specifies the MANUFACTURER of the ME EQUIPMENT or ME

SYSTEM provides information to the RESPONSIBLE ORGANIZATION that is essential
in determining the suitability of the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM for the
electromagnetic environment of use, and in managing the electromagnetic environment
of use to permit the ME EQUIPMENT or ME SYSTEM to maintain BASIC SAFETY and
provide its ESSENTIAL PERFORMANCE without disturbing other equipment.
Additional standards for documentation:
IEC 62079 Ed. 1: Preparation of instructions - Structuring, content and presentation
Harmonization:
Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF) www.ghtf.org/
This document has been prepared to comply with Study Group 1 guidance document
of the Global Harmonization Task Force (GHTF) www.ghtf.org/ to assist development
of a consistent, harmonized definition for a medical device that could be used within a
global regulatory model and would offer significant benefits to the manufacturer, user,
patient or consumer, and to Regulatory Authorities and support global convergence of
regulatory systems.
IECEE CB SCHEME
The IECEE CB (Certification Body) Scheme is the world's first truly international system
for acceptance of test reports dealing with the safety of electrical and electronic products.
It is a multilateral agreement among participating countries and certification organizations.
Agfa has produced a CB test report and claims national certification in all other member
countries of the CB Scheme.
Details see www.iecee.org

Radiation of radio frequency:

CAUTION: For USA only:
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the service manual, may cause interference
to radio communication.
Note:
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
computing device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to
provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial
environment.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference.
The user will be required to take all necessary measures to correct the interference at
his own expense.

13 Safety Directions for Operation
Accessibility of the mains power switch:

CAUTION:
Do not obstruct the mains power switch.
Position the Agfa HealthCare product so that it is possible to disconnect the mains power
connection.
• Under certain conditions the Agfa HealthCare product will show a display containing a
message. This message will show that either a problem or action has occurred or that
a requested action is required or cannot be performed. The user must read these
messages carefully they will provide information on what to do. This will be either
performing an action to resolve the problem or to contact the Agfa HealthCare
service organization. Details on the contents of messages can be found in this
Technical Documentation.
• All images created using any image technology can show artifacts which could be
confused with diagnostic information. If there is any doubt that the diagnostic
information could be corrupted, additional investigations must be performed to get
clear diagnostic information.
• Ventilation openings must not be covered.
• If you notice conspicuous noise or smoke, disconnect the product immediately from
the mains.
• Do not pour water or any other liquid over the device.
• If a system malfunction causes an emergency situation involving the patient, operating
personnel or any system component, activate the emergency stop for the system
concerned. All motor driven system movements will be stopped.
• Do not store any magnetic media near or on devices, which produce magnetic fields,
since stored data may be lost.
Explosive environment:
DANGER:
Risk of explosion.
Never operate this device in zones where there are flammable anesthetics or oxygen which
may cause an explosion.

Usage of an un-interruptible power supply:

Warning:
Images can be lost due to power failure.
Connect the equipment to an un-interruptible power supply (UPS) or an institutional
standby generator.
14 Radiation Protection
Only qualified and authorized personnel shall operate any X-Ray system. In this context
qualified means those legally permitted to operate this X-Ray equipment in the jurisdiction
in which the X-Ray equipment is being used, and authorized means those authorized by
the authority controlling the use of the X-Ray equipment. Full use must be made of all
radiation protection features, devices, systems, procedures and accessories.
Ionizing radiation can lead to radiation injuries if handled incorrectly. When radiation is
applied, the required protective measures must be complied with.
15 Safety Directions for Cleaning and Disinfection
• Details about cleaning and disinfection or sterilization methods that may be used on
SYSTEM parts or ACCESSORIES that can become contaminated through contact
with the PATIENT or with body fluids, are referred to within the individual service
documents.
• Disconnect the power supply from the equipment prior to cleaning the equipment.

16 General Safety Directions for Service Activities
• This system uses high voltage. Please consider the respective safety regulations.
• Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified electrician.
• Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified technician.
• The safety directions for operation (see section 13) are also valid for all service
activities.
• During all service activities observe prescribed local and country-specific
requirements (e.g. occupational safety and accident prevention regulations).
• All existing screw connections must be tightened sufficiently firmly, but they may not
be overstressed when tightening. There must always be compliance with stated
torque values!
• Damaged or missing screws may be replaced only with the same screw types that
have the specified hardness rating. Unless a different value is listed in the
instructions, all Allen screws used must be hardness rated 8.8.
• All screws must be secured in accordance with the corresponding data.
If "Loctite" has to be used to secure screws, this is stated in the text.
• Any Agfa service PC or tool which is to be connected via RS232, RJ45, USB or other
interface to an Agfa device must not be connected to the mains but must be operated
on its internal battery or indirect supply (low voltage).
• When handling printed circuit boards (abbr.: PCBs) the following points must be
observed:
o Always switch off the equipment and unplug the power cord, before you
disconnect or connect cables on printed circuit boards.
o When working on PCBs, always wear an anti-static wrist strap. Never touch any
parts or components on PCBs with your bare fingers.
o PCBs have to be kept or transported in their protection bags. Never carry a
PCB without protection bag and walk on carpet or plastic floor covering
(electrostatic charge).
o Once the PCB is taken out of its protection bag, it has to be protected from
electrostatic charge by a grounded mat.
Static discharge at electrical components:

CAUTION:
Static discharge! Electrical components may be destroyed:
For the repair on electrical components, wear a grounding strap
(Order number: CM+9 9999 0830 0) around the wrist and connect the other end of this
strap on a grounded conducting metal piece.

17 Safety Directions for Installation Planning Activities
Protecting CR (Computed Radiography) Equipment against scattered X-Rays:

Warning:
Image plate is sensitive for X-rays. Poor image quality possible.
The digitizer and the cassette storage shall be protected against X-ray radiation this way,
that the annual dose equivalent at the installation place will not exceed 1 mSv.
Protecting Film-Screen Systems against scattered X-Rays:

Warning:
Film is sensitive for X-rays. Poor image quality possible.
The film-screen system shall be protected against X-ray radiation this way, that the annual
dose equivalent at the installation place will not exceed 1 mSv.
Accessibility of the power disconnection device:

Warning:
Electrical device. Shock possible.
INSTRUCTION:
• Do not position Agfa EQUIPMENT so it is difficult to operate the disconnection device

when an APPLIANCE COUPLER or separable plug is used as isolation.
• Local and International wiring regulations must be observed. Check all supplies and
voltages, currents, trips and fuses with the Hospital facilities department or their
engineers.

• The device complies with the EN 60601-1, 2006 standard for Information Technology.
This means that, although it is absolutely safe, patients may not come in direct contact
with the equipment. Therefore the operator console must be placed outside a radius
of 1.5 m around the patient.
R = 1.5m
1.5m
1.5m
Patient environment
• This device should be installed behind the institution firewall for network security and
anti-virus protection. No ongoing computer virus protection or network security for this
medical device is provided (e.g. a computer firewall). Network security and anti-virus
provisions are the ongoing responsibility of the user or institution.
Fixing equipment at the wall or floor:

Warning:
Unknown composition of wall or floor structure: Risk of injury or damage:
Hospital management is responsible for the position, location and fixing of all equipment.
Floor load:
CAUTION:
Heavy device may damage the floor covering.
Make sure that the floor covering is solid enough to stand the weight of the device.
Fixing equipment at the ceiling:

CAUTION:
Ceiling construction may be inadequate for fixing of equipment: Risk of injury or
damage:
Hospital management is responsible for the position, location and fixing of all equipment.

18 Safety Directions for Installation Activities
• If not otherwise stated, installation and configuration is performed by Agfa HealthCare

trained personnel.
• If damage of the package is visible from the outside contact your local AGFA
representative.
• Apart from wearing the required protective clothing, e.g. safety boots and gloves, care
must be taken that heavy loads are correctly lifted/carried to avoid injury. The relevant
instructions must be complied with. Heavy or awkward loads must be moved by
mechanical means or by several people.
• When installing the product be sure that there is either a mains plug or an all-cable
disconnecting device in the internal installation fitted near the product and that it is
easily accessible.
• Defective covers, sharp edges or protruding parts of equipment can cause injuries, if
accidentally knocked into. Route cables and position equipment safely.
• This device should be installed behind the institution firewall for network security and
anti-virus protection. No ongoing computer virus protection or network security for this
medical device is provided (e.g., a computer firewall). Network security and anti-virus
provisions are the ongoing responsibility of the user or institution.
Connection of the device to the power supply:

CAUTION:
Risk of damaging the device by using the wrong power supply:
INSTRUCTION:
Prior to connecting the device to the mains:
• Compare the power requirements indicated on the type label with the available
power supply in the installation room.
• Check the service manual for the type of input voltage selection, manual or
automatic: If manual, select the appropriate voltage and fuses.
• Confirm to use the correct socket and plug for the required power supply.
• Check the equipment will work with the power supply available.

Ground potential differences:

CAUTION:
To comply with ISO 60601-1 (annex I) all computers and peripherals must be
connected to the same power source.
INSTRUCTION:
• Always connect the associated monitor to the same Uninterruptible Power Source as
the PC.
• When different combinations of equipment are used in various medical environments
a potential difference (V) can exist between the protective earths in different localities.
If the protective earthing fails this potential difference can cause a HAZARD for the
OPERATOR or for the PATIENT.
19 Safety Directions for Maintenance and Repair Activities
• This Technical Documentation identifies the parts on which preventive inspection and
maintenance shall be performed by Agfa HealthCare service personnel, including the
periods to be applied.
• In general the device has to be switched off during service activities. Exception: If the
device is switched on to perform tests pay particular attention to any hazards due to
moving and rotating parts. Avoid lose clothing or finger traps. Switch off the device
immediately after the tests.
• Do not turn motors manually. If required, first disconnect the motor from the motor
control board.
• Make sure that the power cord does not show any signs of damage.
• After repair work always check that the integrated safety features are not overridden
or disconnected.
• If there is any visible damage to the machine casing do not hand-over the product to
the customer. First repair the machine casing.

Replacing batteries:
WARNING:
Battery can explode, causing chemical burns.
INSTRUCTION:
• Check that batteries are inserted with correct polarity.

• Only use batteries of the same type or an equivalent type as specified by the
manufacturer.
• Dispose of empty batteries in compliance with the specifications of the manufacturer.
• When removing lithium batteries from the equipment take appropriate measures to
avoid short circuit of the battery:
Either use tape to cover the two poles of the battery or put the battery back in its
original packing and secure the packing by tape.
Performing the electrical test according to national regulations:

WARNING:
Improper ground connections inside the device or too high leakage current may lead to
electric shocks.
• After any work at the power supply or at any component connected to mains voltage
inform the responsible organization 1 about the necessity of the electrical test
according to national regulations.
If specific national regulations do not exist: It is recommended to perform the
electrical test according to IEC 62353.
• Make sure, that all grounding connections to metallic covers and all grounding
connections inside the device are present.
NOTE:
On MedNet, GSO Library path "General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
Service Manual" a form “IEC 62353:2007 Test Documentation” for CR Digitizers is
available, to be handed out to the responsible organization (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
1
Responsible Organization:
Entity accountable for the use and maintenance of a medical equipment or a medical equipment system. The
accountable entity can be, for example, a hospital or an individual clinician.
Performing service activities at devices emitting laser radiation:

WARNING:
Laser radiation. Eye injury possible.
INSTRUCTION:
• Strictly observe the warning notes in the service manual of devices emitting laser
radiation (See service manual chapter describing Safety Guidelines / General
Repair Instructions) and at the corresponding steps of instructions.
• Strictly observe the warning labels at the modules emitting laser light. For the
meaning of the labels refer to section 3.3 in this document.
• Do not look into the laser beam.
• Do not open modules containing a laser. Only open modules containing a laser if
explicitly instructed to do so.
• Do not keep tools in the laser beam unless explicitly instructed to do so.
• Make yourself familiar with the path of the laser light and the conditions, when the
laser beam is switched on. Refer to the Functional Description in the
corresponding service manual.
• Do not operate modules with laser outside the device.
Sharp edges:
CAUTION:
Sharp edges inside the device: Cut or abrasion possible.
Be careful at maintenance and replacement of parts.
Cleaning optical elements:

CAUTION:
Image artifacts possible after cleaning optical elements.
When cleaning optical elements follow the service manual precisely.

Secured screws:
CAUTION:
Opening screws secured by red lacquer may misalign important device
adjustments:
Do not open screws that are secured by red lacquer.
Opening PCs and Workstations:

Warning:
Electrical shock and damage to the equipment possible.
• Only open the PC or workstation if explicitly stated in the service manual.
• Unplug before opening.
• Observe anti-static safety regulations.
Replacing fuses:
Warning:
Replacing fuses by wrong type may lead to fire hazard!
Use only fuses of the exact value and characteristics stated in the service manual or on
the device.
20 Safety Directions for remote Service Activities
Remote Service Activities:

Warning:
During remote service activities images can be lost.
Inform the customer prior to remote service activities to finish the current work and to
stop working on the system.

21 Safety Directions for Transport and Shipment of Spare Parts,

Accessories and Devices
• In compliance with transport regulations, all uninterruptible power supplies (UPS)

must be shipped with batteries disconnected.
• Use the original packing when returning spare parts, accessories or devices.
• Before returning any spare part with a built in lithium battery remove it and dispose the
batteries locally according to local waste regulations.
22 Safety Directions concerning Modifications
Modifications made in products/systems shipped by Agfa HealthCare must not be

implemented without written permission from Agfa HealthCare.
This applies in particular to changes which may affect the mechanical and/or electrical
safety or radiation-protection properties of a product (e.g. changing of safety distances,
removal of locks/instructions etc.).
23 Safety Directions concerning Hazardous Materials
'Hazardous materials' is the designation for substances which can ignite or explode or
which are toxic, injurious to health, corrosive or irritating. The “Hazardous Material”
instructions must be read and the required protective measures must be complied with
when performing work to avoid health risks.
Their properties together with the hazards and protective measures connected with them
are identified clearly by symbols and described by the instructions appertaining to the
hazardous substances.
24 Recycling
Agfa HealthCare has Recycling Passports available for all equipment. The Recycling
Passport explains whether hazardous materials, special components and batteries are
present, where they are located and how they can be removed at the end of the life cycle.
The Recycling Passports are meant to be used as information for waste treatment
partners and companies that want to recycle end-of-life Agfa equipment.
To get a copy of the required Agfa HealthCare Recycling Passport please contact your
local Sales organization.

25 Waste Disposal
On August 13, 2005, the European Directive on Waste Electrical and

Electronic Equipment (WEEE) 2002/96/EC, amended by Directive
2003/108/EC, came into force.
The directive on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) aims to

prevent the generation of electric and electronic waste and to promote the
reuse, recycling and other forms of recovery. It therefore requires the collection
of WEEE, recovery and reuse or recycling.
This directive has to be implemented into national law by the individual
European countries by August 13th 2005.
Due to the implementation into national law, specific requirements can be

different within the European Member States.
This symbol on the product, or in the manual and in the warranty, and / or on
its packaging indicates that this product shall not be treated as household
waste.
For more detailed information about take-back and recycling of this product,
please contact your local Agfa service organization. By ensuring this product is
disposed of correctly, you will help prevent potential negative consequences
for the environment and human health, which could otherwise be caused by
inappropriate waste handling of this product. The recycling of materials will
help to conserve natural resources.
If your equipment or replaced spare parts contain batteries or accumulators
please dispose of these separately according to local regulations.
26 Erasing Protected Health Information (PHI)
AGFA HealthCare Field Service Personnel or its authorized affiliates are responsible for
the removal of Protected Health Information (PHI) patient data from devices, modules or
parts that are removed from the customer’s site. This also applies to the exchange of
spare parts, especially to parts that are returned to central warehouses for repair or
refurbishing. Examples for parts or modules that may contain Protected Health
Information (PHI) are: Computer hard disks, CD-ROMS, backup tapes, archive tapes.

DD+DIS150.05E Controls, Connections and Set Up Procedures
Chapter 1:
List of contents
1 General safety instructions............................................................ 1
2 Installation Checklist ...................................................................... 3
3 Printer Installation Wizard.............................................................. 5
4 Printer settings................................................................................ 8
4.1 Film calibration ................................................................................................. 8
4.2 Default densitometer ...................................................................................... 10
4.3 Film view.......................................................................................................... 11
4.4 Beep on empty tray......................................................................................... 12
4.5 RF Tag.............................................................................................................. 13
4.6 Site data........................................................................................................... 14
5 Film Calibration ............................................................................. 15
6 Printer - Modality connection....................................................... 16

6.1 Modality set-up ............................................................................................... 16
6.2 Logical printers Set-up................................................................................... 17
6.3 Printing of diagnostic and / or test images .................................................. 18
6.4 Image adjustments ......................................................................................... 19
6.4.1 Image Adjustments as described in the Connectivity Release Document.................... 19
6.4.2 Image Adjustment at the Modality................................................................................. 20
6.4.3 Basic Image Adjustment at the Printer via Key-Operator Menu ................................... 23
6.4.4 Alternative: Image settings via DICOM host profile: ..................................................... 26
7 Acceptance Test............................................................................ 27
8 Completion of installation ............................................................ 28

8.1 Customer Instruction...................................................................................... 28
8.2 Backup of Printer Settings............................................................................. 29
Printed copies of this document are not controlled.

The reader should always refer to MedNet to ensure that they are working with the latest copy of the document.
Edition 1, Revision 0 Drystar 5302 Chapter 1 / I
2005-09-09 (Type 5366/100) Agfa Company Confidential
1 General safety instructions
⇒ The DRYSTAR 5302 is suitable for continuous operation.

⇒ The DRYSTAR 5302 enables or helps in the diagnosis of a patient.
When operating or maintaining the DRYSTAR 5302 always observe the

following safety guidelines:
• Have electrical or mechanical defects repaired by skilled personnel only!
• Do not override or disconnect the integrated safety features.
• Ventilation openings may not be covered.
• Always switch off the DRYSTAR 5302 and disconnect the power cord
from the outlet before carrying out any maintenance work.
Always take into account the markings provided on the inside and outside
of the printer. A brief overview of these markings and their meaning is
given below:
Safety warning, indicating that the DRYSTAR 5302 User and

Reference Manuals should be consulted before making any
connections to other equipment. The use of accessory equipment
not complying with the equivalent safety requirements of this
printer may lead to a reduced level of safety of the resulting
system. Consideration relating to the choice of accessory
equipment shall include:
Use of the accessory equipment in the patient vicinity.
Evidence that the safety certification of the accessory equipment
has been performed in accordance with the appropriate IEC
60601-1 and IEC 60601-1-2 harmonized national standard.
In addition, all configurations must comply with the medical
electrical systems standard IEC 60601-1-1. The party that makes
the connections acts as system configurator and is responsible
for complying with the systems' standard. If required contact your
Agfa Service Organization.
In order to reduce the risk of electric shock, do not remove any
covers.
Caution hot:
Keep hands clear from the Thermal Print Head.
Type B equipment:
Indicates that the DRYSTAR 5302 complies within the limits for
type B equipment.

Edition 1, Revision 0 Drystar 5302 Chapter 1 / 1
Controls, Connections and Set Up Procedures DD+DIS150.05E
Supplementary protective earth connector:

Provides a connection between the DRYSTAR 5302 and the
potential equalization busbar of the electrical system as found
in medical environments. This plug should never be
unplugged before the power is turned off and the power plug
has been removed.
Intergrounding connector:
Provides a connection between the printer and other
equipment which might exhibit minor ground potential
differences. These differences may degrade the quality of
communication between different equipment. Never remove
connections to this terminal.
Protective earth (ground)
Provides a connection between the printer and the protective
earth of the mains. Do not remove this connection, because
this will have a negative influence on the leakage current.
Power/Reset Button
Note that the power cord has to be disconnected from the wall
outlet in order to disconnect the unit entirely from the mains.
Precautions for use in USA only:
Make sure that the circuit is single-phase center-tapped, if the
printer is connected to a 240 V/60 Hz source instead of a
120 V/60 Hz source.
Transport after installation
Before moving the printer, always switch off the machine. The DRYSTAR
5302 should always be transported by 2 persons. When doing this, the
stability and the structure of the table top have to be taken into account.
The printer should not be placed on a soft surface, since this might
prevent appropriate ventilation and cause overheating. Nothing else
should be installed on the same table, and measures should be taken to
prevent table shock, while this may cause image artifacts. The appliance
shall only be transported with all covers closed. The appliance shall not be
transported continuously from one location to the other. Do not lift the
printer by the output tray.
Waste disposal and environmental regulations

In most countries DRYSTAR film is considered industrial waste and is not
allowed to be disposed of as household waste. Please consult your local
waste disposal regulations. Agfa recommends to have DRYSTAR film
waste hauled away by a licensed company.
After its life span, do not dispose of the DRYSTAR 5302 without
consideration of local waste disposal regulations. Please consult your
local service organization.

Chapter 1 / 2 Drystar 5302 Edition 1, Revision 0
Agfa Company Confidential (Typ 5366/100) 2005-09-09
2 Installation Checklist
Purpose of the installation checklist:
• to give an overview of all steps, that are required for the installation of the
printer;
• to provide a reference to the corresponding section of the "Drystar 5302
Plug & Play Installation Manual" (abbreviated: P&P) and "Controls,
Connections and Set Up Procedure" section where the topics are further
explained.
The "Drystar 5302 Plug & Play Installation Manual" is part of delivery and
can be downloaded on MEDNET, HealthCare library.
# Step Task refer to .... Okay

Code
Installation Prerequisites:
1. Check installation site prerequisites INS P&P 5
2. Check shipment completeness INS Packing Slip
3. Prepare required tools INS P&P 1
4. Remove transport protection locks INS P&P 6 to 8
5. Connect the cables INS P&P 9
Printer set-up:
6. Set film size tabs INS P&P 10
7. China only: Stick Chinese warning INS P&P 11
label above the existing one
8. Load films INS P&P 12 & 13
9. Startup the printer INS P&P 14
Printer Installation Wizard:

10. Go through printer installation wizard INS section 3

# Step Task refer to ..... Okay

Code
Printer settings:
11. Adjust Film calibration (optional) APPL section 4.1
12. Select Default densitometer (optional) APPL section 4.2
13. Set Film view (optional) APPL section 4.3
14. Adjust Beeps on empty tray (optional) APPL section 4.4
15. Adjust behavior for unreadable RF APPL section 4.5
Tag (optional)
16. Enter site data APPL section 4.6
Film calibration
17. Perform a film calibration for both film INS section 5
trays
Printer - Modality connection

18. Let the modality be set-up SIC section 6.1
19. Set-up logical printers (optional) SIC section 6.2
20. Print diagnostic and/or test images SIC section 6.3
21. Adjust image settings (optional) APPL section 6.4
Acceptance Test
22. Perform acceptance test APPL section 7
Completion of installation
23. Instruct the Customer in operation of APPL section 8.1
the printer
24. Save settings on backup CF card INS section 8.2

3 Printer Installation Wizard

The purpose of this section is to show the most important settings of the
printer during installation via Installation Wizard.
Before the printer installation wizard can be started, the steps 1 to 9 of the
Installation Checklist (refer to section 2) have to be completed.
The Printer Installation Wizard guides Printer Installation Wizard

step by step through different Key-operator
parameters. menu
Figure 1 beneath ...

8 Installation
• shows how to enter the
Installation Wizard 2 Printer Install. Wizard
• lists the parameters which have to

Language
be entered Date and Time
PRINTER IP-ADDRESS
NETMASK
ROUTER IP-ADDRESS
A more detailed description of the CALLED AE_TITLE
Hostname
printer Installation Wizard is available Domain name
in the Drystar 5302 Reference Daily used modality name
Brand
Manual in section 'Using the Modality Type
installation wizard'. CALLING AE_TITLE('modality name')
Select Output Tray
The Reference Manual is part of Preferred film type
delivery and available on MEDNET, Save configuration
Reset
HealthCare Library.
5364_Reg01_001_e.cdr
Figure 1

Remark concerning necessity of PC connection:

All adjustments at the printer can be made via browser connection.
Most adjustments can also be made via key-operator menu.
In following cases a PC network connection is mandatory, as these settings
only can be made via browser pages.
• To enter site specific data
• To configure Logical printers
• To define a host profile for special Image or Connectivity settings
(Annotations, OEM Lut etc.)
The example screens for configuration user interfaces are further on

browser related. The path to access the screens is the same for local
keypad and browser.
The way of entering data is more complex at the local keypad, as all data
have to be entered via the available four navigation keys, the escape and
confirm key.

Remark to PC Connection:
The printer default IP address is 169.254.10.10.
The printer automatically assigns an IP address to the PC, in case it is set-up
for obtaining an IP address automatically. This is done via Automatic Private
IP Addressing, short: APIPA. For more info refer to section 3.2.
Setting for Windows 98 / Windows ME / Windows 2000:
Select “Control Panel – Network – Properties – Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) –
Properties – Obtain an IP address automatically". Refer to Figure 2
Note: The path may differ for different operating systems.
Setting for Windows XP:
Select “Control Panel – Network Connections – Local Area Connection –
Properties – Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) – Properties – Tab: Alternative
Configuration – Automatic Private IP address". Refer to Figure 3
As the IP address of the printer after installation is usually different from

169.254.XXX.XXX, APIPA connection can only be used during installation.
After change of the IP address to one different from 169.254.XXX.XXX and
reboot the APIPA connection is not possible anymore.
Figure 2: Windows 98, ME, 2000 Figure 3: Windows XP network

network setting setting
Recommendation: Make a bookmark in your browser for

IP address 169.254.10.10

4 Printer settings
The purpose of this section is to show additional settings of the printer that are
not covered by the Printer Installation Wizard.
The following table lists these settings.
Printer Setting Importance Accessible via ...* Details see...

Film calibration optional Key-operator menu 4.1
Default densitometer optional Key-operator menu 4.2
Film view optional Key-operator menu 4.3
Beep on empty tray optional Key-operator menu 4.4
RF Tag optional Service menu 4.5
Site data mandatory Service menu 4.6
4.1 Film calibration
Accessible via menu: Key-operator menu - 2 Change settings - 4 Image

Quality - 1 General
Purpose of the setting: A) Define whether automatic calibration shall be

executed at insertion of a new film pack
B) If set on ON, define the number of filmpacks,
after which the film calibration shall be
executed.
Default value: ON - every 5 filmpacks
The film calibration menu is accessible via key-operator menu on the keypad
and key-operator menu via browser.

Example browser
Welcome to this
screen: DryStar 5302 printer
Key-Operator - Change Image quality settings
Default film calibration off

on
Default Densitometer Macbeth TR924

Gretag
X-Rite 301
X-Rite 310
Accept changes Discard changes Reset Values
Welcome to this
DryStar 5302 printer

Select frequency
Every 5 packs
536601fa.cdr
Figure 4

4.2 Default densitometer

Quality - 1 General
Purpose of the setting: Define a default densitometer. Density values

displayed during calibration or the QC procedure
will be displayed re-calculated for this default
densitometer.
Default value: Macbeth TR924
The default densitometer menu is accessible via key-operator menu on the

keypad and key-operator menu via browser.
Example browser
Welcome to this
Default film calibration off

on

Gretag
X-Rite 301
X-Rite 310
536601fb.cdr
Figure 5

4.3 Film view

Accessible via menu: 2 Change settings - 2 Input tray
Purpose of the setting: Change the film view in case the film curl is
desired to be towards the light box
Default value: Normal
The film view menu is accessible via key-operator menu on the keypad and
key-operator menu via browser.
Example browser
Welcome to this
Key-Operator - Change input tray settings
Upper input tray
Film view Normal

Back
Tag film format 14x17"
Overruling to film format 14x17"

11x14"
14x14"
10x12"
Tag film type DT2B
Overruling to film type Drystar DT2B

Drystar DT2C
Lower input tray
Film view Normal

Back

11x14"
14x14"
10x12"
Tag film type DT2B
Overruling to film type Drystar DT2B

Drystar DT2C

536601fp.cdr
Figure 6

4.4 Beep on empty tray
Accessible via menu: Key-operator menu - 2 Change settings - 1

General
Purpose of the setting: Adjust whether or not the customer shall be

informed via audible beeps about an empty tray.
Default value: Audible alarm on - beep 5 times
The 'beep on empty tray' menu is accessible via key-operator menu on the
keypad and key-operator menu via browser.
Example browser
Welcome to this
Key-Operator - Change general settings

Date: 19 Oct. 2004
Time: 08 30 00
Language English
Chinese Simpl.
Japanese
Beep on empty tray 5 beeps

Keypad contrast (60 ... 80) 68 Typical 68
Keypad backlight (0 ... 100) 50
* Site name
* Site address
* City
* Country code (tel)
* Telephone
Modem
* Department
* Contact person
* Delivery address
E-mail address
Comments
536601fq.cdr
Figure 7

4.5 RF Tag
Accessible via menu: Service menu - 2 Change settings - 2 Input Tray
Purpose of the setting: Define the behavior of the printer in case the RF
tag is not readable or available
Default value: Printing with Dmax=2.00
The 'RF-tag' menu is accessible via service command session via browser
only.
Example browser
Welcome to this
Service - Change input tray settings

If RF-tag is missing or malfunctioning
Printing with Dmax=2.00
Printing not possible
Upper input tray
Film view Normal

Back

11x14"
14x14"
10x12"
Tag film type DT2B
Overruling to film type
536601fr.cdr
Figure 8

4.6 Site data
Accessible via menu: Browser pages - Service Engineer tools - Enter

key-operator command session - 2 Change
settings - 1 General
Purpose: Fill in site data to have an entry in the infocounter

about the installation site.
Default value: None
The site data menu is accessible via the browser pages only
Note: It is mandatory to fill in site data. Otherwise after each switch on /
reboot of the printer a hint is displayed to enter the site data.
Example browser
Welcome to this
Key-Operator - Change general settings

Date: 19 Oct. 2004
Time: 08 30 00
Language English
Chinese Simpl.
Japanese

Keypad backlight (0 ... 100) 50
* Site name
* Site address
* City
* Telephone
Modem
* Department
* Contact person
* Delivery address
E-mail address
Comments
536601fq2.cdr
Figure 9

5 Film Calibration
The purpose of this section is to show the tasks that are required for film
calibration
(1) Load the films the customer will

use in the upper and lower film
tray. Refer to note below.
(2) Select in key-operator menu
'6 Calibration - 1 Film
Calibration'
(3) Follow the instructions on the
display.
The calibration film will be
printed and measured
automatically by the printer
(see Figure 10)
(4) Repeat film calibration for
second input tray
536336as.cdr
Figure 10
The films delivered with the printer may only be used for test purposes.

6 Printer - Modality connection

The purpose of this section is to show the tasks that are required for
connection of the printer to the modality.
The following table lists these tasks.
Task Importance Accessible via ... Details see...

Let the modality be mandatory -- 6.1
set-up
Set-up logical printers optional Browser pages 6.2
Print diagnostic and/or mandatory -- 6.3
test images
Adjust image settings optional Key-operator menu 6.4
and Browser pages
6.1 Modality set-up
(1) Let the modality be set-up ate the modality.

(2) Tell the modality service engineer following printer parameters
• Printer Type (Agfa Drystar 5302)
• IP address
• AE-title
• Available film formats

6.2 Logical printers Set-up
Accessible via menu: Browser pages - Service Engineer Tools - DICOM

profile editor - Setup DICOM print SCP Servers
Purpose: Define more than one logical printer. This may be

required in case a modality sends images from
different applications to the printer. See also Info
next page
Default value: Only one logical printer.

Internal name: DEFAULT_SCP
Called AE title: DS5302
The DICOM print SCP setup menu is only accessible via the browser pages.
Example browser HOME HELP DICOM Print SCP Setup
screen: Setup one or more Dicom SCP servers on this device:

One 'Dicom Print SCP server' is capable of handling multiple Dicom
print associations
Dicom Print SCP
Internal Name: DEFAULT_SCP

Listen at Port: 104
Max. allowed associations: 10
Secure channel (SSL):
Comments:
OK Create new Dicom Print SCP Cancel Changes require reboot
5366_Reg01_003_e.cdr
Figure 11
Before creating additional logical printers, first try to adjust the Image Quality
parameters at modality side! The default Image Quality of the printer fits
almost all applications!
Only if changes at the modality side cannot be done, or the modality does
not deliver the required results, create logical printers and make adaptations
for these applications at the printer side to reach the customers Image
Quality requirements.

To configure logical SCP printers can

be necessary, in case for example
printing is initiated at a PACS system,
which has several modalities as
input.
Example:
The PACS system collects CR and
DSA images.
• CR images shall be printed with
taste LUT Kanamori
• DSA images shall be printed with
linear taste LUT.
Problem:
The workstation at the PACS system
has one AE title. The Drystar 5302
does not recognize, for which type of
modality (CR or CT) the user wants
to print.
Solution:
• Create one logical printer
'Drystar5302_CT' and one
'Drystar5302_DSA'.
• Create two different host profiles Figure 12
for the two logical printers, one
with Kanamori LUT, the other with
linear taste LUT.
• In the workstation setup both
printers: The user has to select
the proper logical printer.
The number of logical SCP printers is not limited. As each configured SCP
server consumes resources of the printer, use as little SCP servers as
possible. Rule of thumb: Define max. 4 logical printers.
6.3 Printing of diagnostic and / or test images
(1) Print a few diagnostic images from the connected modalities.

(2) Compare them at the lightbox with the image on the monitor.

6.4 Image adjustments
Image adjustments in general can be made at the modality and / or the printer.
For many modality - printer combinations the required image adjustments are
described in a Connectivity Release Document.
The systematic image adjustment is split up in following steps:
Step # Description Details see...

1 Perform adjustments as described in the 6.4.1
Connectivity Release Document for the modality
- printer combination.
2 If required, try to perform image adjustments at 6.4.2
the modality
3 In case the required image adjustment at the
modality is not possible, perform it at the printer.
Possibility 1: Via Key-operator menu 6.4.3
Possibility 2: Via DICOM profile Browser pages 6.4.4
In case the printer is part of a solution (e.g. IDIS Solution), refer to the
solution specific requirements concerning image adjustments.
6.4.1 Image Adjustments as described in the Connectivity Release Document
Connectivity Release Documents describe all parameters and required

adjustments to guarantee:
• Communication between modality and the printer
• Image adjustment at the modality and / or the printer.
MEDNET Path Connectivity Release Documents are available in MEDNET, HealthCare

Library - General Info - Connectivity & Application
In case
• The customer is not satisfied with the adjustments as described in the
Connectivity Release Document or
• For this modality connection no Connectivity Release Document exists
Continue with next step: Image Adjustment at the Modality.

In case a Connectivity Release Document for a modality - printer connection

is available for Drystar 4500 (M), Drystar 5500 or Drystar 5300 only, this can
also be used for Drystar 5302.
The Drystar 5302 behavior is with some exceptions the same as the
behavior of the other printers mentioned above.
Main differences:
• Compared to Drystar 4500 M, the Drystar 5302 does not support
Mammo functionality (Dmax > 3.6 O.D)
• Compared to Drystar 5500, the Drystar 5302 does not support the
function to select a certain output tray (as only one is available).
• Compared to Drystar 5300, the Drystar 5302 supports 2 different film
sizes or types simultaneously.
6.4.2 Image Adjustment at the Modality
Before adjusting the image quality at the printer, first try to adjust it at the
modality as described here! The default Image Quality of the printer fits
almost all applications!
Only if changes at the modality cannot be done, or the modality does not
deliver the required results, make adaptations for these modalities at the
printer to reach the customers Image Quality requirements.
Contrast Adjustment at the Modality

The Look-Up-Table is responsible for the contrast of the image (in
combination with Dmin and Dmax) and may be named at the modality:
• Taste LUT
• Perception LUT
• Correction LUT
• Presentation LUT
If possible use the "Kanamori Taste LUT" (if available also Dmax) to define the
contrast.

Sharpness Adjustment at the Modality
Case 1: Modality sends in page mode:

In case the modality sends the images in page mode (i.e. it does not send
single images to the printer but already the complete, prepared image
information for one film) use Cubic Bell interpolation. It is defined via following
smooth factors:
Cubic Bell smooth factors

Possible range 299 (less sharp) to 200 (very sharp)
Reasonable values 251 (less sharp) to 235 (very sharp)
Default value 245
Interpolation Smooth Factors Legend

Limits
299 251 245 235
200 Default
Cubic Bell
299 251 245 235 200
less sharp sharp too sharp
Reasonable values
536601GJ.CDR
Figure 13
Case 2: Modality sends in image mode:

In case the modality sends the images in image mode (i.e. it sends single
images to the printer to let the printer compose the single images for one film)
use Cubic High Res interpolation. It is defined via following smooth factors:
Cubic HighRes smooth factors

Possible range 199 (less sharp) to 101 (very sharp)
Reasonable values 148 (less sharp) to 138 (very sharp)
Default value 143
Interpolation Smooth Factors
199 148 143 138 101

Cubic High Res
536601GK.CDR
Figure 14

The printer switches automatically to cubic Bell interpolation by evaluation of

the DICOM communication when no image scaling (i.e. magnification or
reduction) is required:
Cubic HighRes interpolation type does not sharpen the image.
Interpolation type 'Cubic Bell' sharpens the image however, independent
whether scaling is required or not.
This automatic switching is only performed in case the Interpolation Type is
adjusted to 'cubic high res' in the user profile (= default).
This behavior can be switched off via browser pages: Path "Service Tools -
Scaling Setup"
HOME HELP Controller Setup
Reduction icon on image: yes
Kernel: when no image scaling is needed for CubicHighRes:
Automatically switch to CubicBell: yes
Use CubicBell smooth factor: 0.9 ( >= 0.1 and <= 10 )
OK Changes require reboot

536401GN.CDR
Figure 15

6.4.3 Basic Image Adjustment at the Printer via Key-Operator Menu

Quality - <Modality XYZ>
Purpose: Adjust Image Quality in case it cannot be adapted

at the modality
Default value: • Look-up table: Kanamori. Refer to Figure 17

• Interpolation: Cubic HiRes -0.7. Refer to
Figure 18
• Dmax 3.20
Example browser
screen:
Welcome to this Welcome to this
DryStar 5302 printer DryStar 5302 printer
Key-Operator - Change Image quality settings Key-Operator - Change Image quality settings
Daily used name CT2 Select kanamori like value:

Modality AE-title CT2_ARC 100
Linear Select abosulte smoothing factor: (advised = -0.7)
Look Up Table:
Kanamori
Kanamorilike -0.7
Interpolation:
Replication
Linear Accept changes Discard changes Reset Values
CubicHi-res
CubicBell 536601fs.cdr
Maximum density: 280

285
290
295
Figure 16
Hint concerning interpolation settings:

Interpolation setting "Linear" usually gives too smooth image impression.
Interpolation settings "Replication" usually gives too "pixely" image
impression.
Both settings are used in exceptional cases only.

Possible Look up table settings
Dmax
Kanamori curve and
Kanamori like value
220 Kanamori_like 100 = Kanamori
200 Kanamori_like 200 = linear
100
Kanamori_like 220 = logarithmic
mori 75
Kana
Dmin Input
0 255
536401GM.CDR
Figure 17
Legend
Interpolation Smooth Factors (Kernel values) Limits
Default
5.9 1.1 0.9 0.7 0.1 5.9 1.1 0.9 0.7 0.1
Cubic Bell
Reasonable values
-0.2 -0.7 -1.2 536601GL.CDR
4.9 -4.9
Cubic High Res
Figure 18
For details regarding image adjustments refer to the Hardcopy Application

Manual DD+DIS078.05E.
Each of the image adjustment parameters can be set for a specific modality.
Changing a parameter value will change the value of the respective
parameters in the 'DICOM Host profile’ for that specific modality.

Important remark: In changing parameter values this does not automatically

ensure that the value is applied.
Two situations can be distinguished
• In case the modality does not send a parameter, the value set in the
printer is applied to the modality print job.
• In case the modality sends a parameter value, even when an empty
value (" ") is sent, this value still has priority above the value set in
the printer. So, the value sent by the modality has higher priority then
the value set in the printer, and therefore it is always preferred to set
the required parameter value at the side of the modality.
If this cannot be done, an overrule flag can be set for the respective
parameter in the 'DICOM Host profile'. Setting this overrule flag can
only be done by editing the 'DICOM Host profile' via browser.
Refer to section 6.4.4.

6.4.4 Alternative: Image settings via DICOM host profile:

Accessible via menu: Browser pages - Service Engineer Tools - DICOM
profile editor -
Purpose: Adjust Image Quality in case it cannot be adapted
at the modality
Default value: Refer to Figure 19
Example browser HELP Host Profile: Name XYZ
screen: These are the default settings for all print jobs coming from the host
(modality) specified under 'Calling AE title'.
The values may be overloaded at run-time by the Dicom input.
You can prevent this by checking the checkboxes at the left side.
Nick Name: Name XYZ
Use this profile only for incoming 'Calling AE title': Host AE
Use this profile only for local SCP server: all
Host Profile type: GENERIC-GENERIC Change
Number of Copies:
Print Priority: low
Polarity: normal
Film Orientation: portrait
Trim: no
Film Size ID:
Medium Type:
Print even if Film Size ID/Medium type not supported: yes
Print even if Application type not supported: no
Kernel: site Edit Custom Interpolation Type cubicHighRes,
Magnification: Edit Magn: max smoothFactor: -0.7
Pixel Size: Edit ratio: 1.0 / 1.0
Perception LUT: kanamori
Kanamori Like value:
Custom value:
Illumination (cd/m2):
Reflected Ambient Light (cd/m2):
Border Density (OD x100):
Empty Image Density (OD x100):
Minimum Density (OD x100):
Maximum Density (OD x100): site 300
Header Annotation:
Contents: none Edit Custom
Font: site Edit Custom
Footer Annotation:
Window (%):
Level (%):
Image Orientation: r0
Conformance/Status Level: 0
Nevent enabled: off
Mammo modality: NO site
Association Timeout (s):
Image Timeout (s):
Allow IMPLICIT VR LITTLE ENDIAN:
Allow EXPLICIT VR LITTLE ENDIAN:
Allow EXPLICIT VR BIG ENDIAN:
Resolution: 508
Supported SOP classes: Edit
Early processing allowed: yes
LR like: off
OK Cancel Show Defaults Show last Input
Manually customized items are show in red
The last received input values are show in blue (click 'Show Last Input' button)
5366_Reg01_009_e.cdr
Figure 19
For details regarding image adjustments refer to the Hardcopy Application

Manual DD+DIS078.05E.

7 Acceptance Test
Purpose of the acceptance test:
Proof of printer reproduction capability of image on the monitor
Figure 20
Perform the acceptance test according to national regulations.
Example for Germany: DIN6868 Part 56
The German DIN6868 Part 56 is similar to the Image Quality Control

procedure based on IEC1223-2-4.
The Image Quality Control procedure based on IEC 1223-2-4 is described in
the Hardcopy Application Manual DD+DIS078.05E.

8 Completion of installation
The purpose of this section is to show the tasks that are required for customer
instruction and backup of printer settings.
The following table lists these tasks.
Task Importance Accessible via ... Details see...

Instruct the Customer in mandatory -- 8.1
operation of the printer
Save settings on backup mandatory Key-operator 8.2
CF card menu
8.1 Customer Instruction
(1) Instruct the customer in following activities:
Activity Refer to User or

Reference Manual ....
Switching on the printer: Warm up time 7 min. User manual: "Switching on
the Drystar 5302"
Switching off the printer. It can take up to 20 User Manual: "Switching off
secs. until the printer switches off the Drystar 5302"
Loading films: RF tag and its function User Manual: "Loading
films"
Removing film jams Reference manual
"Troubleshooting: Clearing
of film jams"
Show dust stripes on a previous test film and Reference manual
how to prevent: "Troubleshooting Checklist"
• Keep printer always closed
• Clean TH resistor line with alcohol and
lint free cloth when dust stripes appear or
when printer displays "Printhead cleaning
(2) Hand over the user and reference manual to the customer

8.2 Backup of Printer Settings
(1) Open the upper film tray to take

out the CF card for storage of
the machine specific data.
(2) Select Key-operator menu "4
Save Configuration"
(3) Follow the further instructions on
초
the LCD display 2
5366_Reg01_017_e.cdr
Figure 21

HEALTHCARE Chapter 2
Imaging Services Functional Description
DRYSTAR 5302
Type 5366/100
► Purpose of this document
This document explains the functional principle including the functions of the individual
assemblies.

Revision Date compared to previous Version 1.0
1.1 06-2009 • Updated technical data in table, where different Drystar
printers are compared. See section 2.1.
• Updated table with detailed comparison of Drystar 5302
with Drystar Axys: Added new functions of software
2.0.0_C2. See section 2.2.
• Updated table with overview of calibrations.
See section 4.
Document Title
DD+DIS141.09E Service Bulletin 10: Software 2.0.0_C2 available

eq_02_functional_e_template_v07
DD+DIS150.05E Functional Description
► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or maintenance task on
the equipment.
the product.
NOTE:
To verify the latest version of single documents and of Service Manuals refer to the
Document Type ‘Order List’ in the GSO library.

Edition 1, Revision 1 DRYSTAR 5302 Chapter 2 / 2

06-2009 Type 5366/100 Agfa Company Confidentia
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................4
2 COMPARISON TO OTHER AGFA B&W PRINTERS ..............................................................5
2.1 Technical Data compared to Drystar 5300 and Drystar 5503 ..................................................5
2.2 Detailed Comparison Drystar 5302 – Drystar Axys ..................................................................6
3 FILM RUN.................................................................................................................................7
3.1 Backside Printing Recognition ................................................................................................13
3.2 Left / Right Shift Print Algorithm..............................................................................................14
4 CALIBRATIONS .....................................................................................................................16
5 MODULES ..............................................................................................................................17
5.1 Printer Modules .......................................................................................................................17
5.2 Hardware.................................................................................................................................19
5.3 Modules and E-Labels ............................................................................................................21
6 DIAGNOSTIC SOFTWARE ....................................................................................................23

7 THERMAL MODEL.................................................................................................................25


06-2009 Type 5366/100 Agfa Company Confidential
1 Introduction
Purpose of the printer

• Medium resolution (320 dpi) DICOM network dry printer for
14x17", 14x14", 14x11", 10x12", 8x10" DT2 blue base or clear base films
Printing principle
• Direct thermal on thermo-sensitive, dry films
• 2 input trays and 1 output tray
Main application
• Well suited to all medical applications, especially CR applications. Cannot be used
for mammography
Connections
• 1 Gb/s Network connection (Default: automatic detection of 10Mb/s and 100Mb/s
network is enabled, automatic detection of 1Gb/s network is disabled)
Service Concept
• Customer installable
• No service PC needed for basic installation, maintenance and service, but is
convenient for entering detailed host profile settings
• Strict modular design: Production assemblies = service assemblies
• All switches, sensors and motors are monitored via current measurement on
main engine board (Devil CPU)
• If online diagnosis does not detect the exact reason for the error, an offline check
of the modules can be performed via browser pages
DX-S CR QS
53
66
02 Printer
Ultrasound ad
.cd
r
Service
Host
Figure 1: Typical network installation of a Drystar 5302


2 Comparison to other AGFA B&W Printers
2.1 Technical Data compared to Drystar 5300 and Drystar 5503
POWER
Technical Drystar 5302 Drystar 5300 Drystar 5503

Specification (SW Rel. 2.0) (SW Rel. 2.1) (SW Rel. 6.0)
Weight 90 kg 55 kg 193 kg
Throughput 75/h (14x17") 70/h (14x17") 100/h (14x17") up to
140/h (8x10") 100/h (11x14“) 160/h (8x10“)
Dmax 3.2 O.D.* 3.1 O.D. 3.2 O.D.
Resolution 320 dpi 320 dpi 508 dpi
Warm-up time 4 minutes → queuing 4 minutes → queuing 4 minutes → queuing
7 minutes → printing 9 minutes → printing 9 minutes → printing
Access time 77 s for 1st film 14x17” 77 s for 1st film 14x17” 76 s for 1st film 14x17”
Film formats (inch) 8x10, 10x12, 11x14, 11x14, 14x17 8x10, 10x12, 11x14,
14x14, 14x17 14x14, 14x17
Number trays 2 1 3
Applications All medical All medical All medical applications
applications, except applications, especially
mammography CT/MR, except
mammography
* Dmax depends on densitometer which is used for measurement:

Densitometer Target Dmax DT2B Target Dmax DT2C
X-Rite 310 3.20 O.D. 3.05 O.D.
X-Rite 331 3.14 O.D. 3.02 O.D.
X-Rite 341 3.15 O.D. 3.02 O.D.
X-Rite 301 3.10 O.D. 2.97 O.D.
MacBeth 3.13 O.D. 3.00 O.D.
Gretag D200 3.14 O.D. 3.03 O.D.


2.2 Detailed Comparison Drystar 5302 – Drystar Axys
The design of the Drystar Axys is based on the Drystar 5302 printer.
This section shows the differences in detail.
Main hardware differences:
Hardware Drystar 5302 Drystar Axys Reason for Difference

Thermal Head 320 dpi resolution 508 dpi resolution 508 dpi resolution required
for mammo printing
Main engine Themis CPU Thanos CPU Thanos is faster than Themis
controller CPU to support higher data
throughput due to higher
resolution
Main functional differences:
Drystar Drystar
5302 SW < 5302 SW ≥ Drystar
# Function: 2.0.0_C2 2.0.0_C2 Axys Details see:
1. Support of Mammo printing Section 3.6 of the
Drystar Axys
service manual.
2. Entering Site Data via data Chapter 1,
from "Site Data Tool" Controls,
Connections and
Setup Procedure
3. Import / Export of DICOM Online HELP of
host profile the printer
4. "True size deviation" host Online HELP of
profile parameter the printer
5. "Cropping" host profile Online HELP of
parameter the printer
6. Printing of the infocounter Chapter 3.2,
on film Machine specific
Tools
7. Resistor measurement to Chapter 3.6,
troubleshoot print stripes Adjustments and
Calibrations
8. Horizontal film alignment Chapter 3.6,
available in the key- Adjustments and
operator menu (to be Calibrations
executed by the customer)
9. Smart Profile Calibration Section 4 of this
chapter


3 Film Run
This section describes the film run through the printer.
Cam drive Output Rollers

Motor
TH Suspension drive
Drum
CDM
Rollers driven by Filmrun
1 4
gearbox module 2
upper tray
3
(1 to 5)
Pickup Unit 5
Vacuum Pump
Filmrun
lower tray
536602ag.cdr
Figure 2: Filmrun through the printer
Description of one film cycle:
1. The vacuum pump starts.
Figure 3: Pump & Valves Module


2. The suction cups of the pickup

unit move down to the film.
Figure 4: Film Pickup
3. The gear box module starts

driving the rollers. In addition it
opens the feeding rollers at the
pickup unit.
4. The pickup unit transports the
film between the feeding
rollers.
5. The gearbox module transports
the film further towards TH.
Figure 5: Gear Box Module


6. In case the film is transported

upwards from the lower tray,
the input sensors monitor the
film run.
Figure 6: Input Sensors Module
7. The cam drive moves the TH

up, to let the film edge be
transported between TH and
drum.
Figure 7: Cam drive


8. Depending on the previous film

width (14" or 10"), the
suspension drive changes
position or stays in the current
position (TH pressure
adjustment).
9. The cam drive closes the gap
between TH and drum.
Figure 8: Suspension drive
10. The drum motor moves the film

forward.
Figure 9: Drum Drive


11. The heat transfer from TH to

film takes place.
Figure 10: Thermal Head
12. The print drum, driven by the

drum motor, moves the film
forward.
Figure 11: Print Drum


13. When the film edge reaches

the output module, the CDM
checks "backside printing".
For details refer to section 3.1.
Figure 12: CDM
14. When printing is finished, the

cam drive opens the gap
between TH and drum.
15. The output rollers transport the
film out of the printer.
Figure 13: Output Module


3.1 Backside Printing Recognition
Films are inserted in the printer with the backing layer on top.
If a film is inserted with the backing layer upside down, the backing layer can
contaminate the thermal head, as it begins melting when the thermal head heats
it up.
Normally it is not possible to insert a film wrong. If a customer however re-inserts
a jammed film, the chance is 50% that he inserts it the right way. See NOTE next
page.
To prevent that a wrong inserted film contaminates the thermal head, the printer
prints a small rectangle on top of the film and checks when the film arrives at the
CDM, whether this small rectangle has Dmax.
In case the density is below a certain threshold, the film must have been inserted
wrong. The printer stops printing, informs the user of back-side printing, to check
the correct positioning of the film and to remove the film jam. Thus the thermal
head is only contaminated slightly, as the film is only printed a few cm on the
wrong side.
Black Rectangle for

Backside Printing Recognition
Distance
TH - CDM
Film printed on the

Diagnostic Area Non-Emulsion side
("Backside").
Border
(O.D. between Dmin and Dmax; Backside printing
Refer to Host Profile parameter "Border Density")
Remove film jam
536602dc.cdr
Figure 14: Backside printing recognition


NOTE:
The emulsion side in general is slightly Noise
smoother than the backing layer. This can be (dB)
Backing layer
heard by wiping over it → The backing layer
makes much more noise. Emulsion layer
The backing layer has to be on top when the

film is laying in the tray.
Figure 15
3.2 Left / Right Shift Print Algorithm
At this position, where the TH has to print always Dmax, i.e. at the left and right image
border, the TH looses its characteristic relatively fast, which is determined by the Micro
profile calibration in production.
As a consequence, the TH produces after many prints small print stripes at this position
in 14" films, where the black border of the 10" films is located.
To prevent, that the TH has to print the black border always at the same position, a
left/right shift algorithm is built in.
For each film pack the complete image information is shifted slightly:
• Pack 1 has 0 mm shift
• Pack 2 has +0.3 mm shift
• Pack 4 has -0.3 mm shift
• And so on
The clear left and right borders are influenced by this shift mechanism but they are
within specification.


Exaggerated print stripes

without left / right shift algorithm
Image Info Image Info
Left / right shift algorithm

+0,3 mm +0,3 mm
Image Info Image Info Image Info

14x17"
Shift of complete
8x10" Image Info
+- 0.3 mm
Image Info Image Info Image Info for each film pack
536602dd.cdr
Figure 16: Left / right shift print algorithm


4 Calibrations
The following table lists the different Drystar 5302 calibrations:
Characteristic CDM TH profile Film Smart Profile Compliance Film
Film printed
Purpose of the To determine new To reduce vertical To measure the film Equalization of TH Make film calibration
calibration reference values for macro banding sensitometry and to resistor drift in the this accurate, that it
the CDM. This is (vertical density use these values for area of 10" film black passes the
done via an external irregularities). Only internal reference, so borders when acceptance criteria
densitometer. macro density that the printer printing in mixed as defined by
compensation is behaves linear format conditions Afssaps / EUREF:
possible (in opposite regarding density (mix of 10" and 14" The default film
to micro reproduction. In print width). calibration procedure
compensation in addition, the is not necessarily
production). maximum density is accurate enough.
adapted.
To be done in • Whenever the Unacceptable line • At maintenance • During the • Before the
following internal artifacts visible in troubleshooting Afssaps / EUREF
cases densitometer has medical service test • To compensate procedure. Refer acceptance test
to be adapted to image small density to chapter 3.3,
an external variations of the Troubleshooting • Each 6 months, if
densitometer (for new film, when a the printer is
image quality new film package • In certain cases under control of
control) is used during Afssaps / EUREF,
maintenance. and it did not pass
• If density Refer to section 9, the Afssaps /
reproduction Maintenance EUREF calibration
check is not ok check
Automatic No No Yes, but only if No No

yes/no switched on*
* Automatic film calibration to be switched on via menu:

'2 Change settings - 5 Image Quality - 1 General - Select Default for Film Calibration


5 Modules
This section is divided in following sub-sections:
Item Section
Printer modules 5.1
Hardware 5.2
Modules and E-Lables 5.3
5.1 Printer Modules
This section lists the different printer modules (= spare parts).
Figure 17: Printer Modules


# Name E-Label* Purpose Also used in MOD #**

1 KEYPAD/DISPLAY Yes User Interface Drystar 5300 10
MODULE Drystar Axys
2 GEAR BOX & BELT - Film drive towards TH Drystar Axys 14
3 SUSPENSION DRIVE - TH pressure adjustment (10" / 14" Drystar Axys 15
MODULE film width)
4 Themis PCB W/O RAM - CPU (Operation; image processing) - 12
5 512Mb RAM MODULE - RAM for operating system Drystar 5300 18
Drystar Axys
6 DEVIL PCB Yes CPU (film run) Drystar Axys 08
7 VILIS COOLING FAN - Cools down Devil/Themis/RAM Drystar 5300 20
Drystar Axys
8 TPH COOLING FAN - Cools down TH Drystar Axys 16
9 POWER SUPPLY Yes Main power supply for all consumers Drystar Axys 09
10 HARD DISC 73 GB - Data storage Drystar 4500 --
Drystar Axys
11 OUTPUT MODULE Yes Film transport out of printer. Density Drystar Axys 06
measurement with integrated CDM
12 TPH FILTER MODULE - TPH dust filter Drystar 5300 --
Drystar Axys
13 PUMP & VALVES ASSY - Vacuum for suction cups of pickup Drystar 5500 17
module Drystar 5503
Drystar Axys
14 Input Sensors Module - Filmrun check before print drum Drystar Axys 11
15 DRUM DRIVE MODULE - Drum drive Drystar Axys 07
16 OSB SWITCH BOARD - TH power Drystar 5300 --
Drystar Axys
17 PRINT DRUM MODULE - Print drum; Transport during printing Drystar Axys --
18 THERMAL HEAD Yes Image transfer to film - 05
19 TAG READER ASSY - Film tag reader Drystar 5500 --
Drystar 5503
Drystar Axys
20 UPPER / LOWER PICK Yes Film pickup via 2 suction cups Drystar Axys 03/04
UP MODULE
21 UPPER / LOWER TRAY - Film supply Drystar Axys 01/02
without Tag Reader
22 CAM DRIVE MODULE - TH position adjustment (printing / Drystar Axys 13
film transport in and out of TH
section)
*For description of E-Label refer to section 5.3.
** The Module number is shown in error messages. Example: "MOD13: Please replace module"
NOTE:
This list does not show all spare parts. Parts that have no real function during
printing, like the covers or hand grips are not listed. Refer to chapter 5 for a
complete spare parts list.


5.2 Hardware
This section shows an overview of all hardware components and lists their purpose.
Key 6 board Devil CPU SCSI Hard disk drive
> 73 GB
Display
RS232
ETH IDE
Sensors CF drive
Motors
Pumps
PCI
Power Supply
Data RS232
Thermal Head Themis board
Power 512 MB RAM
OSB Board
536602da.cdr
Figure 18: Hardware Components Overview
Hardware Component Description

Themis Board • CPU: Keeps the operating system and
application software in RAM
(512 MB) during operation
• Keeps a flash EPROM for Bootup
• Performs image processing
Devil CPU • Controls all sensors, motors, valves and
pump
• Controls the power supply
• Sends the image data to the Thermal Head
• Provides for following connections:
- SCSI interface to hard disk
- CF card reader
- Ethernet 1 Gb/sec. twisted pair
interface
- RS232 service port


Hardware Component Description

Key 6 Board • Controls the display with 122 (width) x 32
(height) pixels
• Controls all buttons and LEDs required for
operation
Hard disk • Keeps the operating system, all application
software and diagnostic data
CF drive • To save or install data via CF card type II
Thermal head • Transfers the diagnostic data (pixels) via
heating elements to the heat sensitive film
OSB board • Switch board for the different TH heating
elements
• Provides the power for heating up the resistor
elements
Power supply • Supplies all voltages for the printer (+3,3 V,
+ 5 V, +12 V, -12 V, +20 V, +24 V, + 55V)
• Connected via RS232 interface to the Devil
board, to allow saving temporary data before
switch off


5.3 Modules and E-Labels
The E-Label is a small EPROM attached to the module, which keeps information about
the module, like e.g.:
• Name
• Hardware Version
• Nr. of print cycles
• Last error code
An example for the readout of an E-Label is given in Figure 20
In case the E-label is defective or not connected the printer issues a warning message.
Printing is possible however also without E-label.
The decision, whether a module has an E-label or not depends on whether the
corresponding module:
• Can be repaired in the repair center or
• Requires module specific data
The table in section 5.1 lists, which module has an E-Label.
Figure 19: Example for E-Label at Power Supply


_____________________________
Name....................................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/name
Name....................................Value OUTPUT ASSY
HardwareVersion.................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/hardwareVersion
HardwareVersion.................Value 3
OrderNumber.......................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/orderNumber
OrderNumber.......................Value
PartNumber..........................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/partNumber
PartNumber..........................Value
RdeNumber..........................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/rdeNumber
RdeNumber..........................Value A333462.3
SerialNumber.......................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/serialNumber
SerialNumber.......................Value 40
FirstUseDate........................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/firstUseDate
FirstUseDate........................Value
LastUseDate........................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/lastUseDate
LastUseDate........................Value
HoursOfOperation...............Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/hoursOfOperation
HoursOfOperation...............Value 1876
NrOfCycles...........................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/nrOfCycles
NrOfCycles...........................Value 21166
LastRepairDate....................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/lastRepairDate
LastRepairDate....................Value
RepairSiteName...................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/repairSiteName
RepairSiteName...................Value
NrOfRepairs.........................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/nrOfRepairs
NrOfRepairs.........................Value 0
LastRepairCode...................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/lastRepairCode
LastRepairCode...................Value
LastModuleSpecificErrors...Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/lastModuleSpecificErrors
LastModuleSpecificErrors...Value HC205007
NominalCalIntensity............Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/rde/nominalCalIntensity
NominalCalIntensity............Value 9500
MinCalIntensity...................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/rde/minCalIntensity
MinCalIntensity...................Value 8500
MaxCalIntensity...................Uri http://www.agfa.com/module/Output/rde/maxCalIntensity
MaxCalIntensity...................Value 10500
_____________________________
RandomUri
RandomValue
backToMain produce request randomRequest reconfigureThisELabel
Figure 20: Example for E-Label content


6 Diagnostic Software
An online diagnosis software is permanently monitoring the correct feedback signal and
timing of the valves and the pump, motors and sensors which are connected to the
Devil module.
In case of a mismatch an error is issued.
Example message:
MOD04
Please replace module
Application Online Devil CPU

Printer Software Diagnosis
Software
Operating System
536602aa.cdr
Figure 21


Errors are internally divided into:

• Events
• Warnings
• Defects
In general events are user clearable, warnings are "key-operator"

(= experienced user or hospital technician) clearable, whereas defects have to be
repaired by service personnel.
Warnings and error messages are written into the infocounter.
Errors: Classification and treatment

Filmrun
Step 1
user
clearable
Message in plain text.

Online E.g. 'close upper cover'
Diagnosis
key-operator
clearable
event
everything no warning Message in plain text:
okay? E.g. CDM not calibrated
defect
yes
Infocounter
service
B clearable
Filmrun
Step n Error message:
HC10907:
Suspension motor M3 not
connected or malfunctioning
536602af.cdr
Figure 22


7 Thermal Model
The thermal model can be characterized as follows:
• It is a mathematical description of the interaction Film – TH.

• It uses parameters like film thickness, thermal conductivity of the film, TH
temperature, environmental temperature, print speed and resolution of the print
head.
• The thermal model TMML (Thermal Model Multi Layer; R&D name of the product
Æ official name 'A # Sharp') describes this interaction very accurate, leading to a
very precise reproduction of the image.
• With the thermal model "TMML" the image looks very sharp and has the image
quality of a Laser Imager.
Heat of following
pixel
Heat of previous Drum
pixel temperature
Heat of neighbor
pixel TH temperature
Thermal Model
Mathematical
Pixel Stream Thermal Model
Description of Pixel Stream
Interaction Film - TH
Parameter Z Thermal conductivity

film
Parameter Y
Thermal sensitivity
film
Parameter X
Figure 23


Repair and Service
DD+DIS150.05E Machine specific safety instructions and hints for repair work
Chapter 3.1:
List of contents
1 Machine specific safety equipment, precautions and hints........ 1

1.1 Safety equipment for repair work .................................................................... 1
1.2 Safety precautions of the printer..................................................................... 1
1.2.1 Safety switch................................................................................................................... 2
1.2.2 Supplementary ground cable .......................................................................................... 2
1.3 Guidelines regarding safety during service work .......................................... 3
1.3.1 General safety guidelines for service work ..................................................................... 3
1.3.2 Safety Guidelines for Printed Circuit Board Replacements ............................................ 3
1.3.3 Safety Guidelines regarding Service PC Connection ..................................................... 4
1.3.4 Safety Guidelines regarding the Thermal Print Head ..................................................... 4
2 Safety check upon completion of the repair work ....................... 5
2.1 Visual check ...................................................................................................... 5
2.2 Electrical check................................................................................................. 6
2.2.1 Basic Protective Earth Test............................................................................................. 6
2.2.2 Electrical Check according to National Regulations. ...................................................... 7

Edition 1, Revision 0 DRYSTAR 5302 Chapter 3.1 / I
Repair and Service
1 Machine specific safety equipment, precautions and

hints
This section describes all machine specific safety aspects to be considered
during repair work on the printer.
It is divided into the following sub-sections:
Sub-section Details see..

Safety equipment for repair work 1.1
Safety precautions of the printer 1.2
Guidelines regarding safety during repair work 1.3
1.1 Safety equipment for repair work
During repair work at printed circuit boards it is mandatory to wear an anti-

static wrist strap (order no.: CM+9.9999 0830.0).
This avoids static discharges on electronic components. Static discharges
can lead to defective components on the printed circuit boards.
1.2 Safety precautions of the printer
This section describes all machine specific safety precautions built into the
printer.
It lists following safety precautions:
Safety precaution Details see..

Safety switch 1.2.1
Supplementary ground cable 1.2.2

Edition 1, Revision 0 DRYSTAR 5302 Chapter 3.1 / 1
Repair and Service
Machine specific safety instructions and hints for repair work DD+DIS150.05E
1.2.1 Safety switch
• The machine has one safety

switch, located below the top
cover.
• It serves as a safety feature if
someone opens the machine e.g.
to remove a film jam. S8
When the top cover is opened, the

safety switch is activated.
536631aa.cdr
It cuts off the voltage to all motors
and the print head.
Figure 1
For service purposes the safety switch SW1 can be overridden by

means of a service key. In this case there is a risk of injuries by moving
mechanical or current-carrying electrical parts.
Before the printer is closed the service key must be removed again,
otherwise the mechanism of the safety switch may get damaged.
1.2.2 Supplementary ground cable
To meet the regulations for the printer according to the machine standards
EN60601-1 there is usually no Supplementary ground cable required. This
also applies to installations in the patient's room.
Exception:
• The printer is located in the patient's room AND is connected to
equipment not corresponding to EN60601-1.
In this case a Supplementary ground Equipotential plug

cable must be connected to the
provided 'Equipotential plug'
connector at the back of the printer.
The supplementary ground cable is

not included in the machine
shipment.
Specifications of the cable:

• green/yellow color, 536631JM.cdr
• cross-section of 4 mm2.
Figure 2

Chapter 3.1 / 2 DRYSTAR 5302 Edition 1, Revision 0
Agfa Company Confidential (Type 5366/100) 2005-09-09
Repair and Service
1.3 Guidelines regarding safety during service work
This section describes the safety guidelines to be considered during service

work.
Safety precaution Details see..
General safety guidelines for service work 1.3.1
Safety Guidelines for Printed Circuit Board Replacements 1.3.2
Safety Guidelines regarding Service PC Connection 1.3.3
Safety Guidelines regarding the Thermal Print Head 1.3.4
1.3.1 General safety guidelines for service work
The following points must be observed during all repair or maintenance work:
Make sure to always disconnect the machine to be repaired or maintained
from the mains.
• Caution: Even when the machine is switched off, as long as it has not
been disconnected from the mains some components may still be
supplied.
• Caution: If the mains connection is absolutely necessary for the
respective action (repair and maintenance work), this job must only be
done by trained personnel.
• Before printer service or replacing conductive parts always switch off the
printer and disconnect the power.
• Before switching the printer off make sure that there are no films being
printed at this time.
• Replace defective parts with original spare parts only.
1.3.2 Safety Guidelines for Printed Circuit Board Replacements
When handling printed circuit boards (abbr.: PCBs) the following points must
be observed:
• Always switch off the printer and unplug the power cord, before you
disconnect or connect cables on printed circuit boards.
• When working on PCBs, always wear an anti-static wrist strap. Never
touch any parts or components on PCBs with your bare fingers.
• PCBs have to be kept or transported in their protection bags. Never carry
a PCB without protection bag and walk on carpet or plastic floor covering
(electrostatic charge).
• Once the PCB is taken out of its protection bag, it has to be protected
from electrostatic charge by a grounded mat.

Repair and Service
1.3.3 Safety Guidelines regarding Service PC Connection
Most of the Service PCs are not in compliance with the EN60601-1
standards. Therefore a Service PC which is to be connected via RS232 or
RJ45 interface to a printer must not be connected to the mains but must be
operated on its internal battery supply (low voltage). Only in this case the
printer keeps its EN60601-1 compliance.
However, if the service PC is connected to the RS232 or RJ45 interface and
has to be connected to the mains, take care, that nobody touches the printer.
1.3.4 Safety Guidelines regarding the Thermal Print Head
During operation the Thermal Print

Head gets hot (up to 70 °C).
• Avoid contact with the Thermal

Print Head due to the risk of burn.
• Observe the corresponding sticker
on the Thermal Print Head.
Figure 3
When replacing the Thermal Head the following points must be observed:
• The thermal head has a printed circuit board integrated. This means, that
the same safety guidelines apply for the Thermal Head than for printed
circuit boards (see 1.3.2.)
• The aluminum surface, on which the Thermal Head is mounted, may not
be scratched during replacement of the Thermal Head. Possible scratches
have to be removed with a sand paper or a file, to prevent uneven
pressure of the Thermal Head on the film.
• When replacing or cleaning the Thermal Head take care not to damage
the Thermal Head: Too high pressure on the TH film guide can lead to the
failure of single heating elements. Be aware, that the Thermal Head is a
very sensitive part and has to be treated very cautiously

Repair and Service
2 Safety check upon completion of the repair work

Upon completion of any repair job, especially after replacing or installing
conductive parts, check the following points as a routine safety check.
Country specific regulations must be observed as well.
Safety check Details see..

Visual check 2.1
Electrical check 2.2
2.1 Visual check

• Make sure that the power cord and the cables inside the machine do not
show any signs of damage.
• Make sure that the ventilation slots before the print head and the power
supply are free and that the print head and power supply ventilation is
working properly.
• Make sure, that no obstacles can cause stumbling (e.g. cables), and no
defective covers, sharp edges or parts sticking out in the vicinity of the
machine can cause injuries.
• Make sure that no smoldering spots or wrong cabling is visible.
• Make sure that all grounding connections to metallic covers are present.

Repair and Service
2.2 Electrical check
In case of power supply replacements or Maintenance check the protective

earth resistance according to the national regulations.
The electrical check is split up in two steps:
Step Task Details see..

1 Perform the basic protective earth test 2.2.1
2 Perform the electrical check according to 2.2.2
National Regulations.
2.2.1 Basic Protective Earth Test

(1) Use a multimeter that is
capable to measure a
resistance < 1 Ohm
(2) Put one probe at the ground
connector of the mains input
(3) Put the other probe at a few
metallic parts, the customer
could touch. 536631JN.cdr
The electrical resistance has to

be ≤ 0.2 Ohm.
Refer to Figure 4. 2
Figure 4

Repair and Service
(4) Insert the power cord at the

printer side; leave it
disconnected at the wall side.
connector of the mains
connector.
(6) Put the other probe at a few 536631JK.cdr

could touch.
The electrical resistance in this
case has to be ≤ 0.3 Ohm.
Refer to Figure 5.
Figure 5
In case the electrical resistance of one measurement exceeds the limits (0.2
Ohm without mains cable; 0.3 Ohm with mains cable) check the printer for
loose grounding connections!
2.2.2 Electrical Check according to National Regulations.

(1) Perform the electrical check according to National Regulations.
The electrical checks that have to be performed in certain intervals (e.g. each
12 months) or after certain service actions (repair and/or maintenance)
depend on National Regulations.
Example for Germany: BGV A3 and DIN VDE 0751 or subsequent
regulations.

Repair and Service
DD+DIS150.05E Machine specific tools, software tools and auxiliary means
List of Contents
1 Machine specific Tools..............................................................1
1.1 Mandatory tools ......................................................................................... 1
1.2 Optional tools............................................................................................. 2
1.2.1 Minimum configuration of the Service PC ................................................................3
1.2.2 Recommended configuration of the Service PC ......................................................3
2 Software Tools ...........................................................................4

2.1 Key-operator menu on the local keypad .................................................. 5
2.2 Infocounter ................................................................................................. 5
2.2.1 Infocounter Analysis via Printers Infocounters Report .............................................7
2.2.2 Infocounter Analysis via Service Command session ...............................................8
2.2.3 How to evaluate the Infocounter ..............................................................................8
2.3 Test images ...............................................................................................10
2.3.1 Testimage STI1......................................................................................................11
2.3.2 Testimage STI2......................................................................................................13
2.3.3 Testimage SMPTE .................................................................................................14
2.3.4 Testimage Medical_Image .....................................................................................16
2.3.5 Testimage LinCheck ..............................................................................................17
2.4 Show Error Codes.....................................................................................18
2.5 Web Pages.................................................................................................18
2.5.1 Operator Tools .......................................................................................................20
2.5.2 Key-Operator Tools................................................................................................21
2.5.3 Service Engineer Tools ..........................................................................................22
2.5.4 Connection to the web pages.................................................................................25
2.5.5 Usage of the web pages ........................................................................................29
2.6 Printer Logging .........................................................................................37
2.6.1 Required information for the support center...........................................................37
2.6.2 Printer Bootup-Message ........................................................................................39
2.7 ADVP ..........................................................................................................43
2.7.1 ADVP as DICOM print SCU ...................................................................................44
2.7.2 ADVP as DICOM print SCP (Print Emulator) .........................................................44
2.7.3 ADVP as Communication Recorder.......................................................................46
3 Software Installation................................................................49
3.1 SW Update: Loading a SW Patch ............................................................49
3.1.1 Software Update via CF card .................................................................................50
3.1.2 Software Update via a remote computer................................................................50
3.2 Emergency SW Installation on a new, empty Hard Drive ......................51
3.3 Emergency SW Installation on a printer in
"Error - System Failure" state..................................................................52

Edition 1, Revision 0 Drystar 5302 Chapter 3.2/I
Repair and Service
1 Machine specific Tools

In addition to the conventional service tools which every service engineer has
in his toolbox, the following tools are required for service on the printer:
1.1 Mandatory tools

The mandatory tools are required for repair, troubleshooting or maintenance of
the printer.
Tool Part Number Purpose
Anti-static wrist strap CM+9.9999.0830.0 To avoid static discharges
on electronic components
Cleaning tissue (box of 50 CM+309931.0 To clean the TH
pieces)
Densitometer* To be bought locally To perform CDM
calibration
Ink Eraser 'Pelikan' 10+999991176.0 For the 'dry TH cleaning'
procedure
Isopropyl Alcohol and lint Commercially To clean the TH.
free cloth available Alternative to Cleaning
tissue
Loop 8x CM+9.9579.9904.0 To check image quality of
films at the lightbox
Service key CM+9.0426.6309.0 To override the safety

switch
Standard ruler (1mm) Commercially For horizontal image
available adjustment
*As DT film used in the Drystar printers has a slightly different color
compared to conventional films, different densitometers give different density
readings, depending on the light source.
To make a correct density measurement use only a calibrated densitometer

MacBeth TR-924, X-Rite 331, X-Rite 341, X-Rite 301, X-Rite 310 or Gretag
D200-2. Other densitometers are not supported.

Edition 1, Revision 0 Drystar 5302 Chapter 3.2/1
Repair and Service
Machine specific tools, software tools and auxiliary means DD+DIS150.05E
1.2 Optional tools

The optional tools are required in exceptional cases only.
Tool Part Number Purpose
Crossed network EB+72010270 To get access to the printer
cable or commercially homepage, in case access via the
available hospital network is not possible.
RS232 null-modem EB+44160021 To get access to the printers
cable for the Service terminal level. Only required in
PC (SUB D 9F/9F) exceptional cases for
troubleshooting.
Compact Flash EB+72010600 To read/write the CF-cards on a
reader/writer USB Desktop/Service PC.
PCMCIA CF-card EB+72010160 To read/write the CF-card on the
adapter Service PC.
External CF-card CM+343356.0 To install and/or save software &
128 MB data.
Service PC Commercially To perform different service actions
available. (access to the printer homepage;
evaluate infocounter etc.)
See also 1.2.1
and 1.2.2 on
page 3.

Chapter 3.2/2 Drystar 5302 Edition 1, Revision 0
Repair and Service
1.2.1 Minimum configuration of the Service PC

The following specification is an absolute minimum configuration for the
Service PC:
Type Laptop
Screen VGA compatible, 800x600 Pixel
Mouse integrated
CPU Pentium, 133 MHz
RAM 64 Mbytes
Hard disk 2 Gbytes
Disk drive 3.5 ‘ – 1.44 Mbytes
CD-ROM drive 24-times
Serial port COM1 or COM2 available
Network board Ethernet ≥ 10 Mbps
Operating system Windows 95, 98 or NT
Browser Internet Explorer ≥ 5.0
Modem analog 56 Kbps or ISDN
As the printer has a CF card reader integrated, it is important to have a

Service PC with CF card reader (USB or PCMCIA)
1.2.2 Recommended configuration of the Service PC

The national Agfa GICS department (Global Information and Communication
Services) is responsible for selection and configuration of the Service PC.
The actual specification is available via Agfa Intranet: Follow the link:
Agfa Intranet – IT helpdesk - GICS Intranet - Infrastructure Standards - Agfa
standards for PCs, laptops, printers, organizers, mobiles,...
For employees not directly working at Agfa - and so not getting the service
PC directly from GICS, we recommend to use the minimum configuration of
the Service PC mentioned above as a guideline regarding PC hardware and
software.

Repair and Service
2 Software Tools
Following software tools are available
Software Tool Purpose Details see..
Key-operator Perform most of the required service 2.1
menu on the local actions
keypad
Infocounter Troubleshooting 2.2
Test images Troubleshooting image faults; 2.3
Confirmation of perfect image quality
Show error codes View reason, meaning and cure of error 2.4
codes
Web Pages Perform DICOM attribute adjustments, 2.5
e.g. image adjustments
Logging View the online logging for 2.6
troubleshooting purposes
ADVP Test the DICOM communication 2.7
between modality and printer
Besides the functions offered in the Service menu and the WebPages no
other service software is available nor required.

Repair and Service
2.1 Key-operator menu on the local keypad
PURPOSE The key-operator menu allows most of the actions that are required for
installation, repair and maintenance of the printer.
USE (1) Press the Key-operator menu key

to select the Key-operator
menu.
(2) With the and keys select
the desired menu, (or the desired
character when entering text).
(3) Use the and keys to
select the desired digit.
(4) Press to confirm a selection or
to cancel.
536601ga.cdr
Figure 1
NOTES (1) The Key-operator menu is also available via the Web pages
(username: drystar, password: 5302).
(2) For a complete description of the Key-operator functions, please refer to
the DRYSTAR 5302 Reference manual.
An overview of all key-operator menus is available in section 3.7,
‘Software menus, Settings’.
2.2 Infocounter
PURPOSE The infocounter is used for troubleshooting purposes and for investigation of
the printer history before maintenance.
It contains following information:
- General information about the printer
- Information about the installation site of the printer
- Information about the configuration and hardware components of the
printer
- Statistics about service interventions
- Statistics about machine reliability
- Error history
This information about the printer is located in a persistent database.
Every 10 minutes there is an automatic update of the database on the hard
disk.

Repair and Service
A copy of the infocounter data is always stored in the battery RAM of the
printer. At software installation the contents of the battery RAM are written to
the hard disk drive.
This guarantees, that the infocounter data are not lost after exchange of the
hard disk drive
To view the infocounter a service PC is required.

Two possibilities exist to get the infocounter on the Service PC:
# Type of Infocounter analysis: Refer to ...

A Via Printers Infocounters Report 2.2.1
B Via Service Command session 2.2.2
We recommend to use for Infocounter Analysis method A, 'Via Printers

Infocounters Report', as this is the fastest way to access the infocounter.
Method B, 'Via Service Command session ' might be useful, when you can
access a PC in the hospital network for a short time, to save the infocounter
file on the printer CF card for analysis on the Service PC.

Repair and Service
Welcome to this
SERVICE TOOLS
HOME General information
List of errors
A Printer Infocounters report
DICOM, LPD and HIPAA report
QA Report Page
Software versions
Remote sessions
Show printer status
Enter key-operator command session
Enter service command session B
Release remote command session
Scalingtools
Connectivity Setup
DICOM profile editor
Welcome to this
7 Service Actions DryStar 5302 printer
LPD Profile Editor
Network configuration
5 Logging Printqueue editor
Service - Loggings
Controller logging
2. Infocounters
1. To printer flash card
Modules
2. To this computer
Module repair
Go back
536609cf.cdr
Figure 2
2.2.1 Infocounter Analysis via Printers Infocounters Report

(1) Connect the Service PC to the
Service PC
network
(2) Start the browser (Internet
Explorer ≥ 5) Printer
(3) Enter the IP address of the
printer in the address window.
(4) Select menu "Service Engineer
Tools - Printer Infocounters 536632el.cdr
Report"
(5) Analyze the infocounter file as
described in section 2.2.3, Figure 3
How to evaluate the Infocounter

Repair and Service
2.2.2 Infocounter Analysis via Service Command session

Service PC
network
Tools - Enter Service Command 536632el.cdr
Session - 7 Service Actions - 5

Logging - 2 Infocounters"
(5) Save the infocounter file to the Figure 4
service PC or the CF card.
(6) Unzip the
ICN_drystar5302_xxxx_DATE.zi
p
(xxxx stands for serial number)
file
(7) Analyze the infocounter.txt file
as described in section 2.2.3,
2.2.3 How to evaluate the Infocounter
Infocounters.txt evaluation
What to check in the Comment
infocounter
1.1 Serial number and Compare device serial number with chapter 8
Installation date ‘Manufacturing Standard Modification’ to
determine whether the device possibly requires a
modification.
Refer to 3.3 (infocounter.txt), ‘HW Modification
History’, to check already made modifications.
1.4 Software Info Compare the currently installed SW version with
the latest SW version described in chapter 3.8,
SW releases, patches.

Repair and Service
infocounter
2.3 Reliability Should normally be not higher than 0.05. Higher
fault rates need a thorough investigation.
3.3 Hardware Modification By comparing the status of the device with the
History available modifications (refer to Technical
Documentation chapter 8) the exact hardware
status can be determined.
3.4 Software modification By checking the software modification history it
history can be determined, whether a recent software
upgrade solved a problem, that occurred quite
often in the error list in the past
5.3 Retries Many retries (> 1%, based on relative prints)
have to be investigated: They may reduce the
throughput of the device.
5.7 Error History Check which errors occurred in the last days,
how often they appeared as well as the CBF
(cycles between failures) of these errors. This
gives an overview of the current status of the
machine.
5.8 Error list (sorted by Troubleshoot these errors with the help of the
relative) and technical documentation, chapter 3.3,
‘Troubleshooting’.
5.9 Error list (sorted by
total):

Repair and Service
2.3 Test images
PURPOSE The test images are used to check the complete printer function as well as
checking the image quality and certain adjustments
The list enclosed gives an overview of the different test images. This list is
based on software release 1.8.
Name / Purpose Thumbnail picture Details see..

'STI1' 2.3.1
Composed of many different test
images to check all aspects of
image quality.
'STI2' 2.3.2
Composed of many different test
images to check all aspects of
image quality.
‘SMPTE’ 2.3.3
Standard test image for evaluation
of image quality.
‘Medical_image’ 2.3.4
Test image to check, whether
image artifacts, which are slightly
visible in one of the technical
images, are also visible in a
medical test image.
‘LinCheck’ 2.3.5
Test image with 11 increasing grey
values. Used for density
reproduction check.

Repair and Service
2.3.1 Testimage STI1
PURPOSE Composed of many different test images to check all aspects of image
quality.
USAGE (1) In the browser pages select menu

'Service Engineer Tools - Enter
Service Command Session - 3
Print Testimage - STI1.ZIP'.
(2) The test image as displayed in
Figure 5 will be printed.
Figure 5
EVALUATION Evaluate the test image at the

lightbox as follows:
(1) Field 1 contains a continuous
grey wedge from grey value 0 to
255.
Check: no single grey steps may

be visible (in case single grey
steps are visible, this is called
'contouring'. The naming for this
artifact is derived from the contour
lines in a hiking map).
Figure 6

Repair and Service
(2) Field 2 consists of 256 small squares, with grey values from 0 to 255.
Each square has inside another smaller square, with a grey level which is
2 grey steps darker than the surrounding square.
Check: all 256 squares must be visible. In addition, a contrast difference
must be visible between the individual square and the small square
inside.
(3) Field 3 contains a flat field with density value 2.0.
Check: no stripes in any direction may be visible.
In case an artifact in the image can be observed, refer to chapter 3.3,

troubleshooting for symptom, reason and cure.

Repair and Service
2.3.2 Testimage STI2
PURPOSE Composed of several different test images to check most aspects of image
quality.

Print Testimage - STI2.ZIP'.
Figure 7

(1) Field 1 contains white and black
lines / dots of 1, 2 and 3 pixel
width
Check: all lines / dots must be

visible
(2) Field 2 consists of a SMPTE
testimage. Refer to 2.3.3
(3) Field 3 consists of a flatfield with
Dmax 1.0
Check: No line artifacts in
horizontal or vertical direction
may be visible.
Figure 8

Repair and Service
2.3.3 Testimage SMPTE
PURPOSE Standard test image for evaluation of image quality and for trouble shooting
(see chapter 3.3.).
USAGE (1) In the key-operator menu select '3

Print Image - 1 Testimage -
SMPTE_xxx.tif'.
• SMPTE_lin.TIF: Taste LUT

linear. Dmax = Dmax Printer
• SMPTE_l300.TIF: Taste LUT
linear. Dmax = 3.0
• SMPTE_kan.TIF: Taste LUT
Kanamori. Dmax = Dmax Printer
Figure 9

Repair and Service

(1) Fields 1 (4x) consist of 6 squares
with horizontal and vertical black
and white stripes (1, 2 and 3
pixels wide).
Check: Each of the 6 squares

must show constant distance
between the black and white lines
(no interferences may be visible,
leading to unequal distances).
(2) Fields 2 (4x) have the same
pattern as fields 1, but less
contrast
Figure 10
Check: All 6 squares must be visible.
(3) Fields 3 (3x) consist of several squares with the same density.
Check: The individual squares must show constant density. No stripes or

other artifacts.
(4) Field 4 consists of a black square (100% black) with a smaller grey
square inside (95% black)
The square must show 2 different densities, i.e. inside there must be a
smaller square with slightly lower density.
(5) Field 5 consists of a white square (0% black) with a smaller grey square
inside (5% black)
Check: The square must show 2 different densities, i.e. inside there must
be a smaller square with slightly higher density.
(6) Field 6 consists of a black square (100% black).
Check: The square must show Dmax (default: 3.2 O.D.)

(7) Fields 7 consists of a white square (0% black).
Check: The square must show fog level (for clear based film approx. 0.1
O.D., for blue based film approx. 0.2 O.D.)
To check density reproduction, especially for Dmax, use the LinCheck.ZIP

test image and measure in the "Density measurement area", as there also
the CDM is measuring. Only in this case the measured densities are
comparable.

Repair and Service
2.3.4 Testimage Medical_Image
PURPOSE Test image to check, whether image artifacts, which are slightly visible in one
of the technical images, are also visible in a medical test image.

Print Testimage -
Medical_image.ZIP'.
Figure 11
EVALUATION Evaluate the test image at the lightbox as follows:
(1) This medical test image of a chest is the most critical medical test image
regarding visibility of image artifacts, due to its huge bright areas. In
bright areas the eye is most sensitive.
Check: image artifacts, like stripes in horizontal or vertical direction,

which are slightly visible in a technical image (e.g. STI test image), may
not be visible in the medical test image.

Repair and Service
2.3.5 Testimage LinCheck
PURPOSE Test image to check density reproduction.

Print Testimage - LinCheck.ZIP'.
536632ga.cdr
Figure 12
EVALUATION (1) The test image contains a grey Density measurement area
wedge. This grey wedge is
measured during the density
reproduction check.
Refer to chapter 3.6,
Adjustments.
536632gb.cdr
Figure 13
For check of density reproduction only measure in the density measurement

area, as there also the CDM is measuring.

Repair and Service
2.4 Show Error Codes
PURPOSE View ‘Reason - Meaning - Cure’ at the local display to an error that appeared
at the printer.
USAGE Possibility 1: View the last error code:
(1) In the key-operator menu select ‘7 Service Actions - 1 Error messages’
Possibility 2: View all error codes:

(1) In the browser pages select menu 'Service Engineer Tools - List of errors’
2.5 Web Pages

The web pages provide for following menus:
Welcome to this
Operator tools
Key-operator tools
Service engineer tools
Specialist tools
Security Tools
HELP
Figure 14

Repair and Service
Menu Content (Short description) Refer to .....

Operator Tools Printer queue management for the 2.5.1
operator
Key-Operator Tools Same like Key-Operator menu on local 2.5.2
display
Service Engineer Functions for configuration and 2.5.3
Tools troubleshooting of the Controller part of
the printer
Specialist Tools Software tools reserved for R&D to Not further
perform special actions during test described
phase of the printer.
Security Tools Software Tools to configure user Not further
access control and secure described
communication as defined by HIPAA.
This menu is reserved for the Hospital
Security Manager
Help Describes purpose and content of the Not further
Web pages menus. described
A detailed structure of the web pages can be found in chapter 3.7, Software
menus, settings.
For more information to the webpages refer to .....

• section 2.5.4 for Connection to the web pages
• section 2.5.5 for two examples about the usage of the webpages

Repair and Service
2.5.1 Operator Tools
Welcome to this
Operator - Printer Status

HOME
Id Patient Name Host Created On Sent Status Priority
875 XYZ CT_A 16-02-2005 0/1 Printing Normal
878 XYZ CT_A 16-02-2005 0/1 Calculating Normal
879 XYZ CT_A 16-02-2005 0/1 Waiting Normal
Delete Set Emergency View Status
Figure 15
Main Purpose Printer queue management for the operator

Username / Password operator / operator
Sub menus None
Comment --

Repair and Service
2.5.2 Key-Operator Tools
Welcome to this
KEY OPERATOR TOOLS

HOME Remote sessions
Figure 16
Main Purpose Provides same functions like Key-Operator

menu on local display
Username / Password drystar / 5302
Sub menus 1. Enter key-operator command session: Shows
list of menus like Key-Operator menu on local
keypad.
2. Release remote command session: Makes a
reset on the key-operator command session,
to release the connection, in case the key-
operator command session hangs.
As long as a key-operator or service command session via web pages is

active, access to the printer via local keypad is not possible.
The printer will show the message: 'Remote Service active'.
Do not work with the key-operator or service command session web pages at
the printer as long as the customer is using the printer.

Repair and Service
2.5.3 Service Engineer Tools
Welcome to this
SERVICE TOOLS
List of errors
Printer Infocounters report
QA Report Page
Software versions
Remote sessions
Show printer status
Enter service command session
Connectivity tools
Scaling Setup
LPD Profile Editor
Printqueue editor
Controller logging
Module repair
Modules
536632hb.cdr
Figure 17
Main Purpose Provides functions for configuration and

troubleshooting of the Controller part of the
printer
Username / Password mega / ******
Sub menus 1. List of errors: Shows list of all HC.... error
codes. Same content like chapter 3.3,
appendix, error codes..
2. Infocounters Report: Shows printer
infocounter.
3. DICOM, LPD and HIPAA report*: Shows
infocounter of the Controller part of the
printer.
4. Software versions*: Shows SW versions of
printer and controller part of the printer.
5. Show printer status: Shows possible
warnings or defects or user messages which
are currently displayed at the local display.
6. Enter key-operator command session: Same

Repair and Service
function like Key-operator Menu on local

keypad.
7. Enter service command session: Same
function like Service Menu on local keypad.
8. Release remote command session: Makes a
reset on the Key-operator / Service command
session, to release the connection, in case
the session hangs.
9. Reboot Drystar*: Reboots the printer.
10. Scaling Setup: Menu to define general image
interpolation related settings
11. DICOM profile editor: Different menus to
define printer behavior regarding DICOM
communication.
12. LPD profile editor: Different menus to define
printer behavior regarding Postscript
communication
13. Network Configuration: Allows special
network settings to adapt to other network
devices.
14. Printqueue editor*: Provides functions for
extended queue management.
15. Controller logging*: Provides functions to
view, filter, adapt and save log files.
16. Modules: Provides functions to check sensors
and motors of single modules.
Refer to Figure 17
As long as a key-operator or service command session via web pages is

active, access to the printer via local keypad is not possible.
The printer will show the message: 'Remote Service active'.
Do not work with the key-operator or service command session web pages at
the printer as long as the customer is using the printer.

Repair and Service
Figure 18: Service Engineer - Modules Pages

Repair and Service
2.5.4 Connection to the web pages
USAGE (1) Connect the Service PC to the

Service PC
network
(3) Enter the IP address of the printer
in the address window.
In case the printer homepage is
not displayed, refer to 2.5.4.1 536632el.cdr
‘Adaptation of the PC IP address‘

next page.
Figure 19
As an alternative, if it is not possible Printer
Crossed UTP network cable
to put the Service PC into the hospital
network:
(1) Use a crossed network UTP cable
to connect the network interface 536632ek.cdr
of the Service PC directly with the

network interface of the printer.
Explorer ≥ 5)
(3) Enter the IP address of the printer
in the address window. In case Figure 20
the printer homepage is not
displayed, refer to 2.5.4.1
‘Adaptation of the PC IP address‘
next page.

Repair and Service
2.5.4.1 Adaptation of the PC IP address

To connect the printer and the Service PC via network, usually the IP
address of the Service PC has to be adapted.
Basic rules:
Case 1: The service PC is part of the hospital network.
(1) Get the IP address and possibly the subnet mask* for the Service PC
from the hospital network administrator. In case the hospital network
administrator wants to have the Service PC working only in a subnet, get
from him the netmask (also called subnet mask).
(2) Enter IP address and subnet mask as displayed in Figure 21 to Figure
24.
Case 2: The service PC is not part of the hospital network, but connected
via crossed UTP network cable to the printer.
(1) Look up the printer IP address and subnet mask in the printer key
operator menu ‘show settings - Network’.
(2) Define an IP address for the Service PC by adding or subtracting ‘1’ to
the last digit of the IP address.
Example: Printer IP address = 10.6.5.121
Service PC address = 10.6.5.122 or 10.6.5.120
(3) Enter IP address and subnet mask as displayed in Figure 21 to Figure
24.
Figure 21 Figure 22

Repair and Service
*Default Subnet Masks (set for NO subnetting)
Class First 3 digits of IP subnet mask

A 0......126 255.0.0.0
B 128......191 255.255.0.0
C 192.......223 255.255.255.0
Figure 23 Figure 24

Repair and Service
2.5.4.2 Adaptation of the Browser Proxy Settings

In case the connection to the Internet is configured for a connection via Proxy
server, this has to be disabled to be able to connect to the printer:
(1) In the Internet Explorer select "Tools - Internet Options"
(2) Select tab "Connections"
(3) In case a proxy server is configured, tick the checkbox "Bypass Proxy
server for local addresses".
Figure 25

Repair and Service
2.5.5 Usage of the web pages

(1) Enter the IP address of the printer in the address window.
In case the printer homepage is not displayed, refer to 2.5.4.1 ‘Adaptation
of the PC IP address‘ previous page.
(2) Select the desired menu
(3) Enter user name and password when prompted (mega / ******)
Enclosed two examples which shall explain the usage of the web pages:
# Example description refer to ...

1 Adapt the taste LUT for a certain host by creating a 2.5.5.1
host specific DICOM host profile
2 Adapt the annotations for all DICOM inputs 2.5.5.2
Welcome to this
Operator tools
Key-operator tools
Specialist tools
Security Tools
HELP
Figure 26: Homepage of the printer

Repair and Service
2.5.5.1 Example 1: Adaptation of the taste LUT (contrast)

Whenever the host with AE title ‘CTSCAN200’ sends a print job to the
printer, the taste LUT shall be adapted to ‘Kanamori_like 200’.
(1) In the printer homepage select
Welcome to this
'Service Engineer tools - Enter DryStar 5302 printer
service command session'

SERVICE TOOLS
(2) Enter username and password
(3) Select ‘DICOM profile editor’ List of errors
(4) Select ‘New’. DICOM, LPD and HIPAA report
Refer to Figure 28. QA Report Page
Software versions
Remote sessions
Show printer status
Enter service command session
Connectivity tools
Scaling Setup
LPD Profile Editor
Printqueue editor
Controller logging
Module repair
Modules
536632et.cdr
Figure 27
(5) In the host profile window select

‘change’ at the ‘host profile
type’, to see, whether the
connected host is part of the
hosts database. Refer to Figure
29.
Figure 28

Repair and Service
Figure 29: Host profile editor SW Re. 3.0.0_C1
(6) Select the connected host if

present, otherwise leave it on
‘generic’.
Figure 30

Repair and Service
(7) Select the desired parameter, in this case ‘Perception LUT =

Kanamori_like’ and set the ‘Kanamori_like value’ to 200.
(8) Check the checkbox before ‘Perception LUT’.
(9) Enter AE title and nickname (nickname = the name the stuff uses for
this modality. The nickname will be displayed in the queue). Refer to
Figure 31.
(10) Select ‘Submit’
Now whenever the host with AE title ‘CTSCAN200’ sends a print job to the
printer, the taste LUT will be adapted to ‘Kanamori_like 200’.
In case the checkbox is checked before a parameter in the DICOM profile

editor, this parameter is used, no matter whether the modality sends the
parameter or not (‘overwrite functionality’)
In case the checkbox is not checked, the value defined in the host profile is
only used, in case it is not sent by the modality.
Image adaptations should be made preferably at the DICOM modality.

According to DICOM specifications, controlling the printer completely is done
at the modality.
The description below about creating a DICOM profile should only be
required, in case the modality does not allow to adapt a certain parameter or
does not provide it.

Repair and Service
HELP Host Profile: Scanner
These are the default settings for all print jobs coming from the host
(modality) specified under 'Calling AE title'.
Nick Name: Scanner
Use this profile only for incoming 'Calling AE title': CTSCAN200
Number of Copies:
Print Priority: low
Polarity: normal
Trim: no
Film Size ID:
Medium Type:
Kernel: site Edit Custom
Magnification: Edit
Pixel Size: ratio: Edit
Perception LUT: kanamoriLike
Kanamori Like value: 200
Custom value:
Annotation 1: site Edit Custom
Annotation 2: site Edit Custom
Window (%):
Level (%):
Conformance/Status Level:
Nevent enabled: off
Mammo modality: NO site
Image Timeout (s):
Resolution:320
Initial allocated memory size per printjob (MBytes):
536602er.cdr
Figure 31

Repair and Service
• In general: all DICOM host profile

and LPD profile web pages have
an online documentation
included.
• It can be viewed by pressing the

HELP button.
Figure 32
2.5.5.2 Example 2: Define annotations for all inputs

In this example the defaults for all hosts, independent of the AE title are
adapted. Here it is only possible to adapt the annotations.
(1) In the printer homepage select 'Service Engineer tools - Enter service
command session'
(2) Enter username and password
(3) Select ‘DICOM profile editor’
(4) Select ‘Default site annotations: EDIT’. Refer to Figure 33.

Repair and Service
Figure 33
(5) Select ‘Annotation 1’ Refer to
Figure 35.
Refer to Figure 34 to see,
where annotation 1 is located.
(6) Enter the annotation text:
Example:’ St Joseph's
Hospital.....’
(7) Possibly adapt the font and font
size of the annotation.
(8) In the ‘Annotation Box 1’ select
‘Submit’.
(9) Check the checkbox before
‘Annotation 1’.
(10) Select ‘Submit’. Figure 34
Now independent of the AE title all
films will have annotation 1 ‘St.
Joseph's Hospital.....’

Repair and Service
Figure 35: Site Defaults Window

Repair and Service
2.6 Printer Logging

Item "Printer Logging" is divided in following sections:
# Section refer to ...
1 Required information for the support center 2.6.1
2 Printer Bootup Message 2.6.2
2.6.1 Required information for the support center

In case of persistent problems like Connectivity / DICOM problems or film
jams it may be required - as part of the escalation procedure - to send all
logfiles, session files and infocounters to the support center.
Proceeding:
Step # Descpription Comment
Step 1 In the Service Engineer Tools go to "Controller --
Logging"
Step 2 Set tasks --
- PrintJobHandler
- DCMPrintSCP_0
- DCMPrintSCP_1 (if available)
to TRACE
Step 3 Produce the fault by sending an image from the --
modality or by printing a test image
Step 4 Reboot the printer --
Step 5 Get the session files See note 1
Step 6 Get the infocounter file See note 1
Step 7 Save the " DICOM, LPD and HIPAA report" See note 2
Step 8 Send the --
• Session file
• Infocounter file
• DICOM, LPD and HIPAA report
to your support center
At sporadic problems (Connectivity / DICOM problems; film jams) skip Steps

1 to 4. Immediately start with step 5
Note 1: Path for session file / infocounter:

Enter service command session – 7 service actions – 5 logging – 1 session
reports (select all files) / 2 Infocounters report – To this computer

Repair and Service
Note 2: How to save the " DICOM, LPD and HIPAA report"
In the "Service Engineer Tools" go to the "DICOM, LPD and HIPAA report"
page – right mouse key – save page as.
2.6.1.1 How to view the logfiles offline
Step # Descpription Comment

Step 1 Install the PIDEX Available on MEDNET, GSO Library
tool
Step 2 Extract the See note below
corresponding log
file of the session
file.
Step 3 In the PIDEX tool
select "Tools –
logview" and open
the desired logfile
Step 4 In the PIDEX tool go It is also possible to select a single

to function "Edit – word in the logfile. Then all other
find" to find the occurances of this expression are also
desired information. highlighted.
A session file is named e.g.

DS5302_1052_SES_21OCT2005_09-55-48.ZIP, where the different figures
represent following information:
DS5302: Printer (Drystar 5302)
1052: Serial Number
SES: Session File
21OCT2005: Current date
09-55-48: Current time HH-MM-SS
Interesting for troubleshooting are following files within the SES files:
• devil.log (controller and print engine);
• time.log

Repair and Service
2.6.2 Printer Bootup-Message
PURPOSE The printer terminal level provides following service action:

• An online logging, which displays all actions of the printer software during
bootup.
The printer terminal level is not intended to be used as official service tool.
It is only used for troubleshooting, e.g. to view the boot-up messages.
USAGE (1) Connect the Service PC to the
printer as displayed in Figure 36.
(2) Start the HyperTerminal as
displayed in section 2.6.2.1.
(3) Switch the printer on:
Now the bootup message 536632ep.cdr
appears
When the Printer login appears
the bootup message is finished.
Figure 36
2.6.2.1 Setup of the HyperTerminal

The hyper terminal setup as displayed here can be used for all AGFA
devices.
Instead of the HyperTerminal following other programs can be recommended
to connect to terminal level:
• xt.
xt.exe is an AGFA program, which is part of the IMOS package. It can be
started in a DOS box by typing ‘xt’
• IMOS Start Menu.
The IMOS Start Menu software has a terminal built in. Select ‘tools -
terminal’. Depending on the configuration of IMOS Start, either a DOS
box with xt will be opened or a Hyper terminal window will pop-up.
(1) To start the setup of the HyperTerminal, go to ‘Programs - Accessories -
HyperTerminal - HyperTerminal’

Repair and Service
Figure 37
(2) Enter a name for the connection,

e.g. AGFA
Figure 38
(3) Select COM1 or COM2 for

communication port (depending
on what you are using on the
Service PC)
Figure 39

Repair and Service
(4) Make the setup of the

HyperTerminal session as
displayed here, i.e.
- 9600 Bps
- 8 data bits
- no parity
- 1 stop bit
- flow control Xon/Xoff
(5) Select ‘OK’
Figure 40
(6) Select ‘Properties’
Figure 41

Repair and Service
(7) Select ‘settings’
Figure 42
(8) Select ‘VT100’ for emulation type
(9) Press ‘OK’
Figure 43
(10) Press <Enter>
Now the bootup message or login

prompt is visible.
Figure 44

Repair and Service
2.7 ADVP
The latest version of ADVP can be downloaded from MEDNET GSO Library
(Hardcopy - Wet Imagers - LR DICOM Controller - Freeware)
PURPOSE DICOM troubleshooting tool
USAGE ADVP can be used for following purposes:
# Purpose Details see…

1 Send test images from the service PC to the printer 2.7.1.
via network
2 Record DICOM print sessions for further 2.7.2
troubleshooting.
3 Record DICOM print sessions for changing and re- 2.7.3.
sending them to the printer.
ADVP can run on the service PC or any Windows PC in the network. The
only pre-requisite: The PC must be part of the network.
536632eq.cdr
Figure 45

Repair and Service
2.7.1 ADVP as DICOM print SCU
ADVP as DICOM print SCU can be used to check the DICOM interface of
the printer. In this case ADVP sends a test image to the printer.
(1) Start ADVP

(2) Select 'Basic Grayscale' in the
'Start up configuration' screen.
(3) Select 'Test - Print Film'
(4) Select 'SMPTE' (or any other
test film).
(5) In the 'Configuration' window fill
in Called (Printer) AE Title and
'Printer IP address'.
(6) Select 'OK'. Now the desired test
film is sent to the printer.
Figure 46: ADVP as Print SCU
2.7.2 ADVP as DICOM print SCP (Print Emulator)
ADVP as DICOM print SCP can be used to check the DICOM

communication sent from the modality. ADVP in this case emulates the
printer. The communication can be evaluated on site or by a product
specialist in the GSC or RSC.

Repair and Service
(1) Disconnect the printer from the

network.
(2) Give the IP address of the
service PC the same IP address
like the printer*
(3) Start ADVP
(5) Select 'Application - Print
Emulator - Start'
(6) In the following window fill in
- Called (Printer) AE Title (this is
the AE title of the printer),
- 'Called (Host) AE Title'
- ADVP Listen port (usually 104:
this is the port the modality
sends DICOM messages).
(7) Select okay. Now ADVP is
prepared for recording the
communication between
modality and the printer.
Figure 47: ADVP as Print Emulator
*In case ADVP runs on the printer, just select 'Stop Controller' to stop the
application software (and so switch off the DICOM SCP functionality of the
printer). When communication recording is finished, close ADVP and select
'Start Controller'.

Repair and Service
2.7.3 ADVP as Communication Recorder
ADVP as Communication recorder is recording the communication between

the modality and the printer, and allows to modify every single DICOM
attribute as well as resending the recorded image with the changed
attribute(s).
In general, following configurations are possible:
a) Service PC is part of the network: The modality sends to the service

PC, the service PC transmits the DICOM image and control data on
the fly to the printer. Modifying the DICOM data can be done without
changing the configuration.
b) Service PC is only temporary integrated in the network to emulate the

printer: The modality sends to the service PC, ADVP on the service
PC transmits the DICOM image and control data to a DICOM Print
SCP on the service PC (e.g. ADVP as Print Emulator). Re-sending
the DICOM data to the printer then requires re-configuration of ADVP.
In this chapter we describe the possibility a) Service PC is part of the

network.

Repair and Service
Part 1: Recording the DICOM data
(1) Change the IP address of the

printer to any free IP address
in the network (e.g.
192.9.200.202)
(2) Give the service PC the
former IP address of the
printer (e.g. 192.9.200.201)
(3) Start ADVP
(5) Select 'Application - Comms
Recorder - Start'
(6) In the following window fill in
- Called (Printer) AE Title (this
is the AE title of the printer),
- 'Called (Host) AE Title',
- ADVP Listen port (usually
104: this is the port the
modality sends DICOM
messages),
- Printer IP address (this is the
IP address of the printer)
- printer listen port (usually
104).
(7) Select okay. Now ADVP is
prepared for recording the
communication between
modality and the printer.
Figure 48: ADVP as Comms
Recorder

Repair and Service
Part 2: Resending the DICOM data

Recorder - Stop'
Recorder - Modify'
(3) In the Printer Snapshot edit
the desired parameters
Recorder - Replay': Now the
image is re-sent to the printer
and printed at the printer with
the adapted data.
Figure 49: Resending the DICOM

data

Repair and Service
3 Software Installation
You want to ... Example Refer to .....

Upgrade the SW to a higher SW Upgrade from SW Rel. Chapter 7,
basic release 1.80_C1 to 2.0.0_C1 Modifications
Update the SW with a patch SW Update from 1.8.0_C1 to 3.1
1.8.1_C1
Install SW on a new, empty Install SW 1.8.0_C1 on an 3.2
hard drive or. empty hard drive
Re-install the software on a Re-Install SW 1.8.0_C1 on a 3.3
printer in ERROR - SYSTEM printer that does not bootup
FAILURE state. anymore.
• A software upgrade is a functional extension. It is usually sold through

the Sales and Services Channels
• A software update is a corrective modification of the basic software
version. It does not include new functionality. SW Updates (Patches) are
available on MedNet.
3.1 SW Update: Loading a SW Patch

This chapter describes the SW Update with a patch.
For instructions regarding SW upgrade to a higher basic release (e.g. SW

Upgrade from SW Rel. 1.80_C1 to 2.0.0_C1) refer to Chapter 7,
Modifications
A SW Update can be performed in two ways:
SW Update via ... Refer to .....

Key-operator menu at the local keypad using the CF card 3.1.1
Service menu in the Webpages using the network 3.1.2
connection

Repair and Service
3.1.1 Software Update via CF card
Purpose Software Update: Installation of a software patch
SW Upgrade (1) In the key-operator menu select '9

Installation - 1 Software
Installation - 1 From CF card'
(2) Follow the further instructions on
the local keypad.
(3) After the software update print a
SMPTE test image (Key Operator
초
menu: 3 Print Image - 1 2
Testimage - 2 SMPTE.zip') and a
test image from every modality to
5366_Reg01_017_e.cdr
confirm the successful update.
(4) Re-new the backup on CF card. Figure 50
3.1.2 Software Update via a remote computer
Purpose Software Update: Installation of a software patch

(1) Establish a web browser
SW Upgrade Service engineer tools
connection to the printer. Refer to
chapter 2.5, Web Pages Username
mega
(2) In the printer homepage select Username
'Service Engineer Tools - Enter ******
Key-operator Command Session - Enter Key-operator command session
9 Installation - 1 New Software 9. Installation
Installation - 1 This computer' 1. New Software Installation
(3) Select 'Browse' Welcome to this

(4) Select the ZIP file to be uploaded Key-Operator - Installation
(e.g. DS5302_SWR_180C1.zip). Choose Dataset Browse .....
(5) Follow the further instructions in Proceed Go Back Reset Values
the web pages 536632eo.cdr
Figure 51
(6) After the software update print a SMPTE test image (Key Operator menu:
‘3 Print Image - 1 Testimage - 2 SMPTE.tif') and a test image from every
modality to confirm the successful upgrade.
During file upload it is not checked, whether the software you are uploading
is really software for Drystar 5302. Be sure to upload the correct ZIP file.
The ZIP file is only available via MEDNET - GSO library - Hardcopy – Dry
Imagers – Drystar 5302 – Freeware

Repair and Service
Caution:
• Depending on the software patch version it might be possible, that
one of the boards gets re-programmed during the software upgrade.
• In case this re-programming is interrupted by power loss, this specific
board may become unusable.
• Do not reboot the printer before requested by the web pages.
3.2 Emergency SW Installation on a new, empty Hard Drive
Purpose This chapter describes the SW Installation on an empty hard drive, e.g. after
exchange of the hard drive.
SW Installation (1) Insert the CF card with the printer

on empty HD "Emergency_Install" software in
the CF card reader
(2) Reboot the printer
(3) At question "Do you want to
preserve config?" select "NO".
Refer to Figure 53.
초
(4) Follow the further instructions on 2
the display.
(5) Select menu "5 Restore 5366_Reg01_017_e.cdr
Configuration" to reload the
previous configuration when Figure 52
finished.
(6) Perform a film calibration from
both trays.
Important remark:
After software installation on a new,
empty harddisk, the printer is only in
the same state than before, if an up-
to-date backup is available.
Emergency SW FOUND
In case the CF card is lost or not ON EXTERNAL CF-card
readable the complete printer setup Install emergency
SW? YES (V) NO (X)
has to be redone.
After Emergency SW Installation on a
new, empty hard disk without Emergency SW Install
"Configuration Restore" the printer is Do you want
to preserve config?
in the same state like it has been YES (V) NO (X)
shipped from factory 536632gc.cdr
(default IP address 169.254.10.10)

Figure 53

Repair and Service
The printer "Emergency_Install" software can be obtained via MEDNET,

GSO Library.
Caution:
• Do not reboot the printer before requested by a local keypad
message
3.3 Emergency SW Installation on a printer in "Error - System Failure"

state
Purpose This chapter describes the SW Installation on a printer in ERROR -

SYSTEM FAILURE state.
Important remark:
The software installation procedure
described here formats the hard
disk.
In case you select "NO" at question Emergency SW FOUND
"Do you want to preserve config" ON EXTERNAL CF-card
Install emergency
the configuration data are erased. SW? YES (V) NO (X)
In this case the printer is only in the
same state than before, if an up-to-
Emergency SW Install
date backup is available. Do you want
In case the CF card is lost or not to preserve config?
YES (V) NO (X)
readable the complete printer setup 536632gc.cdr
has to be redone.
Figure 54

Repair and Service
SW Installation (1) Insert the CF card with the printer

on empty HD "Emergency_Install" software in
the CF card reader
(2) Reboot the printer
(3) At question "Do you want to
preserve config?" select
"NO" in case you want to erase
초
the complete configuration 2
"YES" in case want to keep the
current configuration. Refer to
5366_Reg01_017_e.cdr
Figure 54 and to info below.
(4) Follow the further instructions on Figure 55
the local keypad.
(5) Select menu "5 Restore
Configuration" to reload the
previous configuration when
finished.
The printer "Emergency_Install" software can be obtained via MEDNET,

GSO Library.
Caution:
• Do not reboot the printer before requested by a local keypad
message
When you choose during Emergency SW Installation to preserve the

configuration following steps are executed internally:
1. A backup of the printer configuration data is created and copied to
RAM
2. The software is copied from CF card to hard disk and inflated
3. The boards are programmed
4. The backup is restored from RAM
When you choose during Emergency SW Installation not to preserve the
configuration the configuration data are erased. The printer in this case is in
the same state like it has been shipped from factory
(default IP address 169.254.10.10)

Chapter 3.3
HEALTHCARE Repair and Service
Imaging Services
Troubleshooting
DRYSTAR 5302
Type 5366/100
This document describes the systematic troubleshooting of the printer

Revision Date compared to previous Version 1.1:
1.2 03-2011 Replaced previous list of error codes by error codes of
software 2.1.0_C2.
Document Title
DD+DIS261.10E DRYSTAR 5302 SIB16: Software 2.1.0_C2 available

eq_03-3_troubleshooting_e_template_v06
Repair and Service
DD+DIS150.05E Troubleshooting
► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
Copyright  2011 Agfa HealthCare N.V.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
NOTE:

Edition 1, Revision 2 DRYSTAR 5302 Chapter 3.3 / 2 of 72

Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE ...................................................................4

2 ERROR CATALOGUE..............................................................................................................5


Repair and Service
1 General Troubleshooting Procedure

The troubleshooting procedure depends on the symptom of the fault. Refer to Figure 1:
MODXX The online diagnosis has checked

all possible reasons for the fault. Refer to
Please replace module The only possible cure: table next page.
To replace a certain module
Refer to IMPORTANT
New Error: Exxxxxx The online diagnosis has detected, note next page.
that more than one possible reason See also
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx for the fault exists. Troubleshooting
Guide.*
The online diagnosis has detected a
fault, which still allows printing, however Refer to IMPORTANT
New Warning: Wxxxxxx The print quality is reduced or note next page.
The print quality can be reduced in the See also
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx near future or Troubleshooting
A defective part requires replacement Guide.*
in the near future
New Maintenance: Mx The configured number of cycles See also

for a certain maintenance action Troubleshooting
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Guide. *
has been reached.
Error Refer to
The online diagnosis was not able to Troubleshooting
System Failure start up. Guide. *
Please wait For more than 5 minutes the printer refer to

Selftest Proceeding shows message Troubleshooting
"Please wait selftest proceeding". Guide.*
Film Jam! Refer to

A sporadic or persistent film jam
occured. Troubleshooting
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Guide.*
Modality Name Time The image sent from the modality Refer to
Film X of Y is not printed. It does not appear Troubleshooting
Z% in the printer queue. Guide.*
Refer to
The image(s) show stripes, dots, Troubleshooting
density or contrast faults. Guide.*
536733aa.cdr
* See MEDNET, GSO Library: Hardcopy - Dry Imagers -

Drystar Axys - Troubleshooting Guide
Figure 1


Repair and Service
2 Error Catalogue
 The error catalogue is part of the device software (file "error.xml").

 The print-out supplied here is based on software release 2.1.0_C2
 It is also available via browser pages, menu 'Service Engineer tools - List of Errors'
IMPORTANT:
Error codes EXXXXX and WXXXXX (displayed on the local display), are registered in the
infocounter as error codes HCXXXXX. The next pages list the HC codes totether with reason
and cure.
Error codes "MOD XX - Please replace module" are also mapped to an HC code. This HC code
can be looked up in key-operator menu "7 Service Actions - Error Codes".
Depending on attributes for "Type" and "Action" (see error descriptions below) error messages
will be issued as error code or plain text:
Type Action Error message will be issued as ……

Defect Replace Message "MODXX Please replace module"
Defect See manual Message "EXXXXXX – texttext"
Failure None Message "WXXXXXX - texttext"
Accidental None Message "texttext" (e.g. remove film jam)
List of Modules:
MOD Nr.. Spare Part
MOD01 UPPER TRAY W/O TAG READER
MOD02 LOWER TRAY W/O TAG READER
MOD03 / MOD04 UPPER / LOWER PICK UP MODULE
MOD05 THERMAL HEAD
MOD06 OUTPUT MODULE
MOD07 DRUM DRIVE MODULE
MOD08 DEVIL MODULE or DEVIUS MODULE
MOD09 POWER SUPPLY
MOD10 KEYPAD/DISPLAY MODULE
MOD11 INPUT SENSORS MODULE
MOD12 THANOS W/O SDRAM or TYNDALL W/O SDRAM
MOD13 CAM DRIVE MODULE
MOD14 GEAR BOX & BELT
MOD15 SUSPENSION DRIVE MODULE
MOD16 TPH COOLING FAN
MOD17 PUMP & VALVES ASSY
MOD18 RAM MODULE
MOD20 VILIS COOLING FAN


Repair and Service
DD+DIS150.05E Troubleshooting - Error Codes
LIST OF ERRORS
MODULE : uppertraymodule
Elabel : No
HC301000 : uppertraymodule.connected
Type Defect
Context E301000
Action SeeManual
Reason XS7 or XS8 not connected
Cure1 Connect XS7 or XS8
HC301001 : uppertray.overruled
Type Failure
Context W301001
Action None
Reason Inputtray overruled (dmax 2.0)
Cure Replace filmpack
HC301002 : uppertray.disabled
Type Failure
Context W301002
Action None
Reason Inputtray disabled
HC301003 : uppertraymodule.tagreader
Type Failure
Context W301003
Action None
Reason1 Tag reader not connected
Cure1 Connect tag reader
Reason2 Tag reader defect
Cure2 Replace
Part Tag reader


Repair and Service
HC301004 : uppertraymodule.s11
Type Failure
Context W301004
Action None
Reason1 S11 not connected
Cure1 Connect S11
Reason2 Upper tray module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD01
Type Failure
Context W301005
Action None
Cure1 Connect S24
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD01
HC301006 : uppertraymodule.takeoversensors.working
Type Defect
Context E301006
Action SeeManual
Reason1 S11 and S24 not connected
Cure1 Connect S11 and S24
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD01


Repair and Service
Type Failure
Context W301007
Action None
Cure1 Connect S1
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD01
HC301016 : upper.filmcal.required
Type Failure
Context W301016
Action None
Reason Upper tray needs calibration
Cure Perform upper tray calibration
HC301018 : upperTag-unsupported
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Wrong version in upper tray
HC301019 : tag.history.insecure
Type Defect
Context E301019
Action SeeManual
Reason Tag history is corrupt
Cure make Emergency sw install without preserving config


Repair and Service
HC301020 : uppertraymodule.s11.flagproblem
Type Failure
Context W301020
Action None
Reason S11 defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD01
HC301021 : uppertraymodule.s24.flagproblem
Type Failure
Context W301021
Action None
Reason S24 defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD01
HC301022 : uppertraymodule.sensors
Type Failure
Context W301022
Action None
Reason1 one of the takeoverdetection sensors is not functioning
Cure1 Remove jam
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD01


Repair and Service
HC301023 : backside.jam.upper
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason backside jam while printing from upper tray
Cure Insert filmpack correctly
MODULE : lowertraymodule
Elabel : No
HC302000 : lowertraymodule.connected
Type Defect
Context E302000
Action SeeManual
Reason XS9 not connected to lower tray module
Cure1 Connect XS9 to lower tray module
HC302001 : lowertray.overruled
Type Failure
Context W302001
Action None
Reason Inputtray overruled (dmax 2.0)
HC302002 : lowertray.disabled
Type Failure
Context W302002
Action None
Reason Inputtray disabled


Repair and Service
HC302003 : lowertraymodule.tagreader
Type Failure
Context W302003
Action None
Reason1 Tag reader not connected
Cure1 Connect tag reader
Reason2 Tag reader defect
Cure2 Replace
Part Tag reader
HC302007 : lowertraymodule.s2
Type Failure
Context W302007
Action None
Cure1 Connect S2
Reason2 Lower tray module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD02
HC302016 : lower.filmcal.required
Type Failure
Context W302016
Action None
Reason Lower tray needs calibration
Cure Perform lower tray calibration


Repair and Service
HC302018 : lowerTag-unsupported
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Wrong version in lower tray
HC302023 : backside.jam.lower
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason backside jam while printing from lower tray
Cure Insert filmpack correctly
HC302024 : used.film.upper
Type Failure
Context W302024
Action None
Reason counter of new filmpack in upper tray was already low. It was used in
another printer
Cure Replace filmpack when filmcount runs out
HC302025 : used.film.lower
Type Failure
Context W302025
Action None
Reason counter of new filmpack in lower tray was already low. It was used in
another printer
Cure Replace filmpack when filmcount runs out


Repair and Service
MODULE : upperpickupmodule
Elabel : Yes
HC303000 : upperpickupmodule.film.pickupposition
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Upper input jam
Cure Remove upper input jam
HC303001 : upperpickupmodule.film.bendposition
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
HC303002 : upperpickupmodule.film.homeposition
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Upper pickup homing failed accidently
Cure Self resolving accident
HC303003 : upperpickupmodule.film.vacuum
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason1 Upper input jam
Cure1 Remove upper input jam
Reason2 vacuum system failing
Cure2 clean vacuum tubes , filter , vacuum cups ......
Reason3 Lower pickup module defect
Cure3 Replace
Part vacuum pump


Repair and Service
HC303004 : upperpickupmodule.filmpickup
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
HC303005 : upperpickupmodule.s18.low
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
HC303006 : upperpickupmodule.s18.high
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Internal jam
Cure Remove internal jam
HC303007 : upperpickupmodule.pickup.skew
Type Accidental
Context
Action None


Repair and Service
HC303008 : upperpickupmodule.tphalign
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
HC303009 : upperpickupmodule.film.align
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
HC303010 : upperpickupmodule.homeposition
Type Failure
Context W303010
Action None
Reason Upper pickup homing failed accidently
HC303011 : upperpickupmodule.thpositioning
Type Accidental
Context
Action None


Repair and Service
HC303012 : upperpickupmodule.elabel.present
Type Failure
Context W303012
Action None
Reason1 Upper pickup elabel not connected
Cure1 Connect upper pickup elabel
Reason2 Upper pickup Elabel defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD03
HC303013 : upperpickupmodule.elabel.config
Type Failure
Context W303013
Action None
Reason Upper pickup elabel defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD03
HC303014 : upperpickupmodule.connected
Type Failure
Context W303014
Action None
Reason1 XS1 disconnected
Cure Connect XS1
Reason Upper pickup module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD03


Repair and Service
HC303015 : upperpickupmodule.working
Type Failure
Context W303015
Action None
Reason1 Upper pickup module defect
Cure1 Replace
Part MOD03
Reason2 Film wrinkled in upper tray
Cure2 Remove wrinkled film
HC303016 : upperpickupmodule.passed.high
Type Failure
Context W303016
Action None
Reason1 Upper pickup past sensor jammed
Cure1 Free upper pickup past sensor
Reason2 Upper pickup past sensor defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD03
HC303021 : upperpickupmodule.m7.connection
Type Failure
Context W303021
Action SeeManual
Reason1 Upper pickup motor not connected
Cure1 reconnect upper pickup motor
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD03


Repair and Service
HC303022 : upperpickupmodule.m7.shortcircuit
Type Defect
Context E303022
Action SeeManual
Reason Upper pickup module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD03
HC303023 : upperpickupmodule.s14
Type Failure
Context W303023
Action None
Reason1 Upper pickup home sensor S14 malfunctioning
Cure1 check upper pickup home sensor S14
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD03
Type Failure
Context W303024
Action None
Reason1 Upper pickup pickup sensor S15 malfunctioning
Cure1 check upper pickup pickup sensor S15
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD03


Repair and Service
Type Failure
Context W303025
Action None
Reason1 Upper pickup passed sensor S18 malfunctioning
Cure1 check upper pickup passed sensor S18
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD03
MODULE : lowerpickupmodule
Elabel : Yes
HC304000 : lowerpickupmodule.film.pickupposition
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Lower input jam
Cure Remove lower input jam
HC304001 : lowerpickupmodule.film.bendposition
Type Accidental
Context
Action None


Repair and Service
HC304002 : lowerpickupmodule.film.homeposition
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
HC304003 : lowerpickupmodule.film.vacuum
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason1 Lower input jam
Cure1 Remove lower input jam
Reason2 vacuum system failing
Cure2 clean vacuum tubes , filter , vacuum cups ......
Cure3 Replace
Part vacuum pump
HC304004 : lowerpickupmodule.filmpickup
Type Accidental
Context
Action None


Repair and Service
HC304005 : lowerpickupmodule.s19.low
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
HC304006 : lowerpickupmodule.s19.high
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Internal jam
HC304007 : lowerpickupmodule.pickup.skew
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
HC304008 : lowerpickupmodule.tphalign
Type Accidental
Context
Action None


Repair and Service
HC304009 : lowerpickupmodule.film.align
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
HC304010 : lowerpickupmodule.homeposition
Type Failure
Context W304010
Action None
Reason Lower pickup homing failed accidently
HC304011 : lowerpickupmodule.thpositioning
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
HC304012 : lowerpickupmodule.elabel.present
Type Failure
Context W304012
Action None
Reason1 Lower pickup elabel not connected
Cure1 Connect lower pickup elabel
Reason2 Lower pickup Elabel defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD04


Repair and Service
HC304013 : lowerpickupmodule.elabel.config
Type Failure
Context W304013
Action None
Reason Lower pickup elabel defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD04
HC304014 : lowerpickupmodule.connected
Type Failure
Context W304014
Action None
Reason1 XS4 disconnected
Cure Connect XS4
Reason lower pickup module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD04
HC304015 : lowerpickupmodule.working
Type Failure
Context W304015
Action None
Cure1 Replace
Part MOD04
Reason2 Film wrinkled in upper tray
Cure2 Remove wrinkled film


Repair and Service
HC304016 : lowerpickupmodule.passed.high
Type Failure
Context W304016
Action None
Reason1 Lower pickup past sensor jammed
Cure1 Free lower pickup past sensor
Reason2 Lower pickup past sensor defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD04
HC304021 : lowerpickupmodule.m6.connection
Type Failure
Context W304021
Action SeeManual
Reason1 Lower pickup motor not connected
Cure1 connect lower pickup motor
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD04
HC304022 : lowerpickupmodule.m6.shortcircuit
Type Defect
Context E304022
Action SeeManual
Reason Lower pickup module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD04


Repair and Service
HC304023 : lowerpickupmodule.s16
Type Failure
Context W304023
Action None
Reason1 Lower pickup home sensor S16 malfunctioning
Cure1 check lower pickup home sensor S16
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD04
Type Failure
Context W304024
Action None
Reason1 Lower pickup pickup sensor S17 malfunctioning
Cure1 check lower pickup pickup sensor S17
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD04
Type Failure
Context W304025
Action None
Reason1 Lower pickup passed sensor S19 malfunctioning
Cure1 check lower pickup passed sensor S19
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD04


Repair and Service
MODULE : thmodule
Elabel : Yes
HC305000 : thmodule.high
Type Defect
Context E305000
Action SeeManual
Reason Coolingfan defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD16
HC305001 : thmodule.thpos.fail
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Internal jam
Cure Resolve jam
HC305002 : thmodule.thermalheadheater
Type Failure
Context W305002
Action SeeManual
Reason1 Connector P3 on PSU not connected
Cure1 Connect P3 on PSU
Reason2 Connectors P2 and P3 on OSB not connected
Cure2 Connect connectors P2 and P3
Reason3 Connectors P6 on OSB not connected
Cure3 Connect connector P6
Reason4 Connector XS6 on heater not connected
Cure4 Connect connector XS6
Reason5 Sensor S12 defect
Cure5 Replace MOD04
Reason6 PSU defect
Cure6 Replace


Repair and Service
Part MOD09
Reason7 TH defect
Cure7 Replace
Part MOD05
HC305003 : thmodule.elabel.present
Type Failure
Context W305003
Action None
Reason1 TH Elabel not connected
Cure1 Connect TH elabel
Reason2 Elabel defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD05
HC305004 : thmodule.elabel.config
Type Failure
Context W305004
Action None
Reason Elabel defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD05


Repair and Service
HC305005 : thmodule.device.current
Type Defect
Context E305005
Action SeeManual
Reason3 Connectors P3 on TH not connected
Cure3 Connect connector P3 on TH
Reason4 Connector P2 on TH not connected
Reason6 Connector P14 on MOD08 baseboard (Devil or Devius) not connected
Cure6 Connect connector P14 on MOD08 baseboard (Devil or Devius)
Reason7 PSU defect
Cure7 Replace
Part MOD09
Reason8 OSB defect
Cure8 Replace
Part OSB
Reason9 TH defect
Cure9 Replace
Part MOD05


Repair and Service
HC305006 : thmodule.powerlogic
Type Defect
Context E305006
Action SeeManual
Reason5 PSU defect
Cure5 Replace
Part MOD09
Reason6 OSB defect
Cure6 Replace
Part OSB
Reason7 TH defect
Cure7 Replace
Part MOD05
HC305007 : thmodule.headvoltageactuator
Type Defect
Context E305007
Action SeeManual


Repair and Service

Reason7 PSU defect
Cure7 Replace
Part MOD09
Reason8 OSB defect
Cure8 Replace
Part OSB
Reason9 TH defect
Cure9 Replace
Part MOD05
HC305008 : thmodule.osb.connected
Type Defect
Context E305008
Action SeeManual
Reason1 P1 on OSB not connected
Cure1 Connect P1 on OSB
Reason2 P1 on MOD08 baseboard (Devil or Devius) not connected
Cure2 Connect P1 on MOD08 baseboard (Devil or Devius)
Reason3 OSB defect
Cure3 Replace
Part OSB
HC305009 : thmodule.thermalheadheating
Type Failure
Context W305009
Action SeeManual
Reason TH module heater defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD05


Repair and Service
HC305010 : thmodule.voltage.low
Type Failure
Context W305010
Action SeeManual
Reason1 Serial connection to powersupply fails
Cure1 power down the printer, and power up again
Reason2 PSU module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD09
Reason3 TH module defect
Cure3 Replace
Part MOD05
IMPORTANT:
This fault may have following additional reason and cure:
Reason: Calibration files corrupted.
Cure:
For Software ≥ 2.0.0_C2:
Reset the calibration data for the film calibration of the upper and lower tray, followed
by a film calibration for both trays.
For Software < 2.0.0_C2:
Perform an emergency software installation without preserving the configuration data.
After this set-up the printer as described in chapter 1 of the Service Documentation.
HC305011 : thmodule.thinstall
Type Defect
Context 05
Action Replace
Reason TH data is not loaded properly
Cure Replace
Part MOD05


Repair and Service
HC305012 : thmodule.resolution
Type Defect
Context E305012
Action SeeManual
Reason TH has the wrong resolution for this printer OR this software is installed on
the wrong printer
Cure Replace
Part MOD05
HC305021 : thmodule.device.thermistors
Type Defect
Context 05
Action Replace
Reason5 TH defect
Cure5 Replace
Part MOD05


Repair and Service
MODULE : outputmodule
Elabel : Yes
HC306000 : outputmodule.connected
Type Defect
Context E306000
Action SeeManual
Reason1 XS2 not connected
Cure1 Connect XS2
Cure2 Connect XS3
HC306001 : outputmodule.cdm.init
Type Failure
Context W306001
Action None
Reason Output module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD06
HC306002 : outputmodule.intensity.scan
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Internal film jam
Cure Remove film jam
HC306003 : outputmodule.outputsensor.hi
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Output film jam


Repair and Service
HC306004 : outputmodule.printingFail
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason1 Internal film jam
Cure1 Remove film jam
Reason2 S18 or S19 is sticking
Cure2 replace this upper or lower tray
HC306005 : outputmodule.film.scan
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Cure Remove jam
HC306006 : outputmodule.outputSensor.lo
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
HC306007 : outputmodule.outputorscan.fail
Type Accidental
Context
Action None


Repair and Service
HC306008 : outputmodule.outputhome.fail
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
HC306009 : outputmodule.cdmhome.fail
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
HC306010 : outputmodule.elabel.present
Type Failure
Context W306010
Action None
Reason1 Output elabel not connected
Cure1 Connect output elabel
Reason2 Output elabel defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD06
HC306011 : outputmodule.elabel.config
Type Failure
Context W306011
Action None
Reason Output elabel defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD06


Repair and Service
HC306012 : outputmodule.cdm.home
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason CDM homing accidently failed
HC306013 : outputmodule.home
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason1 Output homing accidently failed
Cure1 Self resolving accident
Reason2 Output module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD06
HC306014 : outputmodule.cdminstall
Type Failure
Context W306014
Action None
Reason CDM needs calibration
Cure Calibrate CDM
HC306015 : outputmodule.intensity.unstable
Type Failure
Context W306015
Action None
Reason CDM intensity is unstable
Cure Replace CDM module MOD06


Repair and Service
HC306020 : outputmodule.working
Type Defect
Context 06
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD06
HC306021 : outputmodule.m4.connection
Type Defect
Context E306021
Action SeeManual
Reason1 Output motor not connected
Cure1 connect output motor
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD06
HC306022 : outputmodule.m4.shortcircuit
Type Defect
Context E306022
Action SeeManual
Cure Replace
Part MOD06


Repair and Service
HC306023 : outputmodule.cdm.m5.connection
Type Defect
Context E306023
Action SeeManual
Reason1 CDM motor not connected
Cure1 connect CDM motor
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD06
HC306024 : outputmodule.cdm.m5.shortcircuit
Type Defect
Context E306024
Action SeeManual
Cure Replace
Part MOD06
HC306025 : outputmodule.s5
Type Defect
Context 06
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD06


Repair and Service
HC306026 : outputmodule.s6
Type Defect
Context 06
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD06
HC306027 : outputmodule.cdm.s10
Type Defect
Context 06
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD06
HC306028 : outputmodule.cdm.working
Type Defect
Context 06
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD06


Repair and Service
MODULE : drumdrivemodule
Elabel : No
HC307001 : drumdrivemodule.m1.connection
Type Defect
Context E307001
Action SeeManual
Reason1 M1 not connected
Cure1 Connect M1
Reason2 Drum drive module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD07
IMPORTANT:
Reason: Ambient temperature too low when switching on the printer.
Cure: Ensure that ambient temperature is within specifications (+15 ° C to +30 ° C)
HC307002 : drumdrivemodule.s9
Type Defect
Context E307002
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect S9
Reason2 Drum drive module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD07


Repair and Service
HC307004 : drumdrivemodule.move
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Drum drive move failed accidently
Cure Selfresolving accident
HC307020 : drumdrivemodule.working
Type Defect
Context 07
Action Replace
Reason Drum drive module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD07
HC307021 : drumdrivemodule.m1.shortcircuit
Type Defect
Context E307021
Action SeeManual
Reason Drum drive module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD07


Repair and Service
MODULE : devilmodule
Elabel : Yes
HC308000 : devilmodule.dsh.connected
Type Defect
Context E308000
Action SeeManual
Reason1 Connector P9 not connected
Cure1 Connect P9
Reason2 MOD08 baseboard (Devil or Devius) module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08
HC308001 : devilmodule.psu.connected
Type Defect
Context E308001
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect P15
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08
HC308002 : devilmodule.keypad.connected
Type Defect
Context E308002
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect P8
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08


Repair and Service
HC308003 : devilmodule.th.connected
Type Defect
Context E308003
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect P14
Cure2 Connect P1 on TH
Cure3 Replace
Part MOD08
Reason4 TH defect
Cure4 Replace
Part MOD05
IMPORTANT:
Reason: Ambient temperature too low when switching on the printer.
Cure: Ensure that ambient temperature is within specifications (+15 ° C to +30 ° C).
HC308004 : devilmodule.p21.connected
Type Defect
Context E308004
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect P21
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08


Repair and Service
Type Defect
Context E308005
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect P20
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08
Type Defect
Context E308006
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect P41
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08
Type Defect
Context E308007
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect P40
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08


Repair and Service
Type Defect
Context E308008
Action SeeManual
Reason1 Connector P1 not connected on MOD08 baseboard (Devil or Devius)
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08
HC308009 : devilmodule.elabel.present
Type Failure
Context W308009
Action None
Reason1 MOD08 baseboard (Devil or Devius) Elabel not connected
Cure1 Connect MOD08 baseboard (Devil or Devius) elabel
Reason2 MOD08 baseboard (Devil or Devius) Elabel defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08
HC308010 : devilmodule.elabel.config
Type Failure
Context W308010
Action None
Reason MOD08 baseboard (Devil or Devius) Elabel defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD08


Repair and Service
HC308011 : devilmodule.power.3v3
Type Defect
Context E308011
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Replace
Part MOD08
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD09
HC308012 : devilmodule.power.12v
Type Defect
Context E308012
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Replace
Part MOD08
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD09
HC308013 : devilmodule.power.n12v
Type Defect
Context E308013
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Replace
Part MOD08
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD09


Repair and Service
HC308014 : devilmodule.power.24v
Type Defect
Context E308014
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Replace
Part MOD08
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD09
HC308015 : devilmodule.power.actuator
Type Defect
Context E308015
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Replace
Part MOD08
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD09
HC308016 : devilmodule.headvoltage
Type Defect
Context E308016
Action SeeManual
Reason1 Connector P1 not connected on TH
Cure1 Connect P1 on TH
Cure4 Replace
Part MOD09


Repair and Service

Cure5 Replace
Part MOD08
Cure6 Replace
Part MOD05
HC308017 : duplicate.ipaddress
Type Failure
Context W308017
Action None
Reason IP adress already in use
Cure Change IP adress
HC308018 : disk.space
Type Failure
Context W308018
Action None
Reason Harddisk full
Cure Call service
HC308019 : devilmodule.sn.mismatch
Type Defect
Context E308019
Action SeeManual
Reason SN mismatch
Cure Call service


Repair and Service
HC308020 : devilmodule.power.sensor
Type Defect
Context E308020
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Replace
Part MOD08
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD09
Type Defect
Context E308021
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect P42
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD08
HC312000 : tyndall.temperature
Type Defect
Context E312000
Action SeeManual
Reason1 Ambient temperature too high what could be caused by continuous printing
in an already warm environment or the environment temperature is just too
high
Cure1 If caused by continuous printing , this can be cured by waiting until
temperature comes down ; otherwise it has to be made sure that the
environment temperature comes down
Reason2 Cooling of MOD12 CPU board (Themis or Tyndall) not efficient because of
blocked airflow
Cure2 Make sure that enough airflow is available for the MOD12 CPU board
(Themis or Tyndall) by insuring that air inlets and outlets are completely
free
Reason3 Defect CPU on MOD12


Repair and Service
Cure3 Replace
Part MOD12
HC308024 : devilmodule.serialadc
Type Defect
Context 08
Action Replace
Reason MOD08 baseboard (Devil or Devius) module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD08
HC308025 : devilmodule.bitgenerator
Type Defect
Context 08
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD08
HC308026 : devilmodule.m16
Type Defect
Context 08
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD08
HC308027 : devilmodule.fpga
Type Defect
Context 08
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD08


Repair and Service
HC308028 : devilmodule.m2.driver
Type Defect
Context 08
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD08
Type Defect
Context 08
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD08
Type Defect
Context 08
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD08
Type Defect
Context 08
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD08


Repair and Service
HC308032 : devilmodule.f1.driver
Type Defect
Context 08
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD08
HC308033 : devilmodule.f2.driver
Type Defect
Context 08
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD08
HC308034 : diagnose.completion
Type Failure
Context W308034
Action None
Reason Diagnose not complete
Cure Reboot printer with closed trays and covers
Type Defect
Context 08
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD08


Repair and Service
Type Defect
Context 08
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD08
Type Defect
Context 08
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD08
Type Defect
Context 08
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD08
HC308039 : devilmodule.v1.driver
Type Defect
Context 08
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD08


Repair and Service
HC308040 : devilmodule.v2.driver
Type Defect
Context 08
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD08
HC312020 : devilmodule.tyndall.cpuboard
Type Defect
Context 12
Action Replace
Reason MOD12 cpu board (Themis or Tyndall) defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD12
HC312021 : devilmodule.tyndall.serial
Type Defect
Context 12
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD12
HC312022 : devilmodule.tyndall.ethernet
Type Defect
Context 12
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD12


Repair and Service
HC312023 : devilmodule.tyndall.portex
Type Defect
Context 12
Action Replace
Reason Software problem
Cure Reinstall software
HC312024 : devilmodule.tyndall.pci
Type Defect
Context 12
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD12
HC318020 : devilmodule.tyndall.ram
Type Defect
Context 18
Action Replace
Reason1 RAM defect
Cure1 Replace
Part MOD18
Reason2 MOD12 cpu board (Themis or Tyndall) defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD12
HC312025 : devilmodule.tyndall.clock
Type Defect
Context 12
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD12


Repair and Service
MODULE : powersupplymodule
Elabel : Yes
HC309000 : powersupplymodule.temperature
Type Defect
Context E309000
Action SeeManual
Reason1 PSU too hot
Cure1 Switch off printer and let it cool down
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD09
HC309001 : powersupplymodule.elabel.present
Type Failure
Context W309001
Action None
Reason1 PSU Elabel not connected
Cure1 Connect PSU elabel
Reason2 PSU module Elabel defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD09
HC309002 : powersupplymodule.elabel.config
Type Failure
Context W309002
Action None
Reason PSU module Elabel defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD09


Repair and Service
HC309003 : powersupplymodule.powerth.current
Type Defect
Context E309003
Action SeeManual
Reason1 TH power cables short circuited
Cure1 Check TH power cables
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD05
Cure3 Replace
Part MOD09
HC309004 : powersupplymodule.powermotor.current
Type Defect
Context E309004
Action SeeManual
Reason1 Actuators power cables short circuited
Cure1 Check actuators power cables
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD09
HC309005 : powersupplymodule.temperature.warning
Type Failure
Context E309005
Action None
Reason PSU temperature high
Cure Cool down the PSU


Repair and Service
HC309020 : powersupplymodule.powerth
Type Defect
Context 09
Action Replace
Reason PSU module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD09
HC309022 : powersupplymodule.powermotor
Type Defect
Context 09
Action Replace
Reason1 Actuators power cables short circuited
Cure1 Check actuators power cables
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD09
HC309024 : powersupplymodule.powerlogic
Type Defect
Context 09
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD09
HC309025 : powersupplymodule.power3v3
Type Defect
Context 09
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD09


Repair and Service
HC309026 : powersupplymodule.power12v
Type Defect
Context 09
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD09
HC309027 : powersupplymodule.powern12v
Type Defect
Context 09
Action Replace
Cure Replace
Part MOD09
MODULE : displaykeypadmodule
Elabel : Yes
HC310000 : displaykeypadmodule.elabel.present
Type Failure
Context W310000
Action None
Reason1 Display Elabel not connected
Cure1 Connect Display elabel
Reason2 Display Elabel defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD10


Repair and Service
HC310001 : displaykeypadmodule.elabel.config
Type Failure
Context W310001
Action None
Reason Display Elabel defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD10
MODULE : inputsensormodule
Elabel : No
HC311000 : inputsensormodule.s4.flagproblem
Type Failure
Context W311000
Action None
Reason Internal jam, input sensor S4 isn't responding
Cure Remove jam
HC311001 : inputsensormodule.s13.flagproblem
Type Failure
Context W311001
Action None
Reason Internal jam, input sensor S13 isn't responding
Cure Remove jam
HC311002 : inputsensormodule.connected
Type Defect
Context E311002
Action SeeManual
Reason XS5 not connected
Cure Connect XS5


Repair and Service
HC311003 : inputsensormodule.s4
Type Failure
Context W311003
Action None
Cure1 Connect S4
Reason2 S4 bracket module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD11
HC311004 : inputsensormodule.s13
Type Failure
Context W311004
Action None
Cure1 Connect S13
Reason2 S4 bracket module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD11
HC311005 : inputsensormodule.sensors
Type Failure
Context W311005
Action None
Reason one of the inputsensors is not functioning
Cure Remove jam


Repair and Service
HC311020 : inputsensormodule.working
Type Defect
Context 11
Action Replace
Reason S4 bracket module is defective
Cure Power off printer and replace
Part MOD10
MODULE : camdrivemodule
Elabel : No
HC313000 : camdrivemodule.home
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Internal jam
HC313001 : camdrivemodule.m2.connection
Type Defect
Context E313001
Action SeeManual
Reason1 Motor M2 not connected
Cure1 Connect motor M2
Reason2 Cam shaft module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD13


Repair and Service
HC313002 : camdrivemodule.s7
Type Defect
Context E313002
Action SeeManual
Reason1 Sensor S7 not connected
Cure1 Connect sensor S7
Reason2 Cam shaft module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD13
HC313020 : camdrivemodule.working
Type Defect
Context 13
Action Replace
Reason Cam shaft module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD13
HC313021 : camdrivemodule.m2.shortcircuit
Type Defect
Context E313021
Action SeeManual
Reason Cam shaft module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD13


Repair and Service
MODULE : gearboxmodule
Elabel : No
HC314000 : gearboxmodule.home
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Internal jam
HC314001 : gearboxmodule.pickup.passed
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Internal jam
HC314002 : gearboxmodule.takeover.film.close
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Internal jam
HC314003 : gearboxmodule.film.inputsensors
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Internal jam


Repair and Service
HC314004 : gearboxmodule.m8.connection
Type Defect
Context E314004
Action SeeManual
Reason2 Roller drive module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD14
HC314005 : gearboxmodule.s3
Type Defect
Context E314005
Action SeeManual
Reason2 Roller drive module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD14
HC314006 : gearboxmodule.connected
Type Defect
Context E314006
Action SeeManual
Reason1 Connector XS12 not connected
Cure1 Connect Connector XS12
Reason2 gearboxmodule drive module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD14


Repair and Service
HC314020 : gearboxmodule.working
Type Defect
Context 14
Action Replace
Reason Roller drive module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD14
HC314021 : gearboxmodule.m8.shortcircuit
Type Defect
Context E314021
Action SeeManual
Reason Roller drive module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD14
MODULE : suspensiondrivemodule
Elabel : No
HC315000 : suspensiondrivemodule.move
Type Accidental
Context
Action None
Reason Suspension move (10 or 14 inch) failed accidently


Repair and Service
HC315001 : suspensiondrivemodule.m3.connection
Type Defect
Context E315001
Action SeeManual
Reason2 Suspension drive module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD15
HC315002 : suspensiondrivemodule.s21
Type Defect
Context E315002
Action SeeManual
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD15
HC315003 : suspensiondrivemodule.s22
Type Defect
Context E315003
Action SeeManual
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD15


Repair and Service
HC315004 : suspensiondrivemodule.connected
Type Defect
Context E315004
Action SeeManual
Reason1 Connector XS13 not connected
Cure1 Connect Connector XS13
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD15
HC315020 : suspensiondrivemodule.working
Type Defect
Context 15
Action Replace
Reason Suspension drive module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD15
HC315021 : suspensiondrivemodule.m3.shortcircuit
Type Defect
Context E315021
Action SeeManual
Reason Suspension drive module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD15


Repair and Service
MODULE : coolingfanmodule
Elabel : No
HC316000 : coolingfanmodule.thf1.connection
Type Defect
Context E316000
Action SeeManual
Reason1 Coolingfan not connected
Cure1 Connect coolingfan
Reason2 Coolingfan module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD12
HC316020 : coolingfanmodule.thf1.shortcircuit
Type Defect
Context E316020
Action SeeManual
Reason1 Coolingfan not connected
Cure1 Connect coolingfan
Reason2 Coolingfan module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD12


Repair and Service
MODULE : pumpandvalvesmodule
Elabel : No
HC317000 : pumpandvalvesmodule.m9.connection
Type Defect
Context E317000
Action SeeManual
Cure2 Connect XS10
Reason3 Pump and valves module defect
Cure3 Replace
Part MOD17
HC317001 : pumpandvalvesmodule.v1.connection
Type Defect
Context E317001
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect XS10
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD17
HC317002 : pumpandvalvesmodule.v2.connection
Type Defect
Context E317002
Action SeeManual
Cure1 Connect XS10
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD17


Repair and Service
HC317020 : pumpandvalvesmodule.m9.shortcircuit
Type Defect
Context E317020
Action SeeManual
Reason Pump and valves module defect
Cure Replace
Part MOD17
HC317021 : pumpandvalvesmodule.v1.shortcircuit
Type Defect
Context E317021
Action SeeManual
Cure Replace
Part MOD17
HC317022 : pumpandvalvesmodule.v2.shortcircuit
Type Defect
Context E317022
Action SeeManual
Cure Replace
Part MOD17


Repair and Service
MODULE : eboxfanmodule
Elabel : No
HC320000 : eboxfanmodule.eboxfan.connection
Type Defect
Context E320000
Action SeeManual
Reason1 EBox fan module not connected
Cure1 Connect EBox fan module
Reason2 EBox fan module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD20
HC320020 : eboxfanmodule.eboxfan.shortcircuit
Type Defect
Context E320020
Action SeeManual
Reason EBox fan module defect
Cure2 Replace
Part MOD20
MODULE : bothtraysmodule
Elabel : No
HC321001 : pickupmodule.alltrays.disabled
Type Defect
Context E321001
Action SeeManual
Reason All inputtrays have detected a mallfunction
Cure Check other active HC-codes to get detailed info


Chapter 3.3
Imaging Services
Troubleshooting
DRYSTAR 5302
Type 5366/100
► Please note
The Chapter ‘Troubleshooting’, Edition 1, Revision 0, has been replaced by the

separately available Troubleshooting Guide, DD+DIS154.08E.
Please download the Troubleshooting Guide from the GSO Library:

MEDNET GSO Æ Hardcopy Æ Dry Imagers Æ Drystar 5302 Æ Trouble shooting guide
A description of the printer error codes is appended to this document.

eq_03-3_troubleshooting_e_template_v05
Repair and Service
intentionally left blank


Repair and Service
DD+DIS150.05E Electrical and mechanical codings, fuse tables and LED’s
Chapter 3.4:
List of contents
1 Codings................................................................................. 1
1.1 Jumper Setting 73 GB Maxtor Hard Disk ........................................... 1
1.2 Jumper Setting 73 GB Hitachi Hard Disk ........................................... 2
2 Fuses..................................................................................... 3
3 LEDs ...................................................................................... 3
3.1 DEVIL Board ......................................................................................... 3
3.2 THEMIS Board (plugged into the DEVIL Board) ................................ 4
3.3 Power Supply ....................................................................................... 5
3.4 Front Panel ........................................................................................... 6
3.5 Rear panel............................................................................................. 7

Edition 1, Revision 0 Drystar 5302 Chapter 3.4 / I
Repair and Service
1 Codings
1.1 Jumper Setting 73 GB Maxtor Hard Disk
1 J1 J3
1
12
18
536634BD.CDR
Figure 1
Jumper J1 Setting Function

1-2 open ID Bit 3
3-4 open ID Bit 2
5-6 open ID Bit 1
7-8 open ID Bit 0
9-10 open Not used
11-12 open Termination Power
Table 1
Jumper J3 Setting Function

1-2 open ID Bit 3
3-4 open ID Bit 2
5-6 open ID Bit 1
7-8 open ID Bit 0
9-10 open Busy LED
11-12 open Enable write protect
13-14 open enable stagger spin
15-16 open Enable delay spin
17-18 open Force single ended bus mode
Table 2

Edition 1, Revision 0 Drystar 5302 Chapter 3.4 / 1
Repair and Service
Electrical and mechanical codings, fuse tables and LED’s DD+DIS150.05E
1.2 Jumper Setting 73 GB Hitachi Hard Disk

24
C3
12
1
C4
536634BC.CDR
Figure 2
Jumper C3 Setting Function

1-2 open ID Bit 3
3-4 open ID Bit 2
5-6 open ID Bit 1
7-8 open ID Bit 0
9-10 open Disable Autostart
11-12 open Force single ended bus mode
13-14 open Enable delayed start
15-16 open Write Protect
17-18 open Reserved
19-20 open Reserved
21-22 open LED
23-24 open Term Power to SCSI bus
Table 3
Jumper C4 Setting Function

1-2 open ID Bit 3
3-4 open ID Bit 2
5-6 open ID Bit 1
7-8 open ID Bit 0
9-10 open Not used
11-12 open Write Protect
Table 4

Chapter 3.4 / 2 Drystar 5302 Edition 1, Revision 0
Repair and Service
2 Fuses
The printer has no fuses that can be replaced.
If one of the fuses in the power supply is defective, the whole Power supply
unit must be replaced - refer to section 3.5.
3 LEDs
The following tables show the status of the LED indications and the
corresponding function:
LED's on... Refer to

DEVIL Board 3.1
THEMIS Board 3.2
Power supply 3.3
Front Panel 3.4
Rear Panel 3.5
3.1 DEVIL Board
Name Led Color Function

(**) NTRAFFIC D1 yellow Network activity
(**) NGOOD_LINK D2 yellow Network connected
(**) 100MBit_speed
D3 yellow High speed network
IMGCTRL_0 D4 yellow Software controllable
D5 green +3.3V present
NOT present D6
NOT present D7
NOT present D8
D9 green +24V present
NOT present D11
IMGCTRL_CONFDONE D12 yellow Off: FPGA config done.
ON: FPGA not
configured
IMGCTRL_1 D13 yellow Software controllable
UP_LED0 D14 yellow Software controllable
UP_LED1 D15 yellow Software controllable
(**) IDE_DASP D16 yellow IDE activity
D17 green -12V present
CP_ACTLED D19 yellow Disc activity controlled
by PORTEX
Legend : (**) are LEDs situated at the rear panel (refer to 3.5).

Repair and Service
3.2 THEMIS Board (plugged into the DEVIL Board)

D1 yellow Software controllable
V25 D2 green 2.5 for MPC107 host bridge and
FPGA
VCORE D3 green CPU core voltage
CS1 D4 yellow Chip select for portX bus
V33 D5 green 3.3V for most logic on board
FPGA D6 red FPGA configuration done
If FPGA NOT configured => ALARM
VCC D8 green 5V for remaining logic on board
CS0 D9 yellow Chip select for portX bus
CPU D11 yellow CPU Bis Grant - indicates CPU
activity on the Bus

Repair and Service
3.3 Power Supply
536634ab.cdr
Figure 3
LED Status Color Function

Overtemp On Red Temperature inside power supply
exceeded permissible limits. Operation
not possible*.
Off Temperature inside power supply
within permissible limit.
+ 3.3 V On Green +3.3 V present
Off +3.3 V not present
+5V On Green +5 V present
Off +5 V not present
+12 V On Green +12 V present
-12 V On Green -12 V present
Off -12 V not present
+24 V On Green +24 V present
13..27 V On Green voltage between 13 V and 27 V
Off voltage < 13 V
*When the temperature inside the power supply exceeds the permissible limit,
printing can continue for up to 120 seconds. After this delay the power supply
switches off the power and checks the temperature every 20 seconds. As
soon as the temperature is below the permissible limit, it switches on again.

Repair and Service
3.4 Front Panel
Led Color Function

D1 green 12V power present
D2..D25 green / red See table below
D3 green 5V power present
Color Light Status Receive Printing

Jobs ? possible ?
Ready No No
Constant
(stand-by)
Startup No No
sequence
Receiving jobs Yes Yes
Green
Calculating Yes Yes
Blinking
Printing Yes Yes
Calibrating Yes No
Installation No No
Key-operator Yes/No Yes/No
Service mode No No
Blinking Film jam Yes No
Red
Warning Yes Yes
Constant Error status No No

Repair and Service
3.5 Rear panel
536634aa.cdr
Figure 4

NTRAFFIC D1 yellow Network activity
NGOOD_LINK D2 yellow Network connected
100MBit_speed D3 yellow High speed network
IDE_DASP D16 yellow IDE activity
Note: These LEDs are part of the DEVIL board (refer to 3.1).

Chapter 3.5
Imaging Services
Replacements / Repair Procedures
DRYSTAR 5302
Type 5366/100
This document describes the availability of replacement instructions:

The replacement instructions are enclosed to the printer spare parts as print-out.

1.1 04-2011 Replaced instructions by references to enclosure documents.

The controlled version of this document resides on the Agfa HealthCare Library. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.
eq_03-5_replacements_e_template_v07
Repair and Service
DD+DIS150.05E Replacements / Repair Procedures
► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(see Agfa HealthCare Library => General Info => Agfa HealthCare =>
Publications => Service Manual) prior to attempting any operation, repair or
maintenance task on the equipment.
the product.
NOTE:
Document Type ‘Order List’ in the Agfa HealthCare Library.


Chapter 3.6
Imaging Services
Adjustments and Calibrations
DRYSTAR 5302
Type 5366/100
This document describes the adjustments, calibrations and image quality checks
of the printer.

1.1 05-2009 Added section 2.5, Compliance Film Calibration as part of
Afssaps / EUREF Calibration Procedure.
Document Title
n.a. n.a.

eq_03-6_adjustments_e_template_v07
Repair and Service
DD+DIS150.05E Adjustments and Calibrations
► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
NOTE:


Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 ADJUSTMENTS .......................................................................................................................4
1.1 Horizontal Film Alignment Procedure .......................................................................................4
2 CALIBRATIONS .......................................................................................................................6
2.1 Film Calibration .........................................................................................................................7
2.2 CDM (Internal Densitometer) Calibration..................................................................................9
2.3 Print Head (TH) Calibration.....................................................................................................11
2.4 Smart Profile Calibration .........................................................................................................13
2.5 Compliance Film Calibration as part of Afssaps / EUREF Calibration Procedure..................17
2.5.1 Checking the Densitometer Calibration ..................................................................................20
2.5.2 Checking the Densitometer Configuration in the Printer ........................................................20
2.5.3 Resetting the Compliance Film Calibration, Internal Densitometer Calibration and Thermal
Print Head Calibration.............................................................................................................21
2.5.4 Performing Internal Densitometer Calibration, Film Calibrations and Thermal Print Head
Calibration ...............................................................................................................................21
2.5.5 Performing a Density Reproduction Check.............................................................................26
2.5.6 Performing the Afssaps / EUREF Calibration Check..............................................................27
2.5.7 Performing a Compliance Film Calibration .............................................................................28
3 CHECKS.................................................................................................................................31
3.1 Density Reproduction Check ..................................................................................................31
3.2 Check for Dust Stripes / TPH Cleaning Procedure.................................................................32
3.2.1 Basic Rules for the TH Cleaning Procedure ...........................................................................34
3.3 Resistor Check........................................................................................................................35


Repair and Service
1 Adjustments
Following adjustments have to be performed at the printer:
Adjustment To be done: Details see:

Horizontal film In case after TH replacement the blank left / 1.1
alignment right frame on a SMPTE test image is < 1,5 mm
1.1 Horizontal Film Alignment Procedure
When to be The horizontal film alignment is necessary when:

performed
• The TPH has been replaced and
• the blank frame at the left and right hand side on a SMPTE test image is < 1,5
mm for DT2B / DT2C Films.
Purpose Centering the image on the film: Compensate for mechanical tolerances of the
thermal head mounting.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Ruler to measure in the range up to 15 mm
REQUIRED TIME:
10 min.
NOTE:
The horizontal film alignment can be performed via browser user interface or the local
keypad. The required time and proceeding is identical.
It can be performed at any film size.


Repair and Service
Instructions Via Printer Browser User Interface

(1) In the printer browser user interface select 'Service Engineer Tools'.
(2) Select 'Enter Service Command Session'.
(3) Select '6 Calibration - 4 Horizontal Alignment'.
(4) Select 'upper tray' or 'lower tray': A test film as shown in Figure 1 will be
printed.
(5) Measure the left and right blank border of the test film.
(6) Enter the values in mm (typically approx. 10 mm) in the browser screen.
(7) Select 'Accept Changes'.
Via Local Keypad

(1) In the key-operator menu select menu '7 Service Actions'.
(2) Select '6 Calibration - 4 Horizontal Alignment'.
(3) Select 'upper tray' or 'lower tray': A test film as shown in Figure 1 will be
printed.
(4) Measure the left and right blank border of the test film.
(5) Enter the values in mm (typically approx. 10 mm) in the browser screen.
(6) Select ‘confirm’.
Left white border Right white border

Measure the left clear border width: Measure the right clear border width:
Value: mm Value: mm
via local display via Browser User Interface:

Measure left
white border
Welcome to this
0.0 mm DryStar 5302
Measure right
white border
Service - Calibration
0.0 mm
Horizontal alignment
Left white border 0.0 (mm)

Right white border 0.0 (mm)
Accept changes Discard changes

536736ac.cdr
Figure 1


Repair and Service
Verification (1) On the local keypad select key-operator menu '3 Print Image - 1 Testimage –
upper or lower tray - SMPTE_xxx.tif': An SMPTE test image will be printed.
(2) Measure the left and right blank frame in print direction: It must be ≥ 1,5 mm.
Result The horizontal film alignment procedure is performed.
2 Calibrations
Following calibrations have to be performed at the printer:

Film calibration • During maintenance. 2.1
• After replacement of the Thermal
print head (TPH).
• During the troubleshooting
procedure.
Internal densitometer • When the density reproduction 2.2
(CDM) calibration check indicates to calibrate the
CDM.
• During the troubleshooting
procedure.
Print Head (TH) • During the troubleshooting 2.3
calibration procedure.
• During the TH cleaning procedure.
Refer to section 3.2 in this chapter.
Smart Profile • During the troubleshooting 2.4
Calibration procedure.
• In certain cases during
maintenance. Refer to section 9,
Maintenance.
Compliance Film • May be required as last step of an 2.5
Calibration Afssaps / EUREF calibration
procedure.


Repair and Service
2.1 Film Calibration
When to be The film calibration has to be performed in following cases:

performed
• Before Smart TH Profile Calibration. See section 2.4.
• During the compliance film calibration. See section 2.5.
• After TH replacement
• At least each 5000 films (adjustable maintenance action. Refer to chapter 9
Maintenance).
• In case of a drift of the maximum density
• During the troubleshooting procedure
Purpose Determination of the correlation between control of the thermal head and
corresponding densities on film
REQUIRED TOOLS:
None
REQUIRED TIME:
10 min.
NOTE:
The film calibration is by default executed automatically at every 5th new film package:
This automatic film calibration can be activated/deactivated in the Key-operator menu
"1. Change settings - 5. Image quality - 1. General - select default for film calibration
(default = ON)". Also the calibration frequency (Default = every 5 film packs) can be
entered there.


Repair and Service
(1) Select in key-operator menu

'6 Calibration - 1 Film Calibration'.
(2) Select upper or lower input tray:
The calibration film as shown in
Figure 2 is printed and the
measured Dmax is shown.
INPUT TRAY:
FILM CALIBRATION OK
Dmax = 3.20 (XR310)

536701aa.cdr
Default densitometer
Measured Dmax
(3) Repeat film calibration for the

second input tray.
536336as.cdr
Figure 2
NOTE:
The calibration is successful, in case the measured Dmax is max. 2% different from
the target Dmax.
The target Dmax depends on the default densitometer which is configured in Key-
operator menu "2 Change Settings - 5 Image Quality - 1 General".
Refer to table below.

Example:
Selected default densitometer: X-Rite 341
Measured Dmax DT2B: 3.04 O.D.
Result: Calibration successful
Default Densitometer Target Dmax DT2B Target Dmax DT2C

X-Rite 310 3.20 O.D. 3.05 O.D.
X-Rite 331 3.09 O.D. 2.93 O.D.
X-Rite 341 3.05 O.D. 2.89 O.D.
X-Rite 301 3.10 O.D. 2.88 O.D.
MacBeth 3.10 O.D. 2.91 O.D.
Gretag D200 3.05 O.D. 2.88 O.D.


Repair and Service
2.2 CDM (Internal Densitometer) Calibration
NOTE:
• Only following densitometers can be used for the calibration: McBeth TR-924,
Gretag D200-2, X-Rite 301, X-Rite 310, X-Rite 331, X-Rite 341.
• The densitometer must be calibrated with the calibration wedge of the
densitometer manufacturer according to the calibration procedure of the
densitometer manufacturer.
When to be • The calibration of the internal densitometer CDM via an external densitometer is
performed
necessary when the density reproduction check for a specific material is not OK
after a film calibration.
• During the troubleshooting procedure.
Purpose • Adjust the CDM to another calibrated, external densitometer.

• To compensate for CDM measurement drifts.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
One of following, calibrated densitometers: McBeth TR-924, Gretag D200-2, X-Rite
301, X-Rite 310, X-Rite 331, X-Rite 341
Instructions (1) In the webpages - menu 'Service Engineer Tools - Enter Service Command
session' select '6. Calibration - 2. Internal densitometer calibration'.
(2) Follow the instructions on the WebPages. Refer to Figure 3.
(3) Enter the measured densities in the browser window.
(4) Perform a film calibration. See 2.1.
(5) Perform a density reproduction check. See 3.1.


Repair and Service

Service - Calibration Service - Calibration

1. Film Calibration Internal Densitometer Calibration
2. Internal Densitometer Calibration Select Densitometer
3. Print Head Calibration Macbeth TR924
4. Horizontal Alignment Gretag
5. Smart Profile Calibration X-Rite 301
X-Rite 310
Go back
Start Calibration Go back Reset Values
Welcome to this
DryStar 5302 printer Welcome to this
Service - Calibration Internal Densitometer Calibration

Internal Densitometer Calibration
SUCCEEDED
Upper Tray Enter below the measurements of the printer calibration sheet
Lower Tray
Step Previous values Step Previous values
00 0.25 0.24 01 0.25 0.24
02 0.26 0.25 03 0.30 0.31
04 0.54 0.55 05 0.94 0.95
536636ak.cdr 06 1.43 1.45 07 1.96 1.97
08 2.50 2.49 09 3.00 2.99
10 3.18 3.15 11 2.80 2.80
12 2.28 2.28 13 1.71 1.75
14 1.17 1.20 15 0.71 0.72
16 0.37 0.38 17 0.26 0.26
18 0.25 0.24 19 0.25 0.24
Accept changes Discard changes Reset values
Figure 3
NOTE:
Always perform a Film calibration (refer to 2.1) and check the Density reproduction
(refer to 3.1) after a CDM calibration.


Repair and Service
2.3 Print Head (TH) Calibration
When to be The Print Head Profile calibration is necessary whenever vertical stripes are not longer
performed acceptable:
Vertical stripes are unacceptable in case they are visible in the medical service test
image.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
• One of following, calibrated densitometers: McBeth TR-924, Gretag D200-2, X-
Rite 301, X-Rite 310, X-Rite 331, X-Rite 341
• Lint free cloth
• Isopropyl - alcohol
Instructions (1) Print the Medical service test image.

(2) Clean the thermal head with a cleaning tissue lightly moistened with Isopropyl -
alcohol. The last cleaning action must be carried out in one way.
(3) In the webpages - menu 'Service Engineer Tools - Enter Service Command
session' select '6. Calibration - 3. Print Head Calibration'.
(4) Follow the instructions on the WebPages. Refer to Figure 4.


Repair and Service


1. Film Calibration Thermal Printhead Calibration
3. Thermal Print Head Calibration Macbeth TR924
5. Smart profile calibration X-Rite 301
X-Rite 310
Go back Start Calibration Go back Reset Values
Welcome to this
Printhead Calibration Succeeded
Lower Tray Step Step
Select a 14" film for optimum quality 00 2.0 01 2.1
02 2.0 03 2.1
04 2.1 05 2.1
536736ag.cdr
06 2.1 07 2.1
08 2.2 09 2.1
10 2.1 11 2.2
12 2.1 13 2.1
14 2.1 15 2.0
16 2.1 17 2.1
18 2.1 19 2.1
20 2.1 21 2.2
Field 1 Field 21
Figure 4


Repair and Service
(5) Print the Medical service test

image.
(6) Check the print stripes in the
medical image:
• If the vertical stripes are
acceptable, continue with next
step.
• If the vertical stripes are still
unacceptable, but improved
with respect to the first printed
medical image, repeat the
procedure.
• If the vertical stripes are still
unacceptable and not
improved with respect to the
first printed medical image
replace the Thermal Print
Figure 5: Medical service test image
head (refer to Section 3.5).
(7) Perform a Film calibration.
Refer to section 2.1.
NOTE:
With Print Head Calibration only macro TPH banding can be solved. Sharp and or
small (10 mm) discontinuities can not be solved by a Print Head Calibration.
2.4 Smart Profile Calibration
When to be The smart profile calibration has to be performed in following cases:

performed
• During the troubleshooting procedure.
• In certain cases during maintenance. Refer to section 9, Maintenance.
Purpose Equalization of TH resistor drift in the area of 10" film black borders when printing in
mixed format conditions (mix of 10" and 14" print width).
A 14x17" film is required to perform this calibration.
66 densities have to be measured and to be entered in the browser screen.


Repair and Service
REQUIRED TOOLS:
• Calibrated densitometer MacBeth TR-924, X-Rite 331, 341, X-Rite 301, X-Rite
310 or Gretag D200-2
• Waterproof pen
REQUIRED TIME:
45 min.
(1) Perform a film calibration for this tray, where 14x17" films are available. See
section 2.1.
(2) Select in the browser menu
'Service Engineer Tools - Enter Service Command Session'.
(3) Select '6 Calibration - 5 Smart Profile Calibration'.
(4) Select the densitometer which will be used for measurement.
(5) Select the film tray with 14x17", 14x14” or 14x11” films: A test film as shown in
Figure 6 is printed.
(6) Measure the 66 squares on the printed film: Write down the values on the
foreseen squares on the film with a waterproof pen.
Figure 6
(7) Enter the values in the browser screen. See also Figure 7 and Figure 8.
IMPORTANT:
The browser screen where the 66 data are entered refreshes in a time interval of
4 minutes. If you are not finished with entering all data within 4 minutes, all entered
values will be reset to "0.00".
Workaround to avoid entering all data again: Press the “back button” in the browser.


Repair and Service


1. Film Calibration Smart Profile Calibration
X-Rite 310
Welcome to this
Service - Calibration Smart Profile Calibration

Smart Profile Calibration
Step Step Step Step Step
Upper Tray 00 0.00 01 0.00 02 0.00 03 0.00 04 0.00
Lower Tray 05 0.00 06 0.00 07 0.00 08 0.00 09 0.00
Select the input tray with 14''x17'' film format 10 0.00 11 0.00 12 0.00 13 0.00 14 0.00
15 0.00 16 0.00 17 0.00 18 0.00 19 0.00
20 0.00 21 0.00 22 0.00 23 0.00 24 0.00
25 0.00 26 0.00 27 0.00 28 0.00 29 0.00
536636kk.cdr
30 0.00 31 0.00 32 0.00 33 0.00 34 0.00
35 0.00 36 0.00 37 0.00 38 0.00 39 0.00
40 0.00 41 0.00 42 0.00 43 0.00 44 0.00
45 0.00 46 0.00 47 0.00 48 0.00 49 0.00
50 0.00 51 0.00 52 0.00 53 0.00 54 0.00
55 0.00 56 0.00 57 0.00 58 0.00 59 0.00
60 0.00 61 0.00 62 0.00 63 0.00 64 0.00
65 0.00
Accept changes Discard all changes Reset values
Figure 7
Figure 8


Repair and Service
Verification (1) In the browser screen select menu 'Service Engineer Tools - Enter Service
Command Session - 3 Print Image - 1 Testimage – upper or lower tray* -
STI2.ZIP': The STI2 test image will be printed.
(2) From the same menu print the medical_image.zip*
*IMPORTANT: Select the tray with 14" width films.

(3) Check both images at the light box for dark stripes in the area of the 10" film
edge:
• On the STI2 test image dark stripes may be visible in the area of the 10"
film edge.
• On the medical test image no dark stripes may be visible in the area of the
10" film edge.
Figure 9
Result The smart profile calibration is performed.


Repair and Service
2.5 Compliance Film Calibration as part of Afssaps / EUREF Calibration

Procedure
Purpose Make film calibration this accurate, that it passes the acceptance criteria as defined
by Afssaps / EUREF:
The default film calibration procedure is not necessarily accurate enough.
When to be The compliance film calibration may be required as last step of the Afssaps / EUREF*
performed calibration procedure.
The Afssaps / EUREF compliance calibration procedure has to be performed in
following cases:
• Before the Afssaps / EUREF acceptance test
• Each 6 months, if the printer is under control of Afssaps / EUREF, and it did not
pass the Afssaps / EUREF calibration check (see section 2.5.6).
*Afssaps = Agence française de sécurité sanitaire des produits de santé
EUREF = European Reference Organisation for Quality Assured Breast Screening and
Diagnostic Services
Prerequiste 1) The compliance film calibration is only

available for DRYSTAR 5302
software ≥ 2.0.0_C1.
2) A “TG18-PQC modified 4” image has
to be available on the modality.
The Test Pattern can be downloaded

from http://www.euref.org/.
Figure 10: TG18-PQC modified 4


Repair and Service
REQUIRED TOOLS:
• Service PC with network interface and browser Internet Explorer
• Calibrated densitometer MacBeth TR-924, X-Rite 331, 341, X-Rite 301, X-Rite
310 or Gretag D200-2
• Lint free cloth
• Isopropyl - alcohol
• Waterproof pen
• Density reproduction check Excel sheets, available via MEDNET, GSO Library
• Afssaps / EUREF Calibration Check Excel Sheet, available via MEDNET, GSO
Library
• Connectivity Release Document for the corresponding modality to DRYSTAR
5302, available via MedNet HealthCare Library Æ General Info Æ Connectivity &
Application
REQUIRED TIME:
60 to 120 min.


Repair and Service
Overview of the Afssaps / EUREF calibration procedure:
DRYSTAR 5302 calibration procedure for Afssaps/EUREF
Check calibration of densitometer. Details see section 2.5.1.
No Perform densitometer
Densitometer calibration acc. to densitometer
calibration ok? manufacturer instructions.
YES
Check configured default densitometer. Details see section 2.5.2.
Used densitometer No Adjust densitometer in: 'Key-operator menu -

= default densitometer 2 Change settings – 5 Image Quality
in the printer? - 1 General settings'
YES
YES
Printer installation date
= today?
No
Reset CDM, TH, CFC calibrations. Details see section 2.5.3
Perform following calibrations. Details see section 2.5.4:

1. Film calibration for mammo trays (2 x)
2. CDM calibration
4. Print Head calibration (1x)
Perform density reproduction check (DRC). Details see section 2.5.5.
No
DRC ok?
YES
Print TG18 QPC pattern. Measure 18 density values.
Enter values in 'EUREF&AFSSAPS GSDF check.xls'. Details see 2.5.6.
No
Deviations < 10%? Perform CFC calibration.
Details see section 2.5.7.
YES Repeat up to 3 times
if required.
Finished
CFC_calibration_5302.cdr
Figure 11


Repair and Service
2.5.1 Checking the Densitometer Calibration
IMPORTANT:
The base for a successful Afssaps / EUREF calibration procedure is a perfectly
calibrated densitometer.
(1) Check the densitometer calibration as described in the densitomter user manual.
Example for X-Rite 341:
• Insert calibrated step tablet (part of delivery).
• Check density of step tablet area marked "CAL": This measurement should be
within +0.02D of the value marked on the step tablet.
(2) Calibrate the densitometer according to the instructions of the manufacturer if
required.
2.5.2 Checking the Densitometer Configuration in the Printer
(1) Select key-operator menu “1 Show settings – 3 Network/DICOM”.

(2) Write down the printer IP address.
(3) Leave the key-operator menu.
(4) Confirm that the printer is in ready state, i.e. no films are in the printer queue.
(5) Disconnect the network cable at the wall side.
(6) Connect the network cable to the service PC. See NOTE below.
(7) Adapt the service PC network address if required. For details refer to chapter 3.2,
Tools, section “Connection of the Service PC to the Printer”.
(8) Enter the printer IP address in the browser address window.
(9) Select “Service Engineer Tools”.
(10) Select “Enter service command session”.
(11) Select menu “1 Show settings – 4 Image Quality”.
(12) Confirm, that the configured densitometer is the same like you are using for the
density measurements.
(13) If it is not the same densitometer, adjust it in menu “2 Change settings – 4 Image
Quality – 1 General”.
NOTE:
Recent PC models autodetect the type of network connection: The standard network
cable can be used for connection between printer and PC.
For PC models which do not autodetect the type of network connection a crossed
network cable (EB+72010270 or commercially available) is required.


Repair and Service
2.5.3 Resetting the Compliance Film Calibration, Internal Densitometer Calibration and
Thermal Print Head Calibration
NOTE:
Resetting the Compliance Film Calibration, Internal Densitometer Calibration and
Thermal Print Head Calibration is required to be sure, that possibly wrong calibrations
from previous service interventions are deleted.
(1) In the service command session select “6 Calibration – 6 Compliance film

calibration – 1 Reset compliance film calibration for upper tray.
(2) Select "2 Reset compliance film calibration for lower tray”.
(3) Leave the “service command session”.
(4) In the service tools page select “Reset calibration data”.
(5) Select “Default CDM” and “Default Profile”. Note, that “Default Profile” button is not
available, if no “Print Head Profile” has been performed in the field yet.
(6) Leave the Reset calibration data” screen.
NOTE:
After this action the printer will show following warnings:
• HC302016 Lower tray needs film calibration
• HC301016 Upper tray needs film calibration
• HC306014 Printer needs CDM calibration
This problem will be solved in the next section.
2.5.4 Performing Internal Densitometer Calibration, Film Calibrations and Thermal

Print Head Calibration
NOTE:
The Internal Densitometer Calibration, Film Calibration and Thermal Print Head
Calibration is described in this chapter (3.6 Adjustments and Calibrations) in detail.
Here only a short description is given. For details refer to:
• 2.2 CDM (Internal Densitometer) Calibration
• 2.1 Film Calibration
• 2.3 Print Head (TH) Calibration


Repair and Service
2.5.4.1 Performing Film Calibrations
NOTE:
The film calibration has to be performed two times for each tray.
(1) Select menu “Service Engineer

Tools - Enter Service Command
session - 6 Calibration - 1 Film
Calibration”.
(2) Select the 1st input tray: The
calibration film as shown in Figure
12 is printed and the measured
Dmax is shown.
INPUT TRAY:
FILM CALIBRATION OK
Dmax = 3.69 (XR310)

536736az.cdr
Measured Dmax
Figure 12
(3) Repeat the film calibration a 2nd

time.
(4) Repeat the film calibration two
times for the 2nd input tray.
2.5.4.2 Performing an internal Densitometer Calibration
(1) Select menu “Service Engineer Tools - Enter Service Command session - 6.
Calibration - 2. Internal densitometer calibration”.
(2) Follow the instructions on the browser pages. Refer to Figure 13.
(3) Enter the measured densities in the browser window.
(4) Select “Accept changes”.


Repair and Service


1. Film Calibration Internal Densitometer Calibration
5. Smart Profile Calibration X-Rite 301
X-Rite 310
Go back
Start Calibration Go back Reset Values
Welcome to this
Service - Calibration Internal Densitometer Calibration

Internal Densitometer Calibration
SUCCEEDED
Lower Tray
Step Previous values Step Previous values
00 0.25 0.24 01 0.25 0.24
02 0.26 0.25 03 0.30 0.31
04 0.54 0.55 05 0.94 0.95
536636ak.cdr 06 1.43 1.45 07 1.96 1.97
08 2.50 2.49 09 3.00 2.99
10 3.18 3.15 11 2.80 2.80
12 2.28 2.28 13 1.71 1.75
14 1.17 1.20 15 0.71 0.72
16 0.37 0.38 17 0.26 0.26
18 0.25 0.24 19 0.25 0.24
Figure 13


Repair and Service
2.5.4.3 Performing a Film Calibration after the internal Densitometer Calibration
NOTE:
The film calibration after the internal densitometer calibration has to be performed one
time for each tray.
(1) Select menu “Service Engineer

Tools - Enter Service Command
session - 6 Calibration - 1 Film
Calibration”.
(2) Select the 1st input tray: The
calibration film as shown in Figure
14 is printed and the measured
Dmax is shown.
INPUT TRAY:
FILM CALIBRATION OK
Dmax = 3.69 (XR310)

536736az.cdr
Measured Dmax
Figure 14
(3) Repeat the film calibration for the

2nd input tray.
2.5.4.4 Performing a Print Head Calibration followed by two Film Calibrations
NOTE:
The print head calibration has to be performed 2 times, if films of width 10” and 14” are
available.
Instructions (1) Clean the thermal head with a cleaning tissue lightly moistened with Isopropyl -
alcohol. The last cleaning action must be carried out in one way.
(2) In the browser pages - menu 'Service Engineer Tools - Enter Service Command
session' select '6. Calibration - 3. Print Head Calibration'.
(3) Follow the instructions on the browser pages. Refer to Figure 15.
(4) Perform two film calibrations for both trays. Refer to section 2.5.4.1.
(5) Repeat the print head calibration, if films of width 10” and 14” are available.


Repair and Service


1. Film Calibration Thermal Printhead Calibration
3. Thermal Print Head Calibration Macbeth TR924
X-Rite 310
Welcome to this
Printhead Calibration Succeeded
Lower Tray Step Step
Select a 14" film for optimum quality 00 2.0 01 2.1
02 2.0 03 2.1
04 2.1 05 2.1
536736ag.cdr
06 2.1 07 2.1
08 2.2 09 2.1
10 2.1 11 2.2
12 2.1 13 2.1
14 2.1 15 2.0
16 2.1 17 2.1
18 2.1 19 2.1
20 2.1 21 2.2
Field 1 Field 21
Figure 15


Repair and Service
2.5.5 Performing a Density Reproduction Check
NOTE:
Performing this step is a verification method for step “Performing a Density
Reproduction CheckCalibration”. If the Density Reproduction Check is successful, the
internal densitometer calibration is OK.
(1) In the browser pages select menu "Service Engineer Tools - Enter Service
Command Session - 3 Print Image - 1 Test Image".
(2) Select the upper or lower tray.
(3) Print out LinCheck.zip and measure the density of the eleven 100 % to 0% fields
with a calibrated MacBeth TR-924, X-Rite 331, 341, X-Rite 301, X-Rite 310 or
Gretag D200-2 densitometer.
(4) To check linearity fill in measured values in the density reproduction check Excel
file. See Figure 16.
Select densitometer: X-rite 341

4 Dmax = 315
Square Measured density Target density Density diff. Check

100% 23 23 0 0
90% 50 52,2 -2,2 0
80% 78 81,4 -3,4 0
70% 105 110,6 -5,6 0 Density Reproduction = OK
60% 135 139,8 -4,8 0 No CDM calibration needed for DT2B film
50% 162 169 -7 0
40% 193 198,2 -5,2 0
30% 221 227,4 -6,4 0
20% 250 256,6 -6,6 0
10% 280 285,8 -5,8 0
0% 308 315 -7 0
When entering the measured density values the decimal point appears in a different spot, e.g. measured value = 0.23, value to enter = 23.0
Density Lower limit Upper limit

0 0 0 Density difference LinCheck image DT2B film in DS5302
30 -5 5
45 -7 7 20
60 -8 8
75 -9 9 15
90 -10 10 X-rite 310
105 -11 11 10 X-rite 331
Density Difference
120 -12 12 X-rite 341

5
135 -12 12 X-rite 301 Lower limit
150 -13 13 0
Mac Beth TR924
Upper limit
165 -13 13 Gretag D200-2
Density difference
180 -14 14 -5
195 -14 14
210 -14 14 -10
225 -15 15
240 -15 15 -15
255 -15 15
-20
270 -16 16
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350
285 -16 16
300 -16 16 Target Density
315 -16 16
Figure 16
(5) After the measured values are filled in, the density reproduction is calculated
automatically.
At the right hand side of the table is shown, whether the Density
Reproduction is ok or not. In case it is not ok you are requested to carry out a
CDM calibration.

Repair and Service
2.5.6 Performing the Afssaps / EUREF Calibration Check
(1) Leave the service command session.

(2) Connect the printer network cable to the network outlet at the wall.
(3) Consult the “connectivity release document” for the modality connection to
DRYSTAR 5302 for the proper modality configuration to print the “TG18-PQC
modified 4” test image.
(4) Print the “TG18-PQC modified 4” test image from the modality.
(5) Measure the 18 density values and enter them in the Afssaps / EUREF
Calibration Check Excel sheet. See Figure 17.
deviation compared
to DICOM (%)
EUREF/AFSSAPS GSDF check for Genrad printers Step 3: Check, that deviation is < 10% for all values. If 1 (or more) value > = 10% go to Step 4
Step 2: Adjust Illumination and refected light used for printing the ima Step 1: Enter the measured values here
e
2500 "Illumination cd/m 2"
Laser: 10 "reflected(ambient) light"
Measured luminance values DICOM 3.14 standard

testpattern Luminance JND deviation compared testpattern Luminance JND dL/L dL/L
TG18-LN12-# p-value L j(L) dL/L to DICOM (%) TG18-LN12 p-value L j(L) dL/L +15% -15% Step # on TG18 imageMeasured OD LuminanceStep # in CFC calibration screen on printer
1 0 11,98582 233,211 1 0 11,99 233,211 1 3,1 11,98582 17
2 240 17,90569 272,089 0,396 2,3 2 240 17,74 271,117 0,387 0,445 0,329 2 2,5 17,905694 16
3 480 25,06399 307,434 0,333 6,5 3 480 25,43 309,023 0,356 0,410 0,303 3 2,22 25,06399 15
4 720 34,43093 343,017 0,315 5,6 4 720 35,61 346,929 0,333 0,383 0,283 4 2,01 34,430931 14
5 960 47,83903 382,004 0,326 3,3 5 960 48,95 384,835 0,316 0,363 0,268 5 1,82 47,839031 13
6 1200 67,27169 424,518 0,338 12,0 6 1200 66,33 422,741 0,301 0,347 0,256 6 1,64 67,271691 12
7 1440 90,89841 463,665 0,299 3,0 7 1440 88,83 460,648 0,290 0,334 0,247 7 1,49 90,898414 11
8 1680 121,6709 502,866 0,290 3,0 8 1680 117,87 498,554 0,281 0,323 0,239 8 1,35 121,6709 10
9 1920 157,2109 538,238 0,255 6,8 9 1920 155,23 536,460 0,274 0,315 0,233 9 1,23 157,21091 9
10 2160 199,6444 571,900 0,238 11,1 10 2160 203,16 574,366 0,268 0,308 0,227 10 1,12 199,64439 8
11 2400 260 609,777 0,263 0,0 11 2400 264,57 612,272 0,263 0,302 0,223 11 1 260 7
12 2640 339,5642 648,671 0,265 2,7 12 2640 343,13 650,179 0,259 0,297 0,220 12 0,88 339,56418 6
13 2880 454,5699 691,754 0,290 13,5 13 2880 443,52 688,085 0,255 0,294 0,217 13 0,75 454,56985 5
14 3120 582,7169 728,841 0,247 2,2 14 3120 571,73 725,991 0,253 0,290 0,215 14 0,64 582,71691 4
15 3360 731,0079 762,970 0,226 9,9 15 3360 735,41 763,897 0,250 0,288 0,213 15 0,54 731,00788 3
16 3600 938,8381 800,887 0,249 0,1 16 3600 944,32 801,803 0,249 0,286 0,211 16 0,43 938,83807 2
17 3840 1206,575 839,125 0,250 0,9 17 3840 1210,97 839,709 0,247 0,285 0,210 17 0,32 1206,5752 1
18 4080 1551,488 877,616 0,250 1,5 18 4080 1551,49 877,616 0,247 0,284 0,210 18 0,21 1551,4875 0
Result contrast response printer lineair relation between p-value and JN

a: 0,157942
b: 233,2106 Step 4: Enter these values in CFC* screen on print
1,000 Only required if deviation >= 10% (see step 2)
* CFC = Compliance Film Calibration
left monitor
dL/L
DICOM 3.14
+/- 10%
0,100
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000
p-values
Figure 17
(6) Check column “Deviation compared to DICOM (%)”: All values have to be < 10%:
- If all values are < 10%, the procedure is finished.
- If one (or more) value(s) are ≥ 10 %, proceed with next section.
(7) Repeat this step for the other film tray.


Repair and Service
2.5.7 Performing a Compliance Film Calibration
NOTE:
Performing this step is only required, if the column “Deviation compared to DICOM
(%)” for one (or more) value(s) is ≥ 10 %. Refer to section 2.5.6.
With this calibration the printer applies a correction on the current film calibration.
(1) Re-connect the printer to the service PC via network cable.

(2) In the service command session select “6 Calibration – 6 Compliance film
calibration. The wizard as shown in Figure 18 will start.
(3) Select “3 Proceed without resetting” 2
*.
(4) Select “proceed” (the described steps you performed already – neglect the
instructions in this screen) 3 .
(5) Select the upper tray 4
.
(6) Select the configured densitometer. Refer to section 2.5.1 5
.
(7) Select “Start calibration”.
(8) Enter Dmin and Dmax measured during step “2.5.6 Performing the Afssaps /
EUREF Calibration Check” 6 .
(9) Leave “Reflected ambient light” and “View Box Illumination” values on default.
(10) Select for number of steps: “18 (EUREF)”
(11) Select “Start calibration”.
(12) Enter the values measured in step “2.5.6 Performing the Afssaps / EUREF
Calibration Check” 7 . See IMPORTANT note below.
(13) Repeat this procedure for the lower tray.
*For steps 2
to 7
refer to Figure 18 page 30.
IMPORTANT:
The browser screen where the 18 data are entered refreshes in a time interval of
1 minute. If you are not finished with entering all data within 1 minute, all entered
values will be reset to default values.
Workaround to avoid entering all data again: Press the “back button” in the browser.


Repair and Service
(14) Leave the “service command session”.

(15) Repeat step “2.5.6 Performing the Afssaps / EUREF Calibration Check.
• If this time all “Deviation compared to DICOM (%)” values are < 10%, the
“Afssaps / EUREF calibration procedure” is finished.
• If one (or more) “Deviation compared to DICOM (%)” value(s) are ≥ 10%,
repeat steps 2.5.6 and 2.5.7 up to three times. See IMPORTANT note
below.
IMPORTANT:
If after three repetitions one or more “Deviation compared to DICOM (%)” values are
still ≥ 10%, start the complete procedure from scratch. Refer to section 2.5.


Repair and Service
1 2 Service - Calibration
Compliance film calibration
1. Film calibration
2. Internal densitometer calibration
3. Thermal print head calibration
1. Reset compliance film calibration for upper tray (8x10)
4. Horizontal alignment 2. Reset compliance film calibration for lower tray (14x17)
5. Smart profile calibration 3. Proceed without resetting
6. Compliance film calibration
Go back Go back
3 Service - Calibration
Actions which must have taken place with the same tray and with the same film pack: 4
1. First film calibration.
2. Profile calibration.
3. Second film calibration.
4. Remove film pack in other tray(s).
5. Printed DICOM-image. 1. Upper tray
6. Measurement of the densities. 2. Lower tray
Proceed
Go back Go back
5 Service - Calibration 6 Service - Calibration

Compliance film calibration Compliance film calibration
Dmin: 0.20
Select densitometer:
Dmax: 3.15
Macbeth TR924
Gretag Reflected Ambient Light 10
X-Rite 301
X-Rite 310 View Box Illumination 2000
Number of steps: 18 (EUREF)

Start calibration Go back Reset values
5366_reg36_02.CDR
7 Service - Calibration
Step Target values Measured values Step Target values Measured values
00 0.16 0.16 01 0.33 0.33
02 0.49 0.49 03 0.66 0.66
04 0.83 0.83 05 0.99 0.99
06 1.16 1.16 07 1.33 1.33
08 1.50 1.50 09 1.66 1.66
10 1.83 1.83 11 2.00 2.00
12 2.16 2.16 13 2.33 2.33
14 2.50 2.50 15 2.66 2.66
16 2.83 2.83 17 3.00 3.00
Figure 18


Repair and Service
3 Checks
Following checks can be performed at the printer:

Density reproduction check During maintenance. Refer to 3.1
chapter 9, Maintenance.
During troubleshooting
procedure
Check for dust stripes / TH During troubleshooting 3.2
cleaning procedure procedure
Resistor check During troubleshooting, to check 3.3
whether print stripes are caused
by the thermal head.
3.1 Density Reproduction Check
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Service PC with Density reproduction check files, available via MedNet, GSO Library
path: Hardcopy => General Hardcopy Info => General Services Info => Application
Info => Density Reproduction Check Excel Sheet (Intranet Link / Extranet Link)
Purpose: With the density reproduction check the difference for a specific film type between
optical density defined in the sensitometric calibration file and the printed optical
density, measured with an external densitometer is checked.
This is a plausibility check for the CDM: In case the measured density values are out
of the specified range, the CDM requires a re-calibration.
This procedure must be carried out with every used film type:
(1) In the browser pages select menu "Service Engineer Tools - Enter Service
Command Session - 3 Print Image - 1 Test Image".
(2) Print out LinCheck.zip and measure the density of the eleven 100 % – 0% fields
with a calibrated MacBeth TR-924, X-Rite 331, 341, X-Rite 301, X-Rite 310 or
Gretag D200-2 densitometer.
(3) To check linearity fill in measured values in the the density reproduction check
Excel file. See Figure 19.


Repair and Service

4 Dmax = 315

100% 23 23 0 0
90% 50 52,2 -2,2 0
80% 78 81,4 -3,4 0
70% 105 110,6 -5,6 0 Density Reproduction = OK
60% 135 139,8 -4,8 0 No CDM calibration needed for DT2B film
50% 162 169 -7 0
40% 193 198,2 -5,2 0
30% 221 227,4 -6,4 0
20% 250 256,6 -6,6 0
10% 280 285,8 -5,8 0
0% 308 315 -7 0
When entering the measured density values the decimal point appears in a different spot, e.g. measured value = 0.23, value to enter = 23.0

0 0 0 Density difference LinCheck image DT2B film in DS5302
30 -5 5
45 -7 7 20
60 -8 8
75 -9 9 15
90 -10 10 X-rite 310
105 -11 11 10 X-rite 331
Density Difference
120 -12 12 X-rite 341

5
135 -12 12 X-rite 301 Lower limit
150 -13 13 Mac Beth TR924
0 Upper limit
165 -13 13 Gretag D200-2
Density difference
180 -14 14 -5
195 -14 14
210 -14 14 -10
225 -15 15
240 -15 15 -15
255 -15 15
-20
270 -16 16
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350
285 -16 16
315 -16 16
Figure 19
(4) After the measured values are filled in, the density reproduction is calculated
automatically.
(5) At the right hand side of the table is shown, whether the Density Reproduction is
ok or not. In case it is not ok you are requested to carry out a CDM calibration.
3.2 Check for Dust Stripes / TPH Cleaning Procedure
To be done • Whenever dust stripes seem to be present.

• During troubleshooting procedure
(1) Check the films for dust stripes as described in the flowchart of
Figure 20.


Repair and Service
TH cleaning
Dry TH cleaning
procedure
procedure
Print STI2 and *

medicalimage test image.
Dismount TH.
Vertical stripes No Okay. No Clean TH with

replacement Isopropyl alcohol
visible ? required (”wet” cleaning).
Yes or in doubt
Use ink eraser
Clean TH with for cleaning.
Isopropyl alcohol Refer to figure next page.
(”wet” cleaning).
Clean TH with
Print STI2 test image.
* Isopropyl alcohol
Additional Mount TH.

Yes
vertical stripes
visible ?
Clean TH with
No Isopropyl alcohol
Okay. No
Previous Stripes No
replacement
still visible ? required.
Print STI2 test image.
*
Yes
Perform Resistor Check. **

New vertical Yes
stripes visible ?
No
Resistor Check okay ? Replace TH.
No
Yes Vertical No Okay. No

Perform Dry TH stripes visible ? replacement
Cleaning Procedure. required.
Yes
* Service Engineer Tools - Enter Service Command Session - Perform TH ***

3 Print Testimage – 1 Test image - STI2.ZIP profile calibration.
** Browser service menu- 7 Test & Diagnose –
6 Diagnose mechanics – 5 Print Head Unit – 3 Resistor Check
*** Service Engineer Tools - Enter Service Command session Stripes visible in No Okay. No
select '6. Calibration - 3. Print Head Calibration medical_image test replacement
image ? required.
IMPORTANT: Yes
Observe TH cleaning rules
described next page. Replace TH.
536736mm.cdr
Figure 20


Repair and Service
3.2.1 Basic Rules for the TH Cleaning Procedure
• The correct cleaning material:

o Wet cleaning:
Use a lint free cloth lightly moistened with isopropyl – alcohol or a
cleaning issue.
For the isopropyl – alcohol: Less water in the alcohol is better.
Water can damage the thermal head. We recommend using a 90%
isopropyl – alcohol.
o Dry cleaning: Use the blue side of an ink eraser.
• The cleaning actions:
o Wet cleaning: The last cleaning action must be carried out in one way!
o Dry cleaning:
Dismount the thermal head before dry cleaning.
Make a linear cleaning movement, parallel to the resistor line.
Refer to Figure 21.
• General: Do not push on the IC cover of the thermal head during cleaning.
TH resistor line
TH cross section
TH top view
Blue side
Ink eraser
e.g. Pelican
type BR40 536410cd.cdr
linear cleaning movement

parallel to TH resistor line
Figure 21: Usage of ink eraser for TH cleaning
IMPORTANT:
Instruct the customer, not to fill the input tray with dropped films or films coming from
jam clearances:
• These re-inserted films can be contaminated with dust and fingerprints which
can result in image artifacts or a defective thermal head.
• If the film is inserted the wrong way, the thermal head gets heavily
contaminated, what makes a service intervention necessary.


Repair and Service
3.3 Resistor Check
To be done Whenever film stripes in the film run direction seem to be caused by a defective
Thermal Print Head.
REQUIRED TOOLS:
Magnifying glass 8x, order number*: CM+9 9579 9904 0
* The last digit in the spare part number indicates the spare part revision at release of
this document. When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.
REQUIRED TIME:
15 minutes
Purpose With the resistor check it is possible to check if line artifacts are caused by an
electrical problem or by dirt on the thermal head. If the resistor check fails it’s not
necessary to perform a dry cleaning: The Print Head can be replaced right away.
The resistor check is performed in 2 (or more) steps:
1) A rough resistor measurement of all the resistor values. If large resistor drifts
show up, a message will show up to replace the Print Head.
2) A fine resistor measurement in one of 44 predefined areas of the image (see
Figure 22): The Service Engineer can enter this area at the printer, where he
suspects a defective resistor due to a line in print direction. If certain resistor
values in this specified region are out of range, a message will show up to
replace the Print Head.
3) This fine resistor measurement can be repeated for each suspected area.
How (1) Go to the:

• Browser service menu: 7 Service Actions - 6 Resistor Check or
• Local keypad key-operator menu: 7 Service Actions - 5 Resistor Check
(2) Follow the instructions on the screen.
Figure 22: Print Head resistor check test film


Chapter 3.7
Imaging Services
Software Menus, Settings
DRYSTAR 5302
5366/100
This document lists the menus for service of the printer.

It can be used as a reference work to see which setting is made in which screen.

1.1 06-2009 • Adapted key-operator menu overview to available menus
of software release 2.0:
o Added menu "Installation – Install site data".
o Added menus "Service Actions – Resistor Check
and Print Infocounters.
• Changed page layout from DIN A3 to DIN A4.
Document Title
n.a. n.a.

eq_03-7_menus-setting_e_template_v07
Repair and Service
DD+DIS150.05E Software Menus, Settings
► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
NOTE:


06-2009 5366/100 Agfa Company Confidential
Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 PRINTER CONTROLS .............................................................................................................4

1.1 Controls at the local Keypad .....................................................................................................5
2 KEY-OPERATOR MENU VIA LOCAL KEYPAD ......................................................................6

3 KEY-OPERATOR BROWSER PAGES ....................................................................................7
4 SERVICE BROWSER PAGES ...............................................................................................11


Repair and Service
1 Printer Controls
This section describes the printer controls which are available to operate the printer.
1 2
6
1 Power/Reset button
2 Display
3 Keyboard - details see next page
4 Status indicator LED
5 Film input tray
6 Film output tray
5367_100_3702.cdr
Page 1
The status indicator LED
At the right side of the display, a LE D indicates the status of the Drystar Axys.
Receive Printing
Color Light Status Action
jobs? OK?
Constant Ready (standby) Yes Yes Proceed.
Startup sequence No No
Receiving jobs Yes Yes
Calculating Yes Yes Wait.
Green
Blinking Printing Yes Yes
Calibrating Yes No
Installation No No
Proceed with
Key-operator Yes/No Yes/No
the activity.
Service mode No No
Refer to
Input tray empty Yes Yes/No User / Reference
Manual
Refer to
Blinking Film jam Yes No User / Reference
Manual
Red
Refer to
Warning Yes Yes User / Reference
Manual
Refer to
Constant Error status No No Section
Troubleshooting


Repair and Service
1.1 Controls at the local Keypad
This section describes the printer controls at the local keypad.
The control buttons
Power / Reset To power on or off the printer.

button To reset the printer.
5367_100_3702.cdr
Page 3
Keypad keys:
To access the advanced functions of the Key-

Key-
operator mode. Refer to next page.
operator key
To quit the current function or exit a menu without

Escape key
saving modifications.
(In Key-operator mode)

Confirm key To select a menu;
To accept an entry in a menu.
To move the cursor to the previous entry field.
To scroll upwards.
Up key
To increment the number in a(n) (alpha)numerical
entry field.
To move the cursor to the next entry field.
To scroll downwards.
Down key
To decrement the number in a(n)
(alpha)numerical entry field.
To scroll backwards through multiple choices
within a field.
Left key To move the entry position in a(n)
(alpha)numerical entry field from right to left.
To toggle between values in a field.
To scroll forwards through multiple choices within
a field.
Right key To move the entry position in a(n)
(alpha)numerical entry field from left to right.
To toggle between values in a field.
" All keys (except the Key-operator key) have a LED that is lit when the key
is valid in a certain condition.
" Press and hold down an arrow key to scroll quickly through a list
or a menu.


Repair and Service
2 Key-Operator Menu via local Keypad
Figure 1 shows a tree structure of the key-operator menu at the local keypad.
=
Based on SW Rel. 2.0
General
Show settings General
Other...
Upper input tray
Lower input tray
Time and date
Network(DICOM)
Language
Image quality
Beep on empty tray
Logical printers
Installed datasets
Change settings General

Upper Input tray Film view
Lower Input tray

Network(DICOM)
Image quality
Film view
Print image Test image

From CF-Card
Printer AE-title
Save configuration General Hostname
NETWORK only Domain name

Printer IP-address
Netmask
Restore configuration General
Router IP-address
NETWORK only
Remove modality
Add modality
Calibration Film calibration

Clean therm. head
General setting
Per modality setting
Service actions Error messages

SMPTE
Warning messages
Repair history
Maintenance Show open and update
Resistor Check Show closed items
Quality Control 5366_100_3702.cdr
Print infocounters Page 3
Installation From CF-Card

Printer installation
Install Site Data
Figure 1: Tree structure of the key-operator menu at the local keypad


Repair and Service
3 Key-Operator Browser Pages
This section displays the key-operator browser pages.
Welcome to this
DryStar 5302 printer Prompt
Enter Password
Operator tools drystar
Key-operator tools ******
Service engineer tools OK Cancel
Specialist tools
Security Tools
HELP
Welcome to this
KEY OPERATOR TOOLS Welcome to this

HOME Remote sessions DryStar 5302 printer
Release remote command session Please wait while the printer is initializing
for Remote Session...
Welcome to this
DryStar 5302 printer 1
2
Key-Operator - Main
1. Show settings 3
2. Change settings
3. Print image 4
4. Save configuration 5 See page 8.
5. Restore config.
6. Calibration 6
7. Service actions
8. Quality Control 7
9. Installation
8
leave remote session 9
Figure 2: Overview of key-operator tools


Repair and Service
1 Welcome to this 2 Welcome to this

Key-Operator - Show settings Key-Operator - Change settings

1. General
2.1
1. General
2. Input tray 2. Input tray
3. Network (DICOM) 2.2 See page 9.
3. Network (DICOM)
4. Image quality 4. Image quality
5. Logical Printers 2.3
6. Installed datasets
Go back
2.4
Go back

Key-Operator - Print Image Key-Operator - Save configuration

1. Test Image 3.1 1. To Printer Flash Card
2. From Printer Flash Card See 2. To this Computer
3. From Remote Computer page 10.
Go back
Go back

Key-Operator - Restore configuration Key-Operator - Calibration

1. From CF-Card 1. Film Calibration
2. From Remote Computer 2. Therm. Head clean
3. Frm dd/mm/yy hh:mm
Go back
Go back

Key-Operator - Service actions Key-Operator - Quality Control

1. Error Messages
2. Warning Messages
1. Quality Control 8.1 See page 10.
3. Repair history
4. Maintenance 7.1 Go back
5. Resistor Check
6. Print infocounters
See
7. Horizontal alignment page 10.
Go back
9 Welcome to this
Key-Operator - Installation
1. New Software Installation 9.1 See page 10.
2. Printer Installation Wizard
Go back
Figure 3: Key-operator tools – 1st level


Repair and Service
2.1 Welcome to this 2.2 Welcome to this

Key-Operator - Change general settings Key-Operator - Change input tray settings

Date: 19 Oct. 2004 Upper input tray
Time: 08 30 00
Film view Normal
Language English Back
Chinese Simpl. Tag film format 14x17"
Japanese
Tag film type DT2B
Keypad backlight (0 ... 100) 50 Lower input tray
* Site name Film view Normal
* Site address Back
* City Tag film format 14x17"
* Telephone Tag film type DT2B
Remote connection
* Department Accept changes Discard changes Reset Values
* Contact person
E-mail address
Comments
2.4 Welcome to this
Accept changes Discard changes Reset Values DryStar 5302 printer

2.3 Welcome to this see
1. General
2.4.1 page 10
2. Modality XYZ
Key-Operator - Change network settings (dicom)
Go back
1. Network settings
2. Remove modality
3. Add modality
Welcome to this
Go back
Welcome to this Daily used name CT2

DryStar 5302 printer Modality AE-title CT2_ARC
Linear
Look Up Table: Kanamori
Key-Operator - Change network settings (dicom)
Kanamorilike
Printer AE-title DS5302
ds5302 Interpolation:
Hostname Replication
Domain name Linear
Printer IP-Address 12.10.68.41 CubicHi-res
Netmask 255.0.0.0 CubicBell
Router IP-address
Maximum density: 280
Accept changes Discard changes Reset Values 285
290
295
Figure 4: Key-operator tools – 2nd level (Part 1)


Repair and Service
Welcome to this 3.1

2.4.1 DryStar 5302 printer
Welcome to this
Key-Operator - Change Image quality settings Key-Operator - Print image
Default film calibration off 1. Ktbwd2n.zip

on 2. smpte_kan.zip
3. smpte_l300.zip
4. smpte_lin.zip
Default Densitometer Macbeth TR924 5. tpa.zip
Gretag
X-Rite 301 Go back
X-Rite 310

8.1 Welcome to this
Welcome to this
DryStar 5302 printer Key-Operator - Service actions
Data of last QC measuring
Date: 20-NOV-2004
Time: 09:01
Select frequency
Initials:
Max D: 3.1
Every 5 packs DD: 0.2
Mid Density: 1.1
Base + Fog: 0.2
New reference: yes
no
9.1 Welcome to this
Comment:
Accept changes Go Back New QC measuring
Key-Operator - Installation Reset Values
Before install.
please make backup
1. OK, make backup 7.1 Welcome to this

2. SKIP backup DryStar 5302 printer
Go back
Key-Operator - Service actions
1. Maintenance settings
2. Pending maintenance actions
3. Closed maintenance actions
Welcome to this
Go back
Key-Operator - Installation
Choose Dataset Browse .....

Welcome to this
Proceed Go Back Reset Values DryStar 5302 printer
Key-Operator - Service actions

MAINTENANCE SETTINGS
Reset Item Cycles to go Factory settings
Thermal head cleaning required 4841 5000
Replace thermal head anti dust filter 24841 25000
Replace thermal head (end of life) 62500 62500
Film calibration upper tray required 39841 40000
Film calibration lower tray required 500 5000
Service maintenance required 2333 5000
Go back
Figure 5: Key-operator tools – 2nd level (Part 2)


Repair and Service
4 Service Browser Pages
This section displays the service browser pages.
Welcome to this
Operator tools Prompt
Enter Password
Key-operator tools
mega
******
Specialist tools
OK Cancel
Security Tools
HELP
Welcome to this
S1
SERVICE TOOLS S2
HOME General information S3 See page 12.
List of errors S4
DICOM, LPD and HIPAA report S5
QA Report Page
Software versions S6
Remote sessions See page 7.
Show printer status
See page 20.
Enter service command session S7 See page 12.
Reboot Drystar S8
Reset Calibration Data See page 13.
Connectivity tools S9
Scaling Setup
S10
LPD Profile Editor S11 See page 16.
Printqueue editor S12 See page 17.
Controller logging
Module repair S13
See page 18.
Modules
S14
S15 See page 19.
Figure 6: Overview of service tool browser pages


Repair and Service
S1 S13 S2
LIST OF ERRORS INFO COUNTER drystar 5302
MODULE : devilmodule 1. Site and system info:

Elabel : Yes ------------------------
Date: 18-Nov-2007
HC207000 : devilmodule.dsh.connected Time: 12:42:15
*TypeDefect
*Context207000 1.1 Device info:
*ActionSeeManual ----------------
*Reason1Connector P9 not connected on Devil Product name: drystar 5302
Cure1Connect P9 on Devil Type-No: 5175
*Reason2Devil defect Subtype-No:
Cure2Replace Serial-No: 1234
PartMOD08 Manufacture date: 01-Aug-2007 16:45:00
Installation date: 31-Nov-2007 13:10:30
HC207001 : devilmodule.psu.connected
*TypeDefect 1.2 Site info:
*Context207001 --------------
*ActionSeeManual City: Padova
*Reason1Connector P15 not connected on Devil Site name: Connectathon
Cure1Connect P15 on Devil Site address: Avenida 12
*Reason2Devil defect Department name: X-Ray
Cure2Replace Phone: 1234321
PartMOD08 Modem:
Comment:
1.3 Hardware info:

------------------
Security Setup
S3 CPU: 0 - Devil 1.3 rev=? **
RAM: 512 Mbyte
HTTP Yes
HTTPS No
..............
______________ Power supply state
S4
Network info
DC 5 Volts 4.96875 V
IP-address 10.233.68.108
DC 3 Volts 3.2714844 V
Hostname DI53IE2
DC +12 Volts 12.007315 V
Netmask 255.255.248.0
DC -12 Volts -12.014129 V
...................................
DC 24 Volts 24.173584 V
Cable info : 100 Mbit Half-Duplex
DC TH Volts 0 V
...........................................
DC TH Amps 0.0 A
link partner : 100HD 10HD autonegotiation
______________ Error state
Cable info : 100 Mbit Half-Duplex
Current warnings
Current errors
Output Queue
______________ Temperatures
Retry timeout0
Heatsink 52.70407 C
.......................................
Keypad-display 41.5 C
Drum-region 36.5 C
Dicom input
CPU-region 52 C
........................................
Current Max density 310.45212 points
______________ Density meter
LPD Profiles
Dark current Idrange 0: 78
.............................................
range 1: 78
range 2: 77
Site info
Light current I09561, lamp at 75 %
City
______________ Display
Site Name
Contrast-setting 68
Site address
Backlight-setting 50
Country code
______________ Status
Department name
Blemish heating enabled
Phone
CDM device enabled
Modem
Online diagnosis enabled
Comment
Security disabled
Installation Date
______________ Storage
Removable storage not present
InfoCounters
Removable storage size -
Last error codes ESC
Removable storage free -
......................................
Fixed (c:) storage size 122 MB (128045056 bytes)
Fixed (c:) storage free 0 bytes
Errors/Warnings
Name Total Relative Date of last
ESC1F Local SSL trusted certificate wi...4848Apr-27-2004 15:52:24
..............................................
Welcome to this S6
FPGAVersion3.0.1 S5
OSVersion
### /portex info
Versions : Portex=2004.05 Current Incidents:
Patch vers: 0
Build date: 13-oct-2004 16:12 Current Warnings:
Boot date : 17-NOV-2004 17:06:26
Net ID : 10.233.65.97 dry900 Current Defects:
Ethernet : 08:00:66:80:44:09
DriverVersionVersion: HW3.12 ; build timestamp : time = 14:36:45,21

ControllerVersion P4D3.03.15
DrystarVersion R1.9 C1
releaseRemoteSession
S7
BoardVersion VILIS2.2
M16Version 45
Figure 7: Service tool details (part 1)


Repair and Service
HOME !CalibrationRestore
class com.agfa.med.odin.printerserver.CalibrationRestore
S8
Default uppertray Return to the default filmcalibration values.
Current calibration will be copied to a backup.
Default lowertray Return to the default filmcalibration values.
Current calibration will be copied to a backup.
Default Profile Return to the default TPH profile calibration values.
Current values will be copied to a backup.
Default CDM Return to the default CDM calibration values.
Default DT2 B Return to the default MDM-calibration values.
Default DT2 M Return to the default MDM-calibration values.
Default uppertray Default lowertray Default Profile Default CDM Default DT2 B Default DT2 M
HOME HELP Controller Setup
Reduction icon on image: yes S9

Kernel: when no image scaling is needed for CubicHighRes:
Automatically switch to CubicBell: yes
Use CubicBell smooth factor: 0.35 ( >= 0.1 and <= 10 )
HOME HELP DICOM Input Setup
Dicom Print SCP Servers S10

Setup Dicom Print SCP Servers S10.1 see page 14
Dicom Host Profiles
A 'Host Profile' defines the print parameters for a specific host (modality).
Available Host Profiles:
New S10.3 see page 15
View/Edit
Remove
Clone
Import/Export
At run-time, profile selection is done based on the incoming 'Calling AE title'
and the receiving SCP server.
If no profile is found, the default (site) profile will be used.
Edit the default (site) profile Validate profiles Auto Dicom Configuration
Input status
S10.2 see page 14
idle
Refresh
Update profile database
Select profile database file to upload: Browse ...

Upload new DB


Repair and Service
HOME HELP DICOM Print SCP Setup
Setup one or more Dicom SCP servers on this device: S10.1

One 'Dicom Print SCP server' is capable of handling multiple Dicom
print associations
Dicom Print SCP
Internal Name: DEFAULT_SCP

Listen at Port: 104
Max. allowed associations: 10
Secure channel (SSL):
Comments:
OK Create new Dicom Print SCP Cancel Changes require reboot
HELP Site Defaults

These are the default print settings for all Dicom input for which no special 'Host Profile' is made.
S10.2
Only some parameters can be edited.
bottom
Number of Copies: 1
Print Priority: LOW
Polarity: normal
Trim: NO
Film Size ID:
Medium Type:
Print even if Film Size ID/Medium type not supported: YES
Print even if Application type not supported: NO
Initial allocated memory size per printjob (MBytes): 100
Kernel: Interpolation Type cubicHighRes,smoothFactor: -0.7
Magnification: Magn: max
Decimate/Crop behaviour: disabled
Pixel Size: ratio: 1.0 / 1.0
Kanamori Like value: 0
Custom value:
Illumination (cd/m2): 2000
Reflected Ambient Light (cd/m2): 10
Border Density (OD x100): BLACK
Empty Image Density (OD x100): BLACK
Maximum Density (OD x100): 320
Header Annotation
c
d
fe
g Contents: none Edit Custom None
Font: Edit Custom Courier 12
Footer Annotation
c
d
fe
g Contents: none Edit Custom None
Font: Edit Custom Courier 12
Window (%):
Level (%):
N-EVENTs enabled: OFF
Mammo: NO
Mammo CWR Rotation: NO
Association Timeout (s): 0

Image Timeout (s): 0
Allow EXPLICIT VR LITTLE ENDIAN: true
Allow EXPLICIT VR BIG ENDIAN: true
Resolution: 508
Supported SOP classes: All enabled
Early processing allowed: YES
LR like: off
Ok Cancel


Repair and Service
HELP Host Profile: Name XYZ

These are the default settings for all print jobs coming from the host
(modality) specified under 'Calling AE title'. S10.3
Nick Name: Name XYZ
Use this profile only for incoming 'Calling AE title': Host AE
Number of Copies:
Print Priority: low
Polarity: normal
Trim: no
Film Size ID:
Medium Type:
Print even if Application type not supported: no
Kernel: site Edit Custom Interpolation Type cubicHighRes,
Magnification: Edit Magn: max smoothFactor: -0.7
Decimate/Crop behaviour : disabled
Pixel Size: Edit ratio: 1.0 / 1.0
Kanamori Like value:
Custom value:
Header Annotation:
Footer Annotation:
Window (%):
Level (%):
Nevent enabled: off
Mammo modality: site
Mammo CWR Rotation: NO site
Image Timeout (s):
Resolution: 508
LR like: off


Repair and Service
HOME HELP LPD Setup
LPD Servers S11

LPD Server Setup S11.1
New
View/Edit S11.2
Remove
Clone
Layout Preview
Validate All Profiles
HOME HELP LPD Server Setup
LPD Server S11.1

Port: 515 Clear it to remove the LPD Server
Max allowed associations: 10
Activate at startup:
Secure channel:
Comments:
OK Create new LPD Server Cancel Changes require reboot
HELP LPD Profile: Name XYZ
These settings can be overruled by the LPD protocol.

You can prevent this by checking the checkboxes at the front.
S11.2
Profile Name: Name XYZ

Medium Size: _14x17
Medium Type: bluebased
Layout: Optimal Row
Number of copies:
Region Of Interest: Edit
Pixel Size: ratio: Edit
Polarity: normal
Input LUT: Edit
Usertaste Gray: Edit
Usertaste Color: Edit
Magnification: Edit
Kernel: Edit
Trim: Edit
Background Color: Grayscale Edit
Empty Color: Gray: Grayscale Edit
PostScript Requested page size: Width: Height:
PostScript policy: pagesizeDependent
Resolution: 320
Initial allocated memory size per printjob (MBytes):
Annotation 1: Edit
Annotation 2: Edit
OK Cancel Factory Defaults

Customized items are show in red.


Repair and Service
HOME HELP Network Configuration S12

Basic IP Routing DNS Ethernet Reboot Device S12.3
Basic IP settings
IP address S12.2
Host name
Domain S12.1
Subnetmask
Obtain IP settings automatically (RARP/BOOTP/DHCP) no

HOME HELP Network Configuration
Basic IP Routing DNS Ethernet Reboot Device
Routing S12.1
Default gateway
More Routes
Reach Device via gateway:
Test Routes
Ping a device Ping
DNS servers S12.2

A DNS server translates a given hostname into an IP address.
Remove
Add Changes require reboot
Test DNS
Enter a hostname: Resolve

S12.3
Ethernet
Counters:
Current line properties: 100 Mbit Full-Duplex Total Rx Packets = 2056422
Link partner (other side): : 100FD 100HD 10FD 10HD autonegotiation Total Rx ERROR Packets = 0
Ethernet (MAC) address: 08:00:66:80:44:09 Total Tx Packets = 196164
Setup: Type: UTP MII address: Defer Xmission Count =0
Carrier Lost Count =0
Auto negotiation, capabilities: Out Of Window Collissions = 0
10 MBit Half Duplex Collisions Count =0
10 MBit Full Duplex Excess Collisions Count = 0
100 MBit Half Duplex Transmit FIFO underrun = 0
Receive FIFO overrun =0
100 MBit Full Duplex
Fixed (no negotiation)
10 Mbit HALF DUPLEX
Warning: changes become active immediately !!!

Save settings to file (only enable this after a test)
OK Factory Defaults Clear Counters


Repair and Service
HOME HELP Output Queue

Output Queue contents:
S13
Filter on all
Sort on Creation date
Delete Delete All Set Emergency

Auto-Refresh
Input state:
HOME HELP Logging
Current Log File

Show Log file
S14
Set Log Levels
TaskLog Level
NipOpImage ERROR NipOpImage implements following operations: scaling/filtering, lookup and rotation.
DCMPrintToPrintJob ERROR DCMPrintToPrintJob converts Dicom Printjob into printqueue job
PrintJobHandler ERROR PrintJobHandler is listener for jobavailable events and converts the available jobs in a bitmap for
ColorConvertOpImage ERROR ColorConvertOpImage implements the conversion from one ColorSpace to another
PAGE ERROR 'Page' calculates the position of imageboxes in a page
DCMIBCodec ERROR
DrawableRI ERROR
ComposeOpImage ERROR ComposeOpImage implements the operation to Compose multiple source images into one image
CropOpImage ERROR CropOpImage creates a new image out of the region of interest of the source image.
TiledImage ERROR TiledImage transfers images to/from disk
CMM ERROR CMM (Color Management Module) converts image data from one colorspace to another and
LPD ERROR Line Printer Daemon : A group of hosts requests services from a LPD running on a host. The
BorderOpImage ERROR BorderOpImage implements the border operation (e.g. trim)
PrintQueueEditor ERROR This is the UI component of the printqueue (browser & keypad)
JobQueue ERROR Non Persistent Queue. (Version : 2.03)
JobProvider ERROR JobProvider is a printqueue consumer that publishes available jobs to the subscribers.
NipOpImage2 ERROR implements following operations: scaling/filtering, lookup and rotation.
AuthenticationManager ERROR Secure Access Management: Authentication Manager for accessing URLs and keypad menus
QueueFactory ERROR Starts the requested (or available) queue. (Version : 2.01)
VolatileTiledImage ERROR
PrintQueue_Management ERROR Version 1.03 : Monitors the printqueue. Arrange communication between printqueue and several
XML ERROR
TranslateOpImage ERROR
PFE ERROR The Printer Front End receives printjobs from a network (DICOM LPD) or any proprietary interface
PSCodec ERROR PSCodec (de)codes postscript/pdf files
FontRI ERROR
MfxPrinterInfoHandler ERROR Mfx is an Agfa communication protocol to interchange printer status messages
Raster ERROR
OverlayOpImage ERROR OverlayOpImage implements the operation to put an overlay above the source image.
CFG ERROR CFG handles configuration issues such as profiles, browser GUI, ...
DCMPrintSCP-0 ERROR Dicom Print Service Class Provider on port 104 for DS5300 application.Handles incoming Dicom
FontCache ERROR
Configure the Logger

NO
Log to Console
Log to File NO
Max number of log directories to keep
Max number of log pages (files) per directory
Timestamp in date format YES
Add timestamp to console loggings NO
Logging to Plog logbox at level
Submit Factory Defaults


Repair and Service
NOTE:
The red marked areas in Figure 14 represent the different modules listed in the left
navigation pane.


Repair and Service
Welcome to this
Operator tools Prompt
Key-operator tools Enter Password

mega
******
Specialist tools
OK Cancel
Security Tools
HELP
Welcome to this
Welcome to this
DryStar 5302 printer 1
SERVICE TOOLS See
2 page 20.
Service - Main
List of errors 1. Show settings 3
Printer Infocounters report 2. Change settings
DICOM, LPD and HIPAA report 3. Print image 4
QA Report Page 4. Save configuration
Software versions
5 See
5. Restore config.
Remote sessions 6. Calibration 6 page 21.
Show printer status 7. Service actions
Enter key-operator command session 8. Quality Control 7
Enter service command session 9. Installation
Release remote command session 8
Reboot Drystar See
leave remote session 9
Reset Calibration Data page 23.
Connectivity tools
Scaling Setup
LPD Profile Editor
Printqueue editor
Controller logging
Module repair
Modules
1 Welcome to this
2 Welcome to this
Service - Show settings Service - Change settings

1. General
2.1
1. General
2. Input tray 2. Input tray
3. Network (DICOM) 2.2
3. Network (DICOM) See page 23.
4. Image quality 4. Image quality
5. Logical Printers 2.3
6. Installed datasets
Go back
2.4
Go back
3 Welcome to this Welcome to this

Service - Print Image Service - Print image

1. Test Image 1. LinCheck.zip
2. From CF Card 2 .STI1.zip
3. From Remote Computer 3. STI2.zip
4. medicalimage.zip
Go back Go back
Figure 15: Service command session (part 1)


Repair and Service

Service - Save configuration Service - Restore configuration

1. General
2. Network only 1. General
2. Network only
Go back
Go back

Service - Calibration Service - Service actions

1. Film Calibration 1. Error Messages
2. Internal Densitometer Calibration 2. Warning Messages
3. Thermal Print Head Calibration 3. Repair History
4. Smart Profile Calibration 4. Maintenance
5. Compliance Film Calibration 5. Logging
6. Resistor Check
7. Horizontal Alignment
Go back
Go back
8 Welcome to this
Service - Quality Control

1. Start Quality Control procedure
2. Edit additional data for last QC
Go back
Welcome to this
Service - Service actions

Maintenance Action Cycles Factory Current Active Reset Item
to go settings settings
Y Y
Thermal head cleaning required 5000 5000 5000 N N
Y Y
Replace thermal head anti dust filter 25000 25000 25000 N N
62500 Y Y
Replace thermal head (end of life) 62500 62500 N N
4898 5000 5000 Y Y

Film calibration upper tray required N N
5000 5000 5000 Y Y
Film calibration lower tray required N N
5000 5000 5000 Y Y
Service maintenance required N N
Accept Changes Discard Changes Reset Values


Repair and Service
Welcome to this
2.1 2.3 Welcome to this
Service - Change general settings Service - Change network settings (dicom)

Date: 19 Oct. 2004
Time: 08 30 00 1. Network settings
2. Remove modality
Language English 3. Add modality
Chinese Simpl.
Japanese
Go back
Keypad backlight (0 ... 100) 50 Welcome to this
* Site name
* Site address
* City Service - Change network settings (dicom)
* Country
* Country code (tel) Printer AE-title DS5302
* Telephone Hostname ds5300
Remote Connection Domain name
* Department Printer IP-Address 12.10.68.41
* Contact person Netmask 255.0.0.0
E-mail address Router IP-address
Comments
Accept changes Discard changes Reset Values Accept changes Discard changes Reset Values
Welcome to this 2.2 2.4 Welcome to this

Key-Operator - Change input tray settings Service - Change Image quality settings
If RF-tag is missing or malfunctioning

printing with Dmax = 2.00 1. General
printing not possible 2. Modality XYZ
Upper input tray Go back
Film view Normal

Back
Welcome to this
Tag film type DT2B DryStar 5302 printer
Lower input tray

Service - Change Image quality settings
Film view Normal
Back Default film calibration off
Tag film format 14x17" on
Tag film type DT2B

Gretag
Accept changes Discard changes Reset Values X-Rite 301
X-Rite 310
Default A-sharp-TMML off
Welcome to this
DryStar 5302 printer on
Service - Change Image quality settings
Select frequency
Every 5 packs


Repair and Service
9 Welcome to this 9.1 Welcome to this

Service - Installation Service - Installation

Before install.
1. New Software Installation please make backup
2. Printer Installation Wizard
3. Install Site Data 1. OK, make backup
2. SKIP backup
Go back Go back
Welcome to this
Service - Installation
Choose Dataset Browse .....
Proceed Go Back Reset Values


Chapter 3.8
Imaging Services
Software Releases and Patches
DRYSTAR 5302
Type 5366/100
This document lists all customer released software versions with their features,
limitations and known problems.

1.2 03-2011 Added software version 2.1.0_C2 and 2.1.0_C3.
See sections 11 and 12.
Document Title
DD+DIS037.11E DRYSTAR 5302 SB20, Software 2.1.0_C3 available to solve
Warning Message “RF Tag Problem“: Update of affected
Printers required

eq_03-8_release-patch_e_template_v07
Repair and Service
DD+DIS150.05E Software Releases and Patches
► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
(see MedNet GSO => General Info => Agfa HealthCare => Publications =>
the equipment.
the product.
NOTE:


Repair and Service
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 SOFTWARE RELEASE 1.8.0_C1 ............................................................................................5

1.1 Supported Features ..................................................................................................................5
1.2 Limitations .................................................................................................................................5
1.3 Known Problems.......................................................................................................................6

2.1 Solved Software Bug ................................................................................................................6
2.2 New Feature..............................................................................................................................7

3.1 Solved Software Bugs...............................................................................................................8

4.1 New Features............................................................................................................................9
5 SOFTWARE RELEASE 1.9.0_C3 ..........................................................................................10

5.1 Solved Software Bug ..............................................................................................................10

6.1 Solved Software Bugs.............................................................................................................12


8.2 New Feature............................................................................................................................16

9.1 New Features..........................................................................................................................17
9.2 Solved Bug in Software 2.0.0_C2 ...........................................................................................18
9.3 Known Software Issue ............................................................................................................19

10.1 New Feature of Software 2.0.0_C3 ........................................................................................20


Repair and Service



Repair and Service
1 Software Release 1.8.0_C1
Type of new Software 1st customer release
Release Date 09/2005
Printer Serial Numbers  SN1001
Availability MedNet, GSO Library
Prerequisites None
NOTE:
On MedNet, GSO Library always the latest available software release can be
downloaded.
1.1 Supported Features
All features as specified:

 Printing diagnostic data according to the DICOM standard with a
resolution of 320 dpi
 Printing on Drystar DT2B and DT2C films
 Supported film sizes:
14x17", 14x14", 14x11", 10x12", 8x10"
 Support of the new thermal model TMML, commercial name "A#sharp"
1.2 Limitations
Software 1.8.0_C1 has following limitations:

 User Interface screens are only available in Dutch, English, French, German,
Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish language.
 RF tag overrule functionality (printing with Dmax = 2.0 O.D.) not yet implemented
 Only Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher is usable as browser application.


Repair and Service
1.3 Known Problems
Software 1.8.0_C1 has following known software problems:

 In case the Online Diagnosis detects that the Output Module is Causeive and has
to be exchanged, it does not display "MOD 06 - Please replace module" but "E06 -
Please replace module".
 The Module pages in the Service Engineer Tools are not yet operational
 In case a film jam happens with last film in a package, the printer does not show
"empty film tray" but continues printing with the "protective cover", what leads to
jam with the protective cover.
 Automatic film calibration fails in case of a pending maintenance action.
Type of new Software* Software Update
Printer Serial Numbers  SN1156 plus 1143 and SN 1149
Prerequisites None
*NOTE:
 A software upgrade is a functional extension. An update (software patch) is an
internal change designed to correct bugs, fix defects, or otherwise minor
improvements to performance without changing the software's basic design,
structure or functionality.
 On MedNet always the latest available software release can be downloaded.
2.1 Solved Software Bug
Symptom Thermal Head calibration could lead to vertical stripes on the film in the range of
 0.05 O.D*. units (For comparison: Under best viewing conditions the human eye can
distinguish 0.01 O.D. units).
*O.D. = Optical Density
Cause Software fault


Repair and Service
2.2 New Feature
Added languages for the Operator and Key-Operator displays:
Languages in Software 1.80_C1 Additional Languages

in Software 1.80_C2
Dutch Chinese-simplified
English Chinese-traditional
French Czech
German Danish
Italian Finnish
Norwegian Greek
Portuguese Japanese
Spanish Korean
Swedish Polish
Russian
Estonian
Hungarian
Latvian
Lithuanian
Slovak
Table 1: Languages for Operator and Key-Operator Screens


Repair and Service
≥ SN 2175 plus 2091, 2134, 2143, 2159

Printer Serial Numbers
and 2173
Prerequisites None
*NOTE:
 On MedNet, GSO Library always the latest available software release can be
downloaded.
3.1 Solved Software Bugs
Software 1.8.1_C1 solves following software bugs:
Symptom 1 Film transport problems from the upper tray
Additional Information:
− Film jam mainly happens with film size 14x17"
− Error message HC314003 in the infocounter
− The user interface shows error message: "Film Jam: Open upper input tray and
clear film path"
Cause Non-optimized film transport & aligning from upper tray, caused by the friction clutch
in the gear box


Repair and Service
Symptom 2 Electromagnetic radiation of the Themis CPU above specifications.
This symptom has no impact for the printer operation, violates however the specified
electromagnetic radiation values.
Cause A certain component on the Themis CPU named "Spread Spectrum Clock (SSC)" is
switched off during operation.
Type of new Software* Software Upgrade
Printer Serial Numbers ≥ SN 3930, plus 3642, 3645, 3711, 3714, 3798,
3803, 3815, 3856, 3862, 3864, 3865, 3867 to
3880, 3883, 3887, 3895, 3903 to 3909, 3911 to
3913, 3915 to 3924, 3926 to 3928
Prerequisites None
*NOTE:
downloaded.
4.1 New Features
Software 1.9.0_C2 contains following new features:

 Support of RoHS conform printed circuit boards
 Improvement of the Thermal Model, what improves constancy if several films are
printed short after each other
NOTE:
As of software 1.9.0_C2 the key-operator screens are available in English language
only.


Repair and Service
Printer Serial Numbers SN 3886, 3887, 3905, 3919, 3920, 3945, 3967,
3972, 3985, 3992, 4014, 4021, 4022, 4023,
4026, 4028, 4029, 4038, 4040, 4044, 4047,
4049, 4050, 4052, 4055, 4059, 4060, 4068,
4069, 4072, 4074, 4077, 4078, 4080, 4081,
4088, 4089, 4092, 4099, 4102, 4113, 4114,
4116, 4125, 4126, 4127, 4128, 4129, 4131,
4132, 4133, 4134, 4137, 4138, 4139, 4140,
4141, 4142, 4143, 4144, 4145, 4146, 4147,
4148, 4149, 4150, 4151, 4152, 4153, 4154,
4155, 4156, 4157, 4158, 4160, 4162, 4163,
4165, 4166, 4167, 4170, 4170, 4173, 4174,
4175, 4176, 4177, 4178, 4179, 4181, 4182,
4184, 4185, 4196, 4197, 4198, 4199, 4200,
4203, 4204, 4205, 4206, 4207, 4209, 4210,
4211, 4215, 4218, 4232
Software 1.9.0_C3 was not published via

Availability
MedNet, GSO library.
Prerequisites None
*NOTE:
downloaded.
5.1 Solved Software Bug
Software 1.9-0_C3 contains a bugfix for the production tools only.

It does not contain bugfixes of problems that may occur in the field.


Repair and Service
Printer Serial Numbers ≥ SN 4368 plus 3923, 3924, 3976, 3988,

3995, 4000, 4006, 4007, 4009, 4012, 4013,
4015, 4018, 4020, 4024, 4025, 4027, 4030,
4031, 4033, 4034, 4035, 4039, 4041, 4042,
4043, 4045, 4046, 4048, 4051, 4053, 4054,
4056 to 4058, 4061 to 4067, 4070, 4071,
4073, 4075, 4076, 4079, 4082 to 4087,
4090, 4091, 4093 to 4095, 4097, 4098,
4100, 4101, 4103 to 4112, 4115, 4117,
4118 to 4124, 4130, 4135, 4136, 4159,
4161, 4164, 4169, 4172, 4183, 4186, 4187
to 4195, 4201, 4202, 4208, 4212, 4213,
4214, 4216, 4217, 4219 to 4226, 4228,
4230, 4231 to 4237, 4239 to 4249, 4251,
4252, 4254 to 4262, 4264, 4266, 4267 to
4316, 4318 to 4354, 4355, 4357, 4358 to
4365, 4366
Prerequisites None
*NOTE:
downloaded.


Repair and Service
Symptom 1 Sporadic film jams in the output module and corresponding error message:
“Film jam - Open top cover and clear film jam”
 The fault mainly appears with 8x10” or 12x10” films printed from the lower tray.
 With lower probability the fault may also happen:
o With other film formats (14x17”, 14x14”, 14x11”) printed from the lower tray
o With any film format printed from the upper tray
Symptom 2 Top border is too large (> 7 mm); O.K. NOT O.K.
images possibly printed until the
approx. 6 mm > 7 mm
trailing edge of the film.
on
o
ati
ati
Inf age
Inf age
orm
orm
Im
Im
Figure 1
Cause Software fault in software 1.9.0_C3


Repair and Service
≥ SN 5723 plus 5660, 5665, 5667, 5669,

Printer Serial Numbers 5672, 5676, 5677, 5679, 5683, 5684, 5717,
5719, 5721
Prerequisites None
*NOTE:
downloaded.
Symptom 1 Sporadic input film jams for films from the upper tray, mainly 14” films:
 Error message at the local display:
Film jam! Open upper input tray and clear film path
 Error message in the infocounter: HC314003
Cause The force for driving the film towards the thermal head is sporadically too low.


Repair and Service
Solution Install "upper pickup modification kit", spare part number*: CM+3617030. It contains:
1. Modified latches which open and close the rollers for moving the film towards the
thermal head:
 Reinforced holders for the axle.
 More clearance for the axle which is moved by the latches
(before: ± 0.25 mm, now ± 1 mm).
2. Stronger springs at the upper pickup rollers. These springs define the friction
between rollers and film.
3. Software patch 1.9.1_C1 with optimized film pick-up timing
* The last digit in the spare part number indicates the spare part revision at release of
this document. When ordering, the actual revision of the spare part is delivered.
Symptom 2 When printing calibration films (Film calibration; Internal Densitometer Calibration;
Thermal Print Head Calibration) the printer makes a strange noise.
The noise depends on the type of Thermal Head (Kyocera / Toshiba) and the film
batch.
Cause Resonances inside the printer, appearing sporadically at low density printing.
Solution Software Patch 1.9.1_C1 has different calibration patterns implemented to avoid
sporadic resonances. Example for film calibration film see Figure 2.
Figure 2


Repair and Service
≥ SN 7069, plus 6827, 6867, 6887, 6902,

6917, 7067, 7052 and 7057
Prerequisites None
*NOTE:
downloaded.
Symptom 1 Sporadically the printer stops boot-up with message “Error System Failure”:
 When pressing the ON/OFF switch the printer cannot be switched off.
 Access via network is not possible (to reboot remotely).
 After unplugging and reconnecting the mains cable the printer usually starts up
normally.
Cause CPU Driver problem


Repair and Service
Symptom 2 When the upper or lower RF tag (RF = Radio Frequency) is Causeive (Error HC301003
/ HC 302003) the display names the wrong defective RF tag (RF1 instead of RF2 and
vice verse).
Also in the service manual DD+DIS150.05E, section 4, edition 1 revision 0, Reference
Diagrams, the RF-tags are mixed.
Correct:
RF1 = lower tray
RF2 = upper tray
Cause Mismatch of correct naming of RF tag in translation file for LCD display, service manual
and software
8.2 New Feature
Currently the RF-Tags of the film packages

have their information stored in a non-ISO
format.
To be prepared for future changes of the RF
tags (new format as defined by ISO) software
≥ 1.9.2_C1 already accepts ISO RF tags.
Figure 3


Repair and Service
≥ SN 8923 plus 8634, 8662, 8679, 8691,

8694, 8847,8848, 8854, 8856, 8857, 8858,
8865, 8871, 8873, 8875, 8880, 8886, 8893,
8894, 8896, 8897, 8903, 8908, 8911, 8912,
8913, 8914, 8915, 8916, 8917, 8918, 8919,
8920, 8921
Prerequisites None
*NOTE:
downloaded.
9.1 New Features
Software 2.0.0_C2 contains following new features:
 Software supports both printers, DRYSTAR 5302 and DRYSTAR AXYS.

 Support of 14 bit contrast resolution (instead of 12 bit)
 Improved RF-tag locking mechanism (identical to RF-tag locking mechanism of
DRYSTAR 550X software 6.0)
 Support of “Compliance film calibration” which may be required to pass the
Afssaps / EUREF* acceptance test.
For DRYSTAR AXYS this feature was available already as of software 1.6.3_C1,
however only for Mammo printing. Now it is available also for non-mammography
applications for DRYSTAR 5302 and DRYSTAR AXYS.
*Afssaps = Agence française de sécurité sanitaire des produits de santé
EUREF = European Reference Organisation for Quality Assured Breast Screening and
Diagnostic Services


Repair and Service
 Extended operating System and Browser Compatibility of the Operator, Key-

Operator and Service Browser Pages.
Supported operating systems:
- Windows 2000
- Windows XP
- Windows Vista
Supported browsers:
- Internet Explorer 6, 7 and 8
- Firefox 3
 Support of Resistor Check Function. This function allows troubleshooting of film
stripes in the film run direction.
9.2 Solved Bug in Software 2.0.0_C2
Symptom 1 Sporadically the printer stops boot-up with message “Error System Failure”:
 When pressing the ON/OFF switch the printer cannot be switched off.
 Access via network is not possible (to reboot remotely).
 After unplugging and reconnecting the mains cable the printer usually starts up
normally.
Cause CPU Driver problem
Solution Install software 2.0.0_C2 to prevent the problem.
NOTE:
For DRYSTAR 5302 software patch 1.9.2_C1 solved already most cases of
the problems.
Symptom 2 Infocounter data and E-Label data sporadically do not match.
Cause E-Label and Infocounter synchronization problem
Solution Install software 2.0.0_C2.


Repair and Service
Symptom 3 Some DRYSTAR 5302 printers sporadically print films partially only, especially with
high workload: The rest of the film is gray.
Cause Data underrun due to a software problem
Solution Install software 2.0.0_C2.
9.3 Known Software Issue
Symptom Login problems with the Firefox browser:

In some cases the login to the service web pages has to be repeated three times, until
login is successful.
Cause Incompatibility with login script and Firefox browser in certain cases
Solution Repeat the login up to three times until it is successful.


Repair and Service
Printer Serial Numbers ≥ SN 9464 plus SN 9288, 9409
Prerequisites None
*NOTE:
 On MedNet, GSO Library, always the latest available software release can be
downloaded.
10.1 New Feature of Software 2.0.0_C3
Compared to software 2.0.0_C2 the RF tag locking mechanism is further improved.

This supports a reliable detection of falsely inserted films.
NOTE:
Software 2.1.0_C2 supports DRYSTAR 5302 and DRYSTAR AXYS.


Repair and Service
Printer Serial Numbers ≥ SN 12222*
Prerequisites None
* SNs of additional DRYSTAR 5302 printers with SW 2.1.0_C2 ex factory: 11538, 12095, 12099, 12102,
12103, 12105, 12108, 12111, 12113, 12118, 12122, 12125, 12126, 12128, 12132, 12136, 12139, 12144,
12149, 12151, 12152, 12156, 12158, 12161, 12163, 12164, 12167, 12168, 12169, 12170, 12178, 12181,
12182, 12186, 12192, 12193, 12194, 12197, 12205, 12207, 12210, 12212, 12214, 12217, 12218, 12219
*NOTE:
downloaded.
Software 2.1.0_C2 supports new hardware (Devius module, Tyndal module, SATA
hard disk) for DRYSTAR 5302 and DRYSTAR AXYS, which was introduced
in Q IV 2010.
 Software 2.1.0_C2 is downwards compatible, so it also supports the actual
hardware (Devil module, Themis module, SCSI hard disk).
It replaces software 2.0.0_C3.
 The new software has no other new features except support of new hardware.
NOTE:


Repair and Service
Printer Serial Numbers SN ≥ 13990 plus SN 13865
Prerequisites None
*NOTE:
downloaded.
By installing software 2.1.0_C3, the Devius board is re-programmed to revision 9.

This is a solution for the warning message “RF Tag Problem” after 10 printed films of a
new film pack.
For details see DRYSTAR AXYS SB 15 / DRYSTAR 5302 SB 20, Software 2.1.0_C3
available to solve Warning Message “RF Tag Problem“ after 10 printed Films of a new
Film Pack, DD+DIS037.11E (Intranet Link / Extranet Link).
NOTE:


Chapter 3.9
Imaging Services
FAQ - Frequently Asked Questions
DRYSTAR 5302
Type 5364 / 100/300
► Please note
The Chapter ‘FAQ’, Edition 1, Revision 0, has been replaced by the separately
available Troubleshooting Guide, DD+DIS154.08E
Please download the Troubleshooting Guide from the GSO Library:

MEDNET GSO Æ Hardcopy Æ Dry Imagers Æ Drystar 5302 Æ Trouble shooting guide

08/2008 printed in Germany Document Node ID: 26032589
eq_03-9_faq_e_template_v05
Repair and Service
DD+DIS150.05E FAQ - Frequently Asked Questions


08/2008 Type 5366/100 Agfa Company Confidential
Imaging Services Reference and Circuit Diagrams
DRYSTAR 5302
Type 5366/100

This document contains:
 Reference diagrams for identification and location of assemblies inside the
machine including an alphanumeric reference list
 Wiring diagrams

1.1 03-2011  Added new hardware “Devius PCB, Tyndall CPU, DDR2
RAM and SATA Hard disk” in the reference diagram.
See section 1.
 Added new main wiring diagram for Devius PCB.
See section 2, page 2.
Document Title
DD+DIS338.10E DRYSTAR 5302 SIB18, New Hardware (Devius / Tyndall /
RAM) and new Type of Hard Disk (SATA) introduced

eq_04_diagrams_e_template_v06
DD+DIS150.05E Reference and Circuit Diagrams
► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the product.
NOTE:
Document Type ‘Order List’ in the Agfa HealthCare library.


LIST OF CONTENTS
1 REFERENCE DIAGRAMS .......................................................................................................4

1.1 Components Location ...............................................................................................................4
1.2 List of Components ...................................................................................................................7
2 WIRING DIAGRAMS ................................................................................................................9


1 Reference Diagrams
1.1 Components Location
CDM LED Board
S25 only installed S25 S6

up to SN 1519
CDM
M4
S5
S10 M5
S13
S4
S 1 in upper tray
S2 in lower tray
M1 S11
S24
S9 S12
RF1 in Lower Tray 536604aa_1.cdr
RF2 in Upper Tray
Figure 1


S14 / S15 in Upper pickup tray

S16 / S17 in Lower pickup tray
M6 in Upper pickup tray

S6 M7 in Lower pickup tray
M4
S18/S19 in Upper
F1 S8 /Lower pickup tray
S7 S21
M2 S22
M3
V2 V1 M9
F2
M8
S3
SCSI / SATA Hard Disk* 536704aa_3.cdr
*Devius / Tyndall / DDR2 RAM / SATA hard disk introduced for:

SN 3177, SN 3180, SN 3494 to SN 3537, SN 3539, SN 3574, SN ≥ 3672
Figure 2


Devil*
Devius*
OSB Power Supply
TPH
Themis* Tyndall*
Key6
RAM*
*Devius / Tyndall / DDR2 RAM / SATA hard disk introduced for: DDR2 RAM*
SN ≥ 12610 536604aa_2.cdr
Figure 3


1.2 List of Components

Component Name Refer to
CDM Contactless Densitometer PCB Figure 1
cdmLED Densitometer LED PCB Figure 1
Devil PCB or Devius Control Board: Input/Output and film
Figure 3
PCB control
E1 E label Devil CPU --
E2 E label Output Module --
E3 E label Lower Pickup Module --
E4 E label Power Supply --
E5 E label TPH module --
E6 E label 6 Display Module --
E7 E label 7 Upper Pickup Module --
F1 Thermal Head fan Figure 2
F2 CPU cooling fan (E-box) Figure 2
Hard disk Drive Hard disk Drive 73 GB (or more) Figure 2
KEY6 PCB Keypad module Figure 3
M1 Drum motor Figure 1
M2 Cam drive motor Figure 2
M3 Suspension drive motor Figure 2
M4 Output rollers motor Figure 1
M5 CDM Motor Figure 1
M6 Upper Pickup motor Figure 2
M7 Lower Pickup motor Figure 2
M8 Gear Box motor Figure 2
M9 Vacuum pump Figure 2
OSB Switch Board for TH resistors Figure 3
Power Supply Power Supply Figure 3
RAM / DDR2 RAM RAM Figure 3
RF1 RF tag reader lower tray Figure 1
RF2 RF tag reader upper tray Figure 1


Component Name Refer to

S1 Upper magazine empty detection Figure 1
S2 Lower magazine empty detection Figure 1
S3 Transport roller open detection Figure 2
S4 Input Sensor TPH Figure 1
S5 Output sensor TPH Figure 1
S6 Output rollers home position Figure 1
S7 TPH home position Figure 2
S8 Top cover closed detection Figure 2
S9 Print drum drive rotation detection Figure 1
S10 Densitometer home position Figure 1
S11 Take over passed detection Figure 1
S12 Overheat sensor Figure 1
S13 Input sensor TPH Figure 1
S14 Upper pickup home position Figure 2
S15 Upper pickup pickup position Figure 2
S16 Lower pickup home position Figure 2
S17 Lower pickup pickup position Figure 2
S18 Upper pickup passed position Figure 2
S19 Lower pickup passed position Figure 2
S21 10" suspension position Figure 2
S22 14" suspension position Figure 2
S24 Take over passed detection Figure 1
Output sensor
S25 Figure 1
Only installed up to SN 1519.
Themis CPU / Tyndall
CPU board. Keeps Operating System. Figure 3
CPU
TPH Thermal print head Figure 1
V1 Vacuum valve lower magazine Figure 2
V2 Vacuum valve upper magazine Figure 2


2 Wiring Diagrams
NOTE:
To improve readability on paper, the two main diagrams are split up in 4 pages to be
printed on DIN A4: Double-click the attached paper-clip to open and print the diagrams.
Page 1 Page 2
Page 3 Page 4
The following circuit diagrams are attached:
# Description
1 Wiring Diagrams Drystar 5302 with Devil PCB: Main Page (Diagram 1/9)
2 Wiring Diagrams Drystar 5302 with Devius PCB: Main Page (Diagram 2/9)
3 Wiring Diagram Lower Pickup Assembly (Diagram 3/9)
4 Wiring Diagram Lower Tray Assembly (Diagram 4/9)
5 Wiring Diagram Output Assembly up to SN1519 Assembly (Diagram 5/9)
6 Wiring Diagram Output Assembly as of SN1519 Assembly (Diagram 6/9)
7 Wiring Diagram Pump & Valves Assembly (Diagram 7/9)
8 Wiring Diagram Upper Pickup Assembly (Diagram 8/9)
9 Wiring Diagram Upper Tray Assembly (Diagram 9/9)


A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q
A343882. THERMAL HEAD ASSY X

X
OS-5101-H X X A340530.0 NAIS AGX226
X X
Sensor-S4 X (Matsushita)
Overheat
X
X A340419. 3
2
3
S4
+XS5aXS5:3
RD
VT
EE-SX4009-P1
Sensor-S7
X
X
S7
X
2 +XS5aXS5:2 1 RD
sensor A5
CABLED HEATER FOIL (ELE) 1
1
BU3-EI
+XS5aXS5:1
BK
2
3
1
2
DEV/P1:36
DEV/P1:35
BK
VT
X
S8
3 DEV/P1:34 X X
BN 1 3 BU BU3-EI X X
X X
S8/7 S8/8
1/1 7 8 1/1
X +XS5a +XS5b
X Input sensor TPH BK
XS5 XS5 BK
6.3mm isolation (clear)
3 4
6.3mm isolation (clear)
S4:1 1 1 DEV/P1:26
TPH home position
Thermal Print Head
12 VT VT 12
S4:2 2 2 DEV/P1:25
Sensor-S12
RD
S4:3 3 3 DEV/P1:27
RD Top cover closed detection
BK BK
S13:1 4 4 DEV/P1:32
VT VT
S13:2 5 5 DEV/P1:31
1
2
RD RD
S13:3 6 6 DEV/P1:33
VT BK
+XS5aXS5:8 7 7 DEV/P1:15
X A344559. WIRE HARNESS ASSY VT
+XS5aXS5:7 8 8 DEV/P1:14
VT
X
X X A339844. X (BRACKET) ST8-EI BU8-EI
2 +5V common
P325189
X +TPH TPH
*50/50
+TPH
+TPH
10/10
IFE#5 ST1
1/10
2/10
3/10
4/10
5/10
6/10
7/10
8/10
9/10
A000000. Thermal Head Assembly
+TPH
X
P3
P1
OG 1/4
X
BL11
1 +5V
P2
+XS4aXS4:7 1 X
X
RD 2/4
+XS4aXS4:8 2 OS-5101-H X X
BK 3/4 X /Output_asm.3H
+XS4aXS4:9 3
X
X
JST VH connector JST VH connector Sensor-S13
TH/P2
WH S13
*50/50
10/10
1/10
2/10
3/10
4/10
5/10
6/10
7/10
8/10
9/10
4/4 X
BU50-IDC-1
X
X
X
TH/P3
TH/P1
+XS4aXS4:10 4
ST4-MO53261-SMD +TPH 156" board-in 156" board-in 3
3 +XS5aXS5:6
RD A344551. WIRE HARNESS ASSY (OUTPUT) XS2 & XS3
BU4-51021 X crimp style 10pos. crimp style 2pos. 2 VT
2 +XS5aXS5:5
BN
BU
RD
RD
A6 1 BK
X 1 +XS5aXS5:4
< open wire end >

< open wire end >
BU3-EI
Sensor-S12:1
Sensor-S12:3
PS/P3:11
PS/P3:12
eLabel pcb Address #5 Input sensor TPH
ST5-MINI-FIT-JR BU5-MINI-FIT-JR
11 11
BK
RD
XS6b
A344546. WIRE HARNESS ASSY (ENGINE)

X
X
1 1
2 2
4 4
5 5
A343030. S4 BRACKET ASM

X
X
XS6a
WH
WH
WH
BN
BN
BN
OG
OG
RD
RD
RD
RD
RD
RD
RD
RD
RD
RD
BU
BU
BU
RD
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
OSB/P6:4
OSB/P6:3
OSB/P6:2
OSB/P6:1
VT
VT
VT
VT
VT
VT
VT
VT
VT
YE
VT
VT
VT
+XS2aXS2:13
+XS2aXS2:11
+XS2aXS2:12
+XS2aXS2:14
+XS2aXS2:10
+XS3aXS3:20
+XS3aXS3:19
+XS3aXS3:18
+XS3aXS3:16
+XS3aXS3:17
+XS3aXS3:15
+XS2aXS2:19
+XS3aXS3:22
+XS3aXS3:10
+XS3aXS3:13
+XS3aXS3:11
+XS3aXS3:12
+XS3aXS3:14
+XS2aXS2:9
+XS2aXS2:7
+XS2aXS2:8
+XS5bXS5:8
+XS5bXS5:7
+XS2aXS2:6
+XS2aXS2:5
+XS2aXS2:4
+XS2aXS2:2
+XS2aXS2:1
+XS2aXS2:3
+XS5bXS5:2
+XS5bXS5:1
+XS5bXS5:3
+XS5bXS5:5
+XS5bXS5:4
+XS5bXS5:6
+XS3aXS3:1
+XS3aXS3:2
+XS3aXS3:3
+XS3aXS3:4
+XS3aXS3:5
+XS3aXS3:6
+XS3aXS3:7
+XS3aXS3:9
+XS3aXS3:8
S8/7:1
S8/8:1
S7:3
S7:2
S7:1
A345385. TH POWER CABLE
DEV/P1:38
DEV/P1:37
X
BN
BU
/Upper_pickup.3F
RD
RD
TPH fan XS1
BU40-90142
BU16-90142
DEV/P1
DEV/P9
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
X
X
X
X
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
5
6
8
9
+12V
+5V
+5V
ODM_I_SEL_B_BF
ODM_M_SEL_B_BF
ODM_I_SEL_A_BF
ODM_M_SEL_A_BF
P_24V
P_24V
ODM_BL_CTRL_BF
-12V
EL_SDA_LINE1
EL_SCL_LINE1
JAM_CLEAR
SDA
GND
DC_OUTB5
DC_OUTB4
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
DC_OUTA5
DC_OUTA4
VOS
VOS
VOS
VOS
VOS
VOS
VOS
VOS
SCL
ODM_COUNT
DIG_SENSOR18
DIG_SENSOR17
DIG_SENSOR21
DIG_SENSOR13
DIG_SENSOR5
DIG_SENSOR7
DIG_SENSOR6
DIG_SENSOR4
DIG_SENSOR9
+DEV1
+DEV1
CURR_DIG_SENSOR18
CURR_DIG_SENSOR17
CURR_DIG_SENSOR21
CURR_DIG_SENSOR5
CURR_DIG_SENSOR7
CURR_DIG_SENSOR6
CURR_DIG_SENSOR4
SAFETY_OK
M
ST40-90130
ST16-90130
P1
P9
X
X
10 10
X X
A329002.1 +DEV1 X
X P40 DEV/P40 BK
F1 1 GND 1 DEV/P40:2
2
A347112. OSB-HEATER CABLE
BK
X A344555.0 2 DIG_SENSOR31(CCP40) 2 DEV/P40:1
X X X 3 DC_OUTA12
X +DEV1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DEV/P14 P14 4 DC_OUTB12
GY
*50/50 *50/50 5 DC_OUTA11 5 +XS10bXS10:5
BN
OSB1
BU50-IDC-1 P325189 6 DC_OUTB11 6 +XS10bXS10:6
I/O 4 CDM
BU
RD
WH X
TPH DATA CABLE TH 7 DC_OUTA10 7 +XS10bXS10:3
BN
/Lower_pickup.3F
8 DC_OUTB10 8 +XS10bXS10:4
A329002.1:2
A329002.1:1
X X 9 DC_OUTA9 9 +XS10bXS10:1
BU XS4
+OSB1 BN
X 10 DC_OUTB9 10 +XS10bXS10:2
OSB/P6 P6 11 DC_OUTA8 11 +XS4aXS4:2
RD
RD 1/4 BK
BU2-MINI-FIT-JR
XS6a:5 1 12 DC_OUTB8 12 +XS4aXS4:1

RD 2/4 X X RD
XS6a:4 2 X +DEV1 13 DC_OUTA7 13 +XS1aXS1:2
BU 3/4 BK
DEV/P41 P41
Fan-F1
XS6a:2 3 14 DC_OUTB7 14 +XS1aXS1:1

BN BK
4/4
+ - BU
10
XS6a:1 4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 SWITCH_FET_STATUS_I_GND 9
DEV/P41:2 1 GND 1 15 M3_A2 15 +XS13aXS13:5
P316801 BK
X
X
RD
DEVIL ONE
2 2
1 1
BU4-MINI-FIT-JR DEV/P41:1 2 DIG_SENSOR30(CCP21) 2 16 M3_A1 16 +XS13aXS13:4

BN WH
10 SWITCH_FET_STATUS_I
F1
X
X
+XS11bXS11:1 3 GND 3
ST2-MINI-FIT-JR
1 CURR_DIG_SENSOR14
17 M3_B2 17 +XS13aXS13:7
X
.1 S27 obsolete BK
+XS11bXS11:2 4 XX2 4 YE
7 SWITCH_FETB_ACT
5 SWITCH_FETA_ACT
9 X VT 18 M3_B1 18 +XS13aXS13:6 9
BU
2 DIG_SENSOR14
X ST10-90130 +XS13aXS13:10 5 DIG_SENSOR29 5 19 M8_A2 19 +XS12aXS12:1
P316768
P316768
BK
+OSB1
+OSB1
(Devil 3 run)
OSB1 +XS13aXS13:9 6 CURR_DIG_SENSOR29 6 RD
+OSB1
A339406. OSB1 pcb RD 20 M8_A1 20 +XS12aXS12:2

WH
1/1
1/1
P2
P3
+XS13aXS13:8 7 VOS 7 X
LED functions on Themis
X
BL19 21 M8_B2 21 +XS12aXS12:3 /Pump_&_Valves_asm.2E
P1
VT
6 GND
8 GND
YE
DEV/P20:8
DEV/P20:7
+XS13aXS13:3 8 DIG_SENSOR28 8 22 M8_B1 22 +XS12aXS12:4

X
X
BK
RD
+XS13aXS13:2 9 CURR_DIG_SENSOR28 9 23 DC_OUTA6 23 F2:1
RD XS10
BU10-90142
D1, D7, D10 (yellow) Software controllable LED's.

X
X
BU
OSB/P1
+XS13aXS13:1 10 VOS 10 24 DC_OUTB6 24 F2:2

BK D2 2,5V (green) V25 =2,5V for MPC107 Host Bridge and FPGA. VT
+XS12aXS12:5 11 CURR_DIG_SENSOR0 11
1/1
1/1
X
X
X
X
25 CURR_DIG_SENSOR3 25 +XS1aXS1:14
RING-TERM-2.5-3.6
RING-TERM-2.5-3.6
OSB/P2
OSB/P3
VT
BU
RD
RD
+XS12aXS12:6 12 DIG_SENSOR0 12 D3 VCORE (green) VCORE = CPU Core Voltage. 26 GND
VT
+XS12aXS12:7 13 VOS 13 D5 3,3V (green) V33 =3,3V for most logic onboard. 27 VOS
+XS12aXS12:8 14 DIG_SENSOR2 14 VT
D8 +5V (green) VCC =5V for remaining logic. 28 DIG_SENSOR24 28 +XS4aXS4:5
DEV/P41:33
DEV/P41:32
DEV/P41:18
DEV/P41:20
DEV/P41:22
DEV/P41:24
DEV/P41:19
DEV/P41:17
BK
+XS12aXS12:9 15 CURR_DIG_SENSOR2 15 D4 CS1 (yellow) Chip Select for PortX bus. 29 CURR_DIG_SENSOR24
RD
+XS12aXS12:10 16 VOS 16 30 VOS
GY D9 CS0 (yellow) Chip Select for PortX bus. BK
OSB/P1:10 17 SWITCH_FET_STATUS_I 17 31 GND 31 +XS1aXS1:9
BN D6 FPGAconf. (red) FPGA Configuration done. When lit, FPGA is NOT configured --> ALARM. OG
A344546. WIRE HARNESS ASSY (ENGINE) BK
OSB/P1:5 18 SWITCH_FETA_ACT 18 32 EL_SDA_LINE1 32 +XS1aXS1:7
BN
BK
BK
BU
BK
BK
D11 CPU (yellow) CPU Bus Grant - indicates CPU activity on the Bus.
VT
I/O 3
GY
OSB/P1:9 19 SWITCH_FET_STATUS_I_GND19 RD
BK 33 +5V 33 +XS1aXS1:8
OSB/P1:6 20 GND 20 WH
34 EL_SCL_LINE1 34 +XS1aXS1:10
UP_SPARE3 21 ST34-90130 BU34-90142 X
BU /Pump_&_Valves_asm.4E

X OSB/P1:7 22 SWITCH_FETB_ACT 22
X BK
UP_SPARE2 23
X X XS11
M1 OSB/P1:8 24 GND 24 +DEV1 X
VT
8 X X PK243-01A BK
+XS4aXS4:6 25 DIG_SENSOR23 25 P20 DEV/P20 BK
8
X X Motor-M1 +XS4aXS4:3 26 CURR_DIG_SENSOR23 26 1 GND 1 DEV/P20:2
M1 RD BK
BK
M1 VT
+XS4aXS4:4 27 VOS 27 2 DIG_SENSOR20(CCP) 2 DEV/P20:1
BK
DEV/P20:3 1 1/8 BK +XS1aXS1:5 28 DIG_SENSOR22 28 3 STEP_SINA 3 M1:1
2/8
3/8
YE M BK
RD
+XS1aXS1:3
+XS1aXS1:4
29
30
CURR_DIG_SENSOR22
VOS
29
30
4
5
STEP_SINB
STEP_COSA
4
5
M1:4
M1:5
GN
RD
GN 4/8 GN BU
DEV/P20:4 4 UP_SPARE1 31 6 STEP_COSB 6 M1:8
X RD 5/8 VT RD
DEV/P20:5 5 OSB/P1:2 32 DIG_SENSOR14 32 7 DC_OUTA1_F 7 F1:1
X
Motor 24VDC
6/8
7/8
BK
OSB/P1:1 33 CURR_DIG_SENSOR14 33 I/O 5 8 DC_OUT1_F 8 F1:2
BU
RD
Motor-M2 X BU34-90142 VOS 34 9 VOS 9 +XS4aXS4:11
X BU 8/8 BK
DEV/P20:6 8 RD WH BU ST34-90130 10 DIG_SENSOR10 10 +XS4aXS4:13
RD
M2 RD BU8-5102-N
ST8-5240
11 DIG_SENSOR1 11 +XS4aXS4:12
VT
1
M BK
BU
2
3
1
2
DEV/P20:23
DEV/P20:24
BK 12
13
GND
+5V
OG 4 OG 14 DC_ENC4
4 DEV/P20:18
YE 5 YE 15 DC_OUTB3
5 DEV/P20:22
BU 6 BU 16 DC_OUTA3
6 DEV/P20:20 X X
X +DEV1 17 DC_ENC3
ST6-EI OG
X BK
DEV/P42 P42 18 +5V 18 M2:4
DEV/P42:2 1 GND 1 19 +5V
X BK BU
X DEV/P42:1 2 DIG_SENSOR32(CCP42) 2 20 GND 20 M2:6
7 EE-SX4009-P1 BK 7
TPH positioning motor X
S9 Sensor-S9
+XS12aXS12:11 3 DIG_SENSOR33 3 21 GND
YE
RD 1 NC 4 22 DC_ENC2 22 M2:5
DEV/P20:40 1 VT RD
BK 2 +XS12aXS12:12 5 DIG_SENSOR33 5 23 DC_OUTA2 23 M2:1
DEV/P20:39 2 BK BK
VT 3 +XS13aXS13:12 6 DIG_SENSOR34 6 24 DC_OUTB2 24 M2:2
DEV/P20:38 3 VOS 7 25 GND
BU3-EI VT VT
+XS13aXS13:11 8 DIG_SENSOR34 8 26 DIG_SENSOR10 26 +XS4aXS4:14
X
CURR_DIG_SENSOR34 9 27 VOS
A344554. TPH POWER CABLE
X
X VOS 10 28 VOS
EE-SX4009-P1 VT
X CURR_DIG_SENSOR35 11 29 DIG_SENSOR19 29 +XS1aXS1:6
RD
S21 1
Sensor-S21 Print drum drive DIG_SENSOR35 12 30 CURR_DIG_SENSOR19
+XS13bXS13:1 1 OG
BK 2 VOS 13 31 EL_SDA_LINE0 31 +XS4aXS4:7
+XS13bXS13:2 2 BK
VT 3 DOG_SENSOR36 14 32 GND 32 +XS4aXS4:9
+XS13bXS13:3 3 WH
CURR_DIG_SENSOR36 15 33 EL_SCL_LINE0 33 +XS4aXS4:10
BU3-EI RD
VOS 16 34 +5V 34 +XS4aXS4:8
VT
X X DIG_SENSOR37 17 35 DIG_SENSOR3 35 +XS1aXS1:12
BK
+XS13a +XS13b CURR_DIG_SENSOR37 18 36 CURR_DIG_SENSOR3 36 +XS1aXS1:13
XS13 XS13 RD
BU
RD
RD RD VOS 19 37 VOS 37 +XS1aXS1:11

DEV/P41:10 1 1 S21:1 10" suspension position DIG_SENSOR38 20 38 DIG_SENSOR16 38 S9:3
VT
BK BK
I/O 1 BK
DEV/P40:24
DEV/P40:23
DEV/P41:9 2 2 S21:2 CURR_DIG_SENSOR38 21 39 CURR_DIG_SENSOR16 39 S9:2
Key6
VT VT RD
DEV/P41:8 3 3 S21:3 VOS 22 40 VOS 40 S9:1
RD RD
DEV/P40:16 4 4 M3:3 X NC 23 ST40-90130 BU40-90142
6 BU BU 6
DEV/P40:15 5 5 M3:5 X DIG_SENSOR39 24
YE YE
WH
DEV/P40:18
DEV/P40:17
6
7
6
7
M3:7
M3:9
WH X
X
1
KH42KM2-851
Motor-M3
CURR_DIG_SENSOR39
VOS
25
26
I/O 6
RD RD 2
A347061. WIRE HARNESS ASSY
ST2-EI
X X
DEV/P41:7 8 8 S22:1 M3 ST26-90130

F2
BK BK RD 3 A +DEV1 X
M
X
X
DEV/P41:6 9 9 S22:2 +XS13bXS13:4 3

2 2
1 1
VT VT (SPRING EXT.) 4 P21 DEV/P21

DEV/P41:5 10 10 S22:3 LED functions on VILIS BK
X
X
BU2-EI
Fan-F2
VT BK BU 5 A 1 GND 1 DEV/P21:2
DEV/P42:8 11 11 +XS13bXS13:12 +XS13bXS13:5 5 BK
BK BK 6 2 DIG_SENSOR12(CCP21) 2 DEV/P21:1
DEV/P42:6 12 12 +XS13bXS13:11 BK GND
YE 7 D5 +3V3 (green) When lit, 3,3V Supply Voltage ok. 3 GND 3 +XS9aXS9:4
WH
ST12-70107 BU12-70066 +XS13bXS13:6 7 B B D18 +5V (green) When lit, 5V Supply Voltage ok. 4 RFID_TXD_RS 4 +XS9aXS9:6 RFID_TXD_RS
8 RD +5V
D9 P_24V (green) When lit, +24V Supply Voltage ok. 5 +5V 5 +XS9aXS9:5
A344567.0:2
A344567.0:1
WH 9 YE
+XS13bXS13:7 9 6 RFID_RXD_RS 6 +XS9aXS9:7 RFID_RXD_RS
11p PH 10 X D10 +12V (green) When lit, +12V Supply Voltage ok.
11 7 GND
X D17 -12V (green) When lit, -12V Supply Voltage ok. BU RFID_RST_RS
X 8 RFID_RST_RS 8 +XS9aXS9:8
D12 IMGCTRL_CONFDONE FPGA Configuration done. 9 GND 9 +XS7aXS7:4,+XS7aXS7:12
BK, VT GND
/Upper_tray.4F
Suspension motor (yellow) When lit, FPGA is NOT configured --> ALARM. WH RFIDB_TXD_RS
BU
RD
10 RFIDB_TXD_RS 10 +XS7aXS7:6
D14 UP_LED0 (yellow) Software controllable LED. RD +5V (filtered)
11 +5V (filtered) 11 +XS7aXS7:5
X YE RFIDB_RXD_RS
D15 UP_LED1 (yellow) Software controllable LED. 12 RFIDB_RXD_RS 12 +XS7aXS7:7
X A344556.0 13 GND
X X X X BU
F2 +KEY6 X X +DEV1 14 RFIDB_RST_RS 14 +XS7aXS7:8 RFIDB_RST_RS
2
X X P2 key/P2 DEV/P8 P8 D1 NTRAFFIC (yellow) Network activity. BK GND

15 GND 15 +XS7aXS7:11
X A344567.0 *40/40 *40/40 *40/40 *40/40 D2 NGOOD_LINK (yellow) Network connected. VT XX1 5
5 X 16 XX1 16 +XS8aXS8:10
EE-SX4009-P1 P337808 BU40-IDC-1 BU40-IDC-1 P333509 VT
RD
S22
X
1
Sensor-S22 M DISPLAY CABLE
D3
D4
100MBIT_SPEED (yellow)
IMGCTRL_0 (yellow)
High Speed Network activity (>100Mbit/s)
Software controllable LED.
17
18
DIG_SENSOR25 17
CURR_DIG_SENSOR25 18
+XS8aXS8:5
+XS8aXS8:4
BK
DIG_SENSOR25
CURR_DIG_SENSOR25
/Upper_tray.2F
BK
+XS13bXS13:8 1
2
KEY D13 IMGCTRL_1 (yellow) Software controllable LED. 19 VOS 19 +XS8aXS8:6
RD VOS
+XS13bXS13:9 2 20 A_SPARE2
VT
+XS13bXS13:10 3
3 E-box cooling fan D16 IDE_DASP (yellow) IDE activity.
21 EL_SDA_LINE0
1
2
3
4
BU3-EI D19 CP_ACT_LED (yellow) Disk activity controlled by PORTEX.

22 GND
23 EL_SCL_LINE0
X
24 +5V
A344550.
X
14" suspension position X 25 GND WIRE HARNESS ASSY (CASS ASM)
KEY6 26 EL_SDA_LINE1
P337795
+KEY6
A337163.
27 +5V
1 +12V
4 +12V
BL10
3 +5V
P3
2 GND
X
28 EL_SCL_LINE1
X X VT
X +DEV1 BK
X
X
Key/P3
A343217. SPRING EXTENSIONER (SUS)

BU4-MICFITG1
DEV/P13 P13 30 CURR_DIG_SENSOR15 30 +XS8aXS8:1 DIG_SENSOR15

WH
BU
RD
RD
RD
RD
BK
BK
BK
YE
VT
VT
VT
*68/68 *68/68 31 VOS 31 +XS8aXS8:3 CURR_DIG_SENSOR15

/Upper_tray.2F
ST2x34-AMPLIMITE P316661 32 A_SPARE1 VOS
A3429150. HDD CABLE
DEV/P40:19
DEV/P40:20
DEV/P40:21
DEV/P40:22
DEV/P41:11
DEV/P41:12
DEV/P41:13
DEV/P41:14
DEV/P41:15
DEV/P41:16
DEV/P42:3
DEV/P42:5
BK /Upper_tray.2F
33 GND 33 +XS9aXS9:11
SCSI I/O 2 34 XX3 34 +XS9aXS9:12
VT
GND
DEV/P11:17
DEV/P11:18
BK
DEV/P11:3
DEV/P11:6
35 CURR_DIG_SENSOR26 35 +XS9aXS9:3 XX3

(Cassette) 36 DIG_SENSOR26 36 +XS9aXS9:2
VT
CURR_DIG_SENSOR26
RD 4
4 CONTROL POWER
ST12-70107
37 VOS 37 +XS9aXS9:1
BK
38 CURR_DIG_SENSOR27 38 +XS7aXS7:3
XS12
10
11
12
13
14
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
VT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
BK
BK
RD
YE
10
11
12
X X
RD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
40 VOS 40 +XS7aXS7:1 DIG_SENSOR26
POWER_SHUTDOWN_OC
+XS12b
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
/Lower_tray.4F
BU12-70066
XS12
X ST40-90130 BU40-90142 VOS
ST9-32WLP-SMD
ST14-MINI-FIT-JR
POWER_RESET_OC
+DEV1 CURR_DIG_SENSOR27
REM_ONOFF+
X
REM_ONOFF-
+DEV1
Devil1 DIG_SENSOR27
Power good
SERVICE
P329731
P333247
*11/11
3V3SENSEN
P328352
+DEV1
ETH
+DEV1
CF SLAVE
+DEV1
+DEV1
5VSENSEN
Power fail
3V3SENSE
+XS12bXS12:12
+XS12bXS12:11
*50/50
A342951. PCB Assembly devil
5VSENSE
VOS
P3
/Upper_tray.4F
P24
P18
P_24V
P_24V
*8/8
+12V
+3V3
+3V3
+3V3
+12V
P15
P11
TxD+
X
BL5
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
RxD-
-12V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
X
X
X
IL
S20:2
S20:3
S20:1
M8:5
M8:3
M8:9
M8:7
10
11
12
13
14
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
S3:3
S3:2
S3:1
BU14-MINI-FIT-JR
BU22-MINI-FIT-JR
X
X
X
X
DEV/P15
DEV/P11
X
External RS232 External Ethernet External Compact-Flash

BU
BK
BK
BK
BK
VT
VT
RD
RD
RD
WH
YE
X
RD
BK
BK
YE
PS/P1:17,Key/P3:1
PS/P1:18,Key/P3:2
X
X
EE-SX4009-P1 Service Port Connection Card Connection
Sensor-S20
PS/P1:17
PS/P1:18
PS/P1:6
PS/P1:3
S20
PS/P2:10
PS/P2:11
PS/P2:12
PS/P2:13
PS/P2:14
PS/P2:15
PS/P1:10
PS/P1:11
PS/P1:12
PS/P1:13
PS/P1:14
PS/P1:15
PS/P1:16
PS/P1:19
PS/P1:20
PS/P1:21
PS/P1:22
Key/P3:3
Key/P3:4
RD 1
PS/P2:1
PS/P2:2
PS/P2:3
PS/P2:4
PS/P2:5
PS/P2:6
PS/P2:7
PS/P2:9
PS/P1:1
PS/P1:2
PS/P1:4
PS/P1:5
PS/P1:7
PS/P1:8
PS/P1:9
+XS12bXS12:7 1
BK 2
ST2x34-AMPLIMITE
+XS12bXS12:5 2
VT 3
+XS12bXS12:6 3
BU3-EI
BN
BN
BN
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BU
BU
BU
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
VT
VT
RD
RD
RD
4p disk drive
GN
WH
WH
GY
GY
OG
OG
OG
*68/68
BK, BK
BU55
YE, YE
3 3
X
X
HD
X
X
X
+12V 1
GND 2
GND 3
+5V 4
X
Take over film transport detection
+Harddisk
+Harddisk
KH42KM2-851
*68/68
X
P316661
ST1
BU1
X
Motor-M8 1 X A344557. WIRE HARNESS ASSY (PS-DEV) A340645.0

2 X
M8 PS CONTROL CABLE
A 3 RD
M 4
3 +XS12bXS12:2
A347060. WIRE HARNESS ASSY
A 5 BU
5 +XS12bXS12:1
6
7 YE
1
2
3
4
B B 7 +XS12bXS12:4
(GEAR BOX)
RING-TERM-2.5-3.6
9 WH
Safety_Ground
9 +XS12bXS12:3
10 11p PH
BK, BK
YE, YE
GNYE
11 WH
WH
BN
GN
BN
BN
OG
OG
OG
RD
RD
BU
RD
BU
BU
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
BK
GY
GY
VT
VT
1/1
Film transport motor
Safety_Ground:1
X
X
HD:4
HD:3
DEV/P15:10
DEV/P15:11
DEV/P15:12
DEV/P15:13
DEV/P15:14
DEV/P11:10
DEV/P11:11
DEV/P11:12
DEV/P11:13
DEV/P11:14
DEV/P11:15
DEV/P11:16
DEV/P11:19
DEV/P11:20
DEV/P11:21
DEV/P11:22
DEV/P15:1
DEV/P15:2
DEV/P15:3
DEV/P15:4
DEV/P15:5
DEV/P15:6
DEV/P15:7
DEV/P15:8
DEV/P15:9
DEV/P11:1
DEV/P11:2
DEV/P11:4
DEV/P11:5
DEV/P11:7
DEV/P11:8
DEV/P11:9
DEV/P11:17,HD:1
DEV/P11:18,HD:2
Omron EE-SX4009-P1 X
A339843. X
+PS
X
X
Mates with receptacle X BU16-MINI-FIT-JR
P1 IFE#4
BU22-MINI-FIT-JR
X 1/4 OG
AMP EI 3 pos. IDC EE-SX4009-P1 1 +XS4aXS4:7
2 X 2/4 RD 2
S3 Sensor-S3 2 +XS4aXS4:8
RD 1 3/4 BK
3 +XS4aXS4:9
PS/P2
PS/P1
+XS12bXS12:10 1 X 4/4 WH
BK 2 4 +XS4aXS4:10
+XS12bXS12:9 2
GND 10
GND 11
+5V 12
RxD- 13
TxD+ 14
GND 15
Prot. earth 16
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
X
X
X
X
+PS ST4-MO53261-SMD
HARDDISK 18GB
REM_ONOFF+ 1
REM_ONOFF- 2
GND 3
POWER_RESET_OC 4
5 POWER_SHUTDOWN_OC 5
IL 6
P_24V 7
P_24V 9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
VT 3 BU4-51021
+XS12bXS12:8 3
+3V3
+3V3
+3V3
+12V
X
+5V
+5V
+5V
Power fail
Prot. earth
Power good
-12V
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+PS1
+PS1
3V3SENSE
5VSENSE
3V3SENSEN
5VSENSEN
A5
P328352
P2
P1
X
X
BU3-EI-IDC
ST16-MINI-FIT-JR
X
ULTRASTAR 73LZX X X
Output 1:
Output 2:
3,3V (+/-5%) 4,5A
5V (+/-5%) 3A - 4A
X
X +PS1 Thermal head Output 3: +12V (+/-2%) 1,25A
Transport roller open detection X
PS/P3 P3
Harddisk 1/12 1/12 Output 4: -12V (+/-2%) 0,15A eLabel pcb Address #4
A336045.0 2/12 2/12 Output 5: 24V (+/-5%) 4,0A
3/12 3/12
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Output 6: 13 .. 27V (+/-5mV) 300W
Led on: Overtemperature protection mode.
4/12 4/12
5/12 5/12 CPU/Power supply control CPU/Display power
6/12 6/12
A345482. ASSY GEAR BOX (VAL)
Replace power supply instead.
Replace power supply instead.

7/12 7/12
Do not replace this fuse.1

8/12 8/12
Led on: Output 6 enabled
Do not replace this fuse.

A344554. TPH POWER CABLE
Overtemperature (red)
9/12 Mains 100V .. 240V

Led on: Output 1 OK.

We reserve all rights in this document and in the informa-
tion contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure
10/12 50-60Hz
13..27V (green)
X
to third parties without express authority is strictly
11/12 11/12
-12V (green)
3,3V (green)
12V (green)
24V (green)
+PS1
5V (green)
12/12 12/12 appliance_inlet

1 BU12-MICFITG 1/3
2/3 X X X X DATE NAME
2 x 15AF 3/3 WIRING DIAGRAM DS5302 Project
X X X X USER 27/11/2003 L.Tibos
X
X
MAIN PAGE 5366
A344179. RIVETED FRAME (FRA) X
IEC 320/C14 X X X X APPR.
WIRING_DIAGRAM / 100
Power Supply (ELE)
X X X X X NORM Sheet name:
PS1
Sheet 21
forbidden.
A333840. POWER SUPPLY (ELE) X X X X

F1006049.1
© AGFA
X
X X X L.Tibos of 98 SH
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O IDX Change-NR DATE NAMEF 03-2011for Edition
Replacement G 1,X Revision 1 Document Node ID: 19886546
X
X
$ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3 4
7+(50$/+($'$66< ;
;
26+ ; ; $1$,6$*;
; ;
0DWVXVKLWD
2YHUKHDW
;
; $ 6HQVRU6

6
;6D;6
5'
97
((6;3
6HQVRU6
;
;
6
;
;
VHQVRU $
&$%/('+($7(5)2,/ (/(

%8(,
;6D;6
;6D;6
%.

'(93
'(93
5'
%.
97
;
6
'(93 ; ;
%1 %8 ; ;
%8(,
; ;
6 6

; ;6D ;6E
; ,QSXWVHQVRU73+ %.
;6 ;6 %.
PPLVRODWLRQ FOHDU

PPLVRODWLRQ FOHDU
7KHUPDO3ULQW+HDG
6 '(93
97
6 '(93
97 73+KRPHSRVLWLRQ
6HQVRU6
5'
6 '(93
5' 7RSFRYHUFORVHGGHWHFWLRQ
%. %.
6 '(93
97 97
6 '(93

5' 5'
6 '(93
97 %.
;6D;6 '(93
; $:,5(+$51(66$66< 97
;6D;6 '(93
97
; ; $ ;
; %5$&.(7 67(, %8(,
3
73+
9FRPPRQ
; 73+

,)( 67
73+

73+
$7KHUPDO+HDG$VVHPEO\

;
3
73+
2*
3
%/
;
;6D;6
3
;
9
;
5'
;6D;6 26+ ; ;
%. ; 2XWSXWBDVP+
;6D;6 6HQVRU6 6
7+3
;
;
:+ ; JST VH connector JST VH connector

7+3

7+3
%8,'&
$:,5(+$51(66$66< 287387 ;6 ;6
;
;

;
;6D;6 156" board-in 156" board-in 5'
670260' 73+ ;6D;6
%8 ; crimp style 10pos. crimp style 2pos. 97
;6D;6
5'
5'
%1
%8
$ %.
; ;6D;6
%8(,
6HQVRU6
6HQVRU6
;
;
363
363
H/DEHOSFE$GGUHVV ,QSXWVHQVRU73+ $:,5(+$51(66$66< (1*,1(
670,1,),7-5 %80,1,),7-5

%.
5'
;6D ;6E
;
;

6%5$&.(7$60
;
;
$7+32:(5&$%/(
:+
:+
:+
2*
2*
%.
5'
%.
5'
5'
97
%.
5'
97
%.
97
%.
5'
97
%.
5'
97
%.
5'
97
%.
5'
97
%.
5'
97
%.
5'
%.
%.
97
%.
<(
%.
97
97
%.
97
5'
%.
%1
%1
%1
%8
%8
%8
26%3
26%3
26%3
26%3
;6D;6
;6E;6
;6E;6
;6E;6
;6E;6
;6E;6
;6E;6
;6E;6
;6D;6
;6D;6
6
6
;6D;6
;6D;6
;6D;6
;6D;6
;6D;6
;6D;6
;6D;6
;6D;6
;6D;6
;6D;6
;6D;6
;6D;6
;6D;6
;6D;6
;6D;6
;6D;6
'(93
'(93
;6D;6
6
;6D;6
;6D;6
;6D;6
;6D;6
;6D;6
;6D;6
;6D;6
;6D;6
;6E;6
;6D;6
;6D;6
;6D;6
;6D;6
;6D;6
;6D;6
;6D;6
;6D;6
6
6
$:,5(+$51(66$66< (1*,1(
;
5'
5'
%1
%8
8SSHUBSLFNXS)
73+IDQ ,QWHUQDO&RPSDFW)ODVK ;6
%8
%8
&DUG&RQQHFWLRQ
'(93
'(93
$26%+($7(5&$%/(
;
;
;
;

;
'&0B287B%
'&0B287B%
&B2'0B0B6(/B$B%)
&B2'0B0B6(/B%B%)
',*B6(1625B,
',*B6(1625B,
,B',*B6(1625
',*B6(1625B,
,B',*B6(1625
',*B6(1625B,
,B',*B6(1625
',*B6(1625B,
,B',*B6(1625
',*B6(1625B,
>@
6'$
6&/
&211B2'0B&2817
&B2'0B%/B&75/B%)
(/B6'$B/,1(
6$)(7<B2.
'&0B287B$
'&0B287B$
926
926
926
926
926
926
926
926
9
(/B6&/B/,1(
3B9
3B9
',*B6(1625B,
,B',*B6(1625
',*B6(1625B,
,B',*B6(1625
',*B6(1625B,
,B',*B6(1625
',*B6(1625B,
-$0B&/($5
*1'
*1'
*1'
*1'
*1'
*1'
*1'
*1'
*1'
&B2'0B,B6(/B$B%)
&B2'0B,B6(/B%B%)
9
9
9
$
0
SRO0ROH[
$
$
;
3
;
3
S0
%DWWHU\&OLS
3
3
$
3
;
$
>@
S([WUDFWRU
7+ ;
$
;
;
; $ 3 '(93
8
;
; ; %.
*1' '(93

) ; $ %.
; '(93 3 ',*B6(1625B, '(93
<(/
;
%8,'&
>@
3 7+ 1&

1&

*<
73+'$7$&$%/( '&0B287B$ ;6E;6
/'
&)
26%
%1
; ;
,2 &)0$67(5 &'0
'&0B287B% ;6E;6
5'
%8
:+ ;
; $ '&0B287B$ ;6E;6 /RZHUBSLFNXS)
'(93 3 %1
%. '&0B287B% ;6E;6
;6
$
$
'(93 *1' %8
; ; %. '&0B287B$ ;6E;6
26% '(93 ',*B6(1625B, %1
; %1 '&0B287B% ;6E;6
26%3 3 ;6E;6 *1' '&0B287B$ ;6D;6
5'
5' %. %.
%80,1,),7-5
;6D ;6E;6 &211B;; '&0B287B% ;6D;6

5' 97 5'
;6D ;6D;6 ',*B6(1625B, '&0B287B$ ;6D;6
%8 %. %.
;6D ;6D;6 ,B',*B6(1625
) )DQ)
'&0B287B% ;6D;6
%1
;6D
5'
;6D;6 926 %8

670B287B% ;6D;6
'(9,86
3 97
;
;
%80,1,),7-5 ;6D;6 ',*B6(1625B, 5'

%. 670B287B$ ;6D;6
;6D;6 ,B',*B6(1625 :+
6REVROHWH
;
;
670,1,),7-5
; 5' 670B287B% ;6D;6

6:B)(7B67$786B, ;6D;6 926 <(
,B',*B6(1625
',*B6(1625B,
; %. 670B287B$ ;6D;6
; ;6D;6 ,B',*B6(1625 %8
67 670B287B% ;6D;6
&211B1
&211B1
97
3
3
26% ;6D;6 ',*B6(1625B, 5'
26%
26%
$26%SFE 5' 670B287B$ ;6D;6
26%
:+ ;
3
3
;6D;6 926

1(7
%/ 670B287B% ;6D;6 3XPSB B9DOYHVBDVP(
;
97
*1'
*1'
3
<(
'(93
'(93
;6D;6 ',*B6(1625B, 670B287B$ ;6D;6

;
;
%.
5'
;6D;6 ,B',*B6(1625 '&0B287B$B),/ )
5' ;6
%8
%8
;
;
26%3
;6D;6 926 '&0B287B% )

*< 97
26%3 6:B)(7B67$786B, ',*B6(1625B, ;6D;6
5,1*7(50
5,1*7(50

;
;
;
;
26%3
26%3
%1
5'
%8
26%3 &211B1 *1'

%.
$:,5(+$51(66$66< (1*,1(
26%3 1(7 926
%. 97
26%3 *1'
'(93
'(93
'(93
'(93
'(93
'(93
',*B6(1625B, ;6D;6
'(93
'(93
0B63$5( ,B',*B6(1625
%8
26%3 &211B1 926
1& %.
%. *1' ;6D;6
26%3 *1' 2*
$:,5(+$51(66$66< (1*,1( (/B6'$B/,1( ;6D;6
%.
97
%.
%.
%.
%1
%8
*<
97
%.
;6D;6
;6D;6

',*B6(1625B,
,B',*B6(1625

,2 9 ;6D;6
5'
:+
5' (/B6&/B/,1( ;6D;6
;6D;6 926 67 %8 ;
97 3XPSB B9DOYHVBDVP(
; ;6D;6 ',*B6(1625B,
%.
; 5'
;6D;6 ,B',*B6(1625 ;6
0 ;6D;6 926 ; ;
; ; 3.$ 97
1& /('IXQFWLRQVRQ7\QGDOO $
3
;
'(93
; ; 0RWRU0 26%3 ',*B6(1625B, %.
0 %. *1' '(93
0 26%3 ,B',*B6(1625 %.
%. %. ,2 ',*B6(1625B, '(93
0
'(93 %8 926 %.
67(3B6,1B$ 0
<( 67 /'9 JUHHQ PHPRU\ *1
67(3B6,1B% 0
5'
*1
'(93 *1 /'9 JUHHQ &38FRUHYROWDJH 67(3B&26B$ 0
%8
; 5' ; ; /'9 JUHHQ 67(3B&26B% 0
'(93 ; $ 5'
;
%.
'(93 3 /'9 JUHHQ '&0B287B$B),/ )
%8
0RWRU9'& '&0B287B% )
0RWRU0 ;
%.
'(93 *1' /'/LWGXULQJ6WDUWXSXQWLO'U\WDUDSSOLFDWLRQVWDUWV 5'
%8 926 ;6D;6
;
0 '(93
67
5' :+ %8 %.
'(93 ',*B6(1625B, :KHQIODVKLQJ VRQVRII !)DLOXUH ,B',*B6(1625 ;6D;6
%.
5' 5' %81 ;6D;6 *1' 97
0
'(93 ',*B6(1625B, ;6D;6
%. %. *1'
'(93 97 *1'
%8 ;6D;6 ',*B6(1625B,
%. 9
2* 2* ;6D;6 ,B',*B6(1625
'(93 926 '&0B(1&
<( <( 97
'(93 ;6D;6 ',*B6(1625B, '&0B287B%
%8 %8
'(93 ,B',*B6(1625 '&0B287B$
67(, 926 '&0B(1&
2*
; ,B',*B6(1625 9 0
; ',*B6(1625B, 9
%8
$73+32:(5&$%/(
; ((6;3 *1' 0

926
73+SRVLWLRQLQJPRWRU ;
6 6HQVRU6 ',*B6(1625B, *1'
5' <(
'(93 ,B',*B6(1625 '&0B(1& 0
%. 5'
'(93 926 '&0B287B$B),/ 0
97 %.
'(93 ',*B6(1625B, '&0B287B% 0
%8(, ,B',*B6(1625 *1'
97
; 926 ',*B6(1625B, ;6D;6
; ',*B6(1625B, 926
; ((6;3 926
; ,B',*B6(1625 97
5'
6
6HQVRU6 3ULQWGUXPGULYH 926 ',*B6(1625B, ;6D;6
;6E;6 *1' ,B',*B6(1625
%. 2*
;6E;6 ',*B6(1625B, (/B6'$B/,1( ;6D;6
97 %.
;6E;6 ,B',*B6(1625 *1' ;6D;6
%8(, 926 ,2

(/B6&/B/,1(
9

;6D;6
;6D;6
:+
5'
67 97
; ;
$:,5(+$51(66$66< (1*,1(
',*B6(1625B, ;6D;6
;6D ;6E %.
;6 ;6 ,B',*B6(1625 ;6D;6
5'
%8
5' 5' 5'

'(93 6 VXVSHQVLRQSRVLWLRQ ' :KHQOLW96XSSO\9ROWDJHRN 926 ;6D;6
97
%. %. 9
,2 ',*B6(1625B, 6
.H\
'(93
'(93
'(93 6 *51 %.

97 97 ,B',*B6(1625 6
'(93 6 5'
5' 5' 926 6
%8
'(93 0
%8
; '
3B9
:KHQOLW96XSSO\9ROWDJHRN S0 %8
'(93 0 ; *51
<( <( .+.0
'(93 0
:+ :+ ; 0RWRU0
5'
'(93 0
5' ;
' :KHQOLW96XSSO\9ROWDJHRN
%8(, 67(,
0 9
%.
'(93 6
%. $:,5(+$51(66$66< 5' $ *51 ; ;
0
)DQ) )
;
;
'(93 6 ;6E;6 $ ;

635,1*(;7

97 97
'(93 6 ' :KHQOLW96XSSO\9ROWDJHRN 3 '(93
;
;
97 %. %8 $ 9 %.
'(93 ;6E;6 ;6E;6 *51 *1' '(93
%. %. %.
'(93 ;6E;6 ',*B6(1625B, '(93
<( %. ;
67 %8 ;6E;6
% % '
9
:KHQOLW96XSSO\9ROWDJHRN *1' ;6D;6
:+ ;
*51 &B5),'$B7;'B56 ;6D;6
:+ 5'
$
$
;
;6E;6 &211B1 ;6D;6
<( ;
S3+

'
9
:KHQOLW9)3*$FRUHYROWDJHRN &B5),'$B5;'B56 ;6D;6
; ; *51 *1'
%8 ;
; $ &B5),'$B567B56 ;6D;6
'(93 %.97
6XVSHQVLRQPRWRU 3 ;
5'
%8
*1' ;6D;6;6D;6 8SSHUBWUD\)
;

%8,'&

3:$//%2;('0$/((;77+ .(<

&B5),'%B7;'B56
&211B1

;6D;6
;6D;6
:+
5'
;
;
<( ;
; $ &B5),'%B5;'B56 ;6D;6
; ;
) .(< ; *1'
%8

; ' ;
NH\3 )3*$B&21),*B'21(

; 3 &21),*B'21(
&B5),'%B567B56 ;6D;6
%. ;
; $ 5(' *1' ;6D;6
; 97
0
((6;3 3 %8,'& ;
; &211B;; ;6D;6
97
5'
6
6HQVRU6 ',63/$<&$%/( ' ',*B6(1625B, ;6D;6
%.
;
;
;6E;6 0B/(' ,B',*B6(1625 ;6D;6 8SSHUBWUD\)
%. <(/ 5' ;
;6E;6 926 ;6D;6
97
;6E;6
(ER[FRROLQJIDQ ' $B63$5(

%8(, 0B/(' (/B6'$B/,1(

<(/
*1'
;
;
'
)3*$B/('
,2 (/B6&/B/,1( $
VXVSHQVLRQSRVLWLRQ ; <(/ 9 :,5(+$51(66$66< &$66$60
.(< &DVVHWWH *1'
3
$
.(<
' (/B6'$B/,1(
%/ )3*$B/('
3
*1'
*1'
9
9
;
<(/
9
(/B6&/B/,1(
97
635,1*(;7(16,21(5 686
' ',*B6(1625B, ;6D;6
.H\3
;
;
%80,&),7*
:+
%. ;
5'
<(
%.
97
5'
97
%.
5'
%.
97
%8
)3*$B/(' ,B',*B6(1625 ;6D;6

<(/ 5' ;
926 ;6D;6 8SSHUBWUD\)
;
'(93
'(93
'(93
'(93
'(93
'(93
'(93
'(93
8SSHUBWUD\)
'(93
'(93
'(93
'(93
/' $B63$5(
)3*$B&21)B'21( %.
<(/ *1' ;6D;6 ;
'(93
'(93
97
'(93
'(93
; ; &211B;; ;6D;6 ;
%.
,B',*B6(1625 ;6D;6
&)$&7
; $
&21752/ 32:(5 6(59,&( (7+ &)6/$9(
'
'
'
/'
97 ;
6$7$B3 3
)
75$)
',*B6(1625B, ;6D;6
0
67
/,1.
6$7$
9
5'
926 ;6D;6
P$)$67
;6 ;6
SRO 3,16$7$ %.
%.
%.
<(
5'
,B',*B6(1625 ;6D;6
3LQ6XE'*U0$/(7+

97
;

',*B6(1625B, ;6D;6

$:,5(+$51(66$66< (1*,1(
<(/
<(/
<(/
<(/

5' ;
/' /RZHUBWUD\)

926 ;6D;6
%8
;6E
936B32:B5(6(7B2&
;
6$7$ ;
; <(/ S0 %8
936B6+87'2:1B
; ;
S0LQL)LW-U0
936B96(16(1
S0LQL)LW-U0
936B96(16(
; ;
5(0B212))
5(0B212))
3
96(16(1
'HYLXV
936B1
3
936B7;'
96(16(
936B5;'
936B1
;
;6E;6
3
;6E;6
'HYLXVH[ 8SSHUBWUD\)
$
$
3
>@
>@
936B,/
3
$
3B9
3B9
%/
3
$:,5(+$51(66$66< 36'(9
;
$
$
3
*1'
*1'
*1'
*1'
*1'
*1'
*1'
*1'
*1'
*1'
*1'
9
*1'
>@
;
9
9
9
9
;
;
9
9
9
9
0
0
0
0
6
6
6

%80,1,),7-5
%80,1,),7-5
'(93
'(93
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
([WHUQDO56 ([WHUQDO(WKHUQHW ([WHUQDO&RPSDFW)ODVK
;
;
;
97
%.
%.
%.
5'
<(
5'
%8
:+
6HUYLFH3RUW &RQQHFWLRQ &DUG&RQQHFWLRQ
363.H\3
363.H\3

363
363
363
363
363
363
363
363
363
363
363
363
363
363
363
363
363
.H\3
.H\3
363
363
363
363
363
363
363
363
363
363
363
363
363
363
363
3
2*
2*
2*
*1
%.
%.
%.
%.
%.
%.
%.
%.
%.
97
%.
%.
%.
%.
97
%.
%.
%.
5'
5'
5'
<(
%1
%1
%1
*<
*<
:+
%8
%8
%8
:+
6 6
6$7$+$5'',6.
;
6< ;
6 6
$:,5(+$51(66$66<
; 6 6
; 6 6 ;
6< ;
.+.0 6 6
0RWRU0 ; 6 6
; $

0 6 6 36&21752/&$%/(
$ 5'
0
*($5%2;
;6E;6 3 3
3 3
$
;6E;6
%8 3 3 $3LQ0ROH[WR6$7$3RZHUDQG'DWD&DEOH
3 3
<( 3 3
% % ;6E;6
3 3 ; ;
5,1*7(50
:+ ; ;
6DIHW\B*URXQG

;6E;6 3 3 67 +'
*1<(
S3+ 3 3 <( <(
33 363 :+
:+
2*
2*
2*
%. %.
*<
*<
*1
%.
%.
%.
%.
%.
%.
5'
5'
5'
%.
%.
%.
97
%.
%.
%.
%.
97
%.
<(
%.
%.

%1
%1
%1
%8
%8
%8
3 3
33 363
3 3 %. %.
)LOPWUDQVSRUWPRWRU $6HDJDWH6$7$+DUGGLVN*% 33 363

;
;
5' 5'
'(93
'(93
'(93
'(93
'(93
'(93
'(93
'(93
'(93
'(93
'(93
'(93
'(93
6DIHW\B*URXQG
'(93
'(93
'(93+'
'(93
'(93
'(93
'(93
'(93
'(93
'(93
'(93
'(93
'(93
'(93
'(93
'(93
'(93
+'
+'
'(93+'
'(93
'(93
'(93
3 3
Omron EE-SX4009-P1 ;
$6HDJDWH6$7$+DUGGLVN*% 3 3
33
670DWH1/RN

SGLVNGULYH
363
$ ;
36
;
;
3 3
; RUHTXLYDOHQWW\SH %80,1,),7-5
3 ,)(
%80,1,),7-5
Mates with receptacle 3 3 2*
; ((6;3 ;6D;6
AMP EI 3 pos. IDC ; 3 3 5'
6HQVRU6 ;6D;6
5'
6 ; 0+ 0+ %.
;6D;6
363
363
;6E;6 ; 0+ 0+ ; :+
%. ; ;6D;6
;6E;6
;
;
;
;
6+ 6+ 36 670260'

97 6$7$B+''

;6E;6 6+ 6+ ; %8
$
936B6+87'2:1B
3URWHDUWK
3URWHDUWK
936B1
936B96(16(
9
9
9
936B7;'
96(16(
936B96(16(1
9
5(0B212))
936B5;'
96(16(1
936B1
9
936B,/
3B9
3B9
*1'
*1'
*1'
*1'
*1'
*1'
*1'
*1'
*1'
*1'
*1'
*1'
5(0B212))
936B32:B5(6(7B2&
9
9
9
9
%8(,,'& %/ $
670,1,),7-5
3
36
36
;
3
;
3
6$7$&20%5(&(37&/( ;
2XWSXW9 $
; ; 2XWSXW9 $$
363
; 36 7KHUPDOKHDG 2XWSXW9 $
7UDQVSRUWUROOHURSHQGHWHFWLRQ
/HGRQ2YHUWHPSHUDWXUHSURWHFWLRQPRGH
3
2XWSXW9 $ H/DEHOSFE$GGUHVV
2XWSXW9 $

2XWSXW9 P9 :

5HSODFHSRZHUVXSSO\LQVWHDG
5HSODFHSRZHUVXSSO\LQVWHDG
&383RZHUVXSSO\FRQWURO &38'LVSOD\SRZHU
/HGRQ2XWSXWHQDEOHG
'RQRWUHSODFHWKLVIXVH

$66<*($5%2; 9$/
'RQRWUHSODFHWKLVIXVH

2YHUWHPSHUDWXUH UHG
/HGRQ2XWSXW2.
/HGRQ2XWSXW2.
/HGRQ2XWSXW2.
/HGRQ2XWSXW2.
/HGRQ2XWSXW2.

$73+32:(5&$%/( 0DLQV99
9 JUHHQ
:HUHVHUYHDOOULJKWVLQWKLVGRFXPHQWDQGLQWKHLQIRUPD
+]
WLRQFRQWDLQHGWKHUHLQ5HSURGXFWLRQXVHRUGLVFORVXUH
9 JUHHQ
9 JUHHQ
9 JUHHQ
9 JUHHQ
;
9 JUHHQ

WRWKLUGSDUWLHVZLWKRXWH[SUHVVDXWKRULW\LVVWULFWO\
36
DSSOLDQFHBLQOHW
%80,&),7*
; ; ; ; '$7( 1$0(
[$) :,5,1*',$*5$0'6 3URMHFW
; ; ; ; 86(5 /7LERV
;
;
,(&& ; ; ; ; $335
0$,13$*(
3RZHU6XSSO\ (/(
;
; ; ; ; ; 1250 6KHHWQDPH :,5,1*B',$*5$0
36
$32:(56833/< (/( 6KHHW
)
; ; ; ;
IRUELGGHQ
$*)$
;
; ; ; /7LERV RI 9 6+
$ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 ,'; &KDQJH15 '$7( )
1$0( 5HSODFHPHQWIRU
03-2011 Edition * 1,;Revision 1 Document Node ID: 19886546
;
;
;
$ % & ' ( )
$
; %
$ 0 $ /DVW
0 00 &LUFXLW
5'
0 ;6;6;6
;6;6;6
%. %
%802'8B,,
6702'8B,, )LUVW&LUFXLW
;
;6 ;6D
; 5'
;6;6 ;6 %.
$ 66 000 '(93
66 6666 %.
000 '(93
5'
%. %. %.
;6;6;6 666666 '(93
5' 5' 5'
;6;6;6 666666 '(93
97 97 97
;6;6;6 666666 '(93
%8 %8 97
; %802'8B,,

6702'8B,,
;6;6;6 $3,&.83&$%/( 2*
666666 '(93
2*
/RZHUB38,)( '(93,)(,)(
; 5' 5' :,5,1*B',$*5$03
; /RZHUB38,)( '(93,)(,)( ;
%. %.
$ /RZHUB38,)( '(93,)(,)(
$),/03,&.83$66< :+ :+
/RZHUB38,)( '(93,)(,)(
:+ 5'
666 '(93
*1 97
666 '(93
%.%1 %.
;6;6;6666 '(93
)LOPHQWQDPH(LQKHLW %.
;6;6;6 '(93
97
%80,1,),7 670,1,),7

; 'UDZHU&RQQHFWRU
; /RZHUB38
,)( 2*
;6;6;6
5'
;6;6;6
%.
;6;6;6
; :+
;6;6;6
; 670260'
; %8
$
$
%/
H/DEHOSFE$GGUHVV

;
;
((6;3 ;
6
6HQVRU6 66
:+
;6;6;6
%1
;6;6;6
*1
;6;6;6
%8(,
/RZHU3LFNXSSDVWGHWHFWLRQ

; ; ; ; '$7( 1$0(
:,5,1*',$*5$0'6 3URMHFW
; ; ; ; 86(5 ;
/2:(53,&.83$60
/2:(53,&.83$66<
; ; ; ; $335
; ; ; ; 1250 6KHHWQDPH /RZHUBSLFNXS
6KHHW
)
; ; ; ;
IRUELGGHQ
;
$*)$
; ; ; ; ; RI 9 6+
$ % & ,'; &KDQJH15 '$7( 1$0( 5HSODFHPHQWIRU
03-2011 Edition 1,;Revision 1 Document Node ID: 19886546
;
$ % & ' ( )
;
;
((6;3 ;
6
6HQVRU6 66
5'
;6;6;6
%.
;6;6;6
97
;6;6;6
%8(,
; ;
; ; /RZHUPDJD]LQHHPSW\GHWHFWLRQ ;6 ;6D
5) 5) 5'
;6;6 ;6 5'
67 5)67 666 '(93 ;
%. 97 97 ;
;6;6;6 666 '(93 :,5,1*B',$*5$02
5' %. %. ;
;6;6;6 666 '(93
; :+ %. %. ;
;6;6;6 5)5)67 '(93
5) <( 5' 5' ;
;6;6;6 5)5)67 '(93
; %8 :+ :+ ;
$ ;6;6;6 5)5)67 '(93
670260' <( <( ;
$ %8 5)5)67 '(93
%/ %8 %8 ;
5)5)67 '(93
; ;
; ;
$:,5(+$51(66$66< 75$< ;
; ;
;
5),'7$*5($'(5 38 %.
%.
;6;6;6 '(93
%.
97
;
;
;6;6;6 '(93
%8 %8
$
:,5(+$51(66$66< &$66$60
&RQQHFWLRQEHWZHHQDVVHPEOLHV
0O[5HFHSWDFOH+RXVLQJ
0DWHVZLWK0O['UDZHUFRQQHFWRU


; ; ; ; '$7( 1$0(
:,5,1*',$*5$0'6 3URMHFW
; ; ; ; 86(5 ;
/2:(575$<$60 ; ; ; ; $335
/2:(575$<$60
; ; ; ; 1250 6KHHWQDPH /RZHUBWUD\
6KHHW
)
; ; ; ;
IRUELGGHQ
$*)$
; ; ; ; RI 9 6+
$ % & ,'; &KDQJH15 '$7( 1$0( 5HSODFHPHQWIRU ;
03-2011 Edition 1, Revision 1 Document Node ID: 19886546
$ % & ' ( ) * +
RXWSXW
26+ ;
;
6 6
5'
;6E;6
97
;6E;6
%.
;6E;6
%8(,

RXWSXW
2XWSXWVHQVRU73+ ((6;3
;
6 6
5'
;6E;6
%.
;6E;6
97
;6E;6
%8(,
2XWSXWUROOHUVKRPHSRVLWLRQ RXWSXW
RXWSXW &DEOHGPRWRU9'&
&DEOHGPRWRU9'& 0
0 ; ;6E ;6D
0 ;6 ;6
0 5'
;
0
;6E;6
5' 0 5'
%8

;6E;6
;6E;6
5'
%1
%.
97
6
6

'(93
'(93
%.
97
%8 %1 5' 5'
;6E;6 67(, 6 '(93
5' 5'
67(, 6 '(93
%. %.
6 '(93
97 97
6 '(93
5' 5'
'HQVLWRPHWHUPRWRU %1
0 '(93
%1
([LWUROOHUPRWRU $ ; 5'
0 '(93
5'
RXWSXW RXWSXW 0 '(93
67 %1 %1
,)( 2* 2*
0 '(93
2*
;6E;6 RXWSXW,)( '(93
5' 5' 5'
;6E;6 RXWSXW,)( '(93
%. %. %.
;6E;6 RXWSXW,)( '(93
; :+ :+ :+
;6E;6 RXWSXW,)( '(93
RXWSXW 670260'
; %8
$
;
$:,5(+$51(66$66< 287387$60
%. 97
;6E;6 ;6D;6
%. 97
;6E;6 '(93
%8 67
H/DEHOSFE$GGUHVV

;
:,5,1*B',$*5$03
$:,5(+$51(66$66< 287387
;
&'0 RXWSXW ;6E ;6D
3 3 ;6 ;6
<( <( <(
;6E;6 RXWSXW3 '(93
%. %. %.
;6E;6 RXWSXW3 '(93
:+ :+ :+
;6E;6 RXWSXW3 '(93
%8 %8 %8
;6E;6 RXWSXW3 '(93
97 97 97
;6E;6 RXWSXW3 '(93
%8 %8 %8
;6E;6 RXWSXW3 '(93
97 97 97
;6E;6 RXWSXW3 '(93
%8 %8 %8
;6E;6 RXWSXW3 '(93
97 97 97
;6E;6 RXWSXW3 '(93
%. %. %.
;6E;6 RXWSXW3 '(93
2* 2* 2*
;6E;6 RXWSXW3 '(93
:+ :+ :+
;6E;6 RXWSXW3 '(93
5' 5' 5'
;6E;6 RXWSXW3 '(93
%. %. %.
&RQQHFWLRQDGMXVWPHQW
;6E;6 RXWSXW3 '(93
670260' 5' 5'
%8 6 '(93
97 97

;
&'0
3
RXWSXW
3
$:,5(+$51(66$66< 287387$60 %.
%.
6
6
6

'(93
'(93
'(93
%.
%.
RQ;6SLQSRV
<( 97 97
RXWSXW/('3
;
FGPSFE RXWSXW/('3
%8 5'
6 '(93
5'
%. RXWSXWDVP 6 '(93
; RXWSXW/('3 ; %. 97
:+ ((6; ;6E;6 ;6D;6
; RXWSXW/('3 ; %. %.
&'0 670260' 6HQVRU6 6 ;6E;6 '(93
; %8 5' %8 67
;6E;6

/
97
;6E;6
%.
;6E;6
%8((
; ;
&'0/(' RXWSXW
3 /('3
RXWSXW3
<( 'HQVLWRPHWHUKRPHSRVLWLRQ
%8
RXWSXW3
%.
RXWSXW3
:+
RXWSXW3
670260'
%8 RXWSXWDVP
26+ ;
;
;FGPOHGSFE
6HQVRU6 6
5'
; ;6E;6
97
; ;6E;6
&'0/(' %.
;6E;6
;
%/ %8(,
2XWSXWVHQVRU

; ; ; ; '$7( 1$0(
:,5,1*',$*5$0'6 3URMHFW
; ; ; ; 86(5 /7LERV
287387$60 up to SN 1519
287387$60
; ; ; ; $335
; ; ; ; 1250 6KHHWQDPH 2XWSXWBDVP
6KHHW
IRUELGGHQ
)
; ; ; ;
$*)$
; ; ; ; RI 9 6+
$ % & ' ( ) ,'; &KDQJH15 '$7( 1$0( 5HSODFHPHQWIRU
03-2011 Edition 1, ;
Revision 1 Document Node ID: 19886546
$ % & ' ( ) * +
RXWSXW
26+ ;
;
6 6
5'
;6E;6
97
;6E;6
%.
;6E;6
%8(,

RXWSXW
2XWSXWVHQVRU73+ ((6;3
;
6 6
5'
;6E;6
%.
;6E;6
97
;6E;6
%8(,
2XWSXWUROOHUVKRPHSRVLWLRQ RXWSXW
RXWSXW &DEOHGPRWRU9'&
&DEOHGPRWRU9'& 0
0 ; ;6E ;6D
0 ;6 ;6
0 5'
;
0
;6E;6
5' 0 5'
%8

;6E;6
;6E;6
5'
%1
%.
97
6
6

'(93
'(93
%.
97
%8 %1 5' 5'
;6E;6 67(, 6 '(93
5' 5'
67(, 6 '(93
%. %.
6 '(93
97 97
6 '(93
5' 5'
'HQVLWRPHWHUPRWRU %1
0 '(93
%1
([LWUROOHUPRWRU $ ; 5'
0 '(93
5'
RXWSXW RXWSXW 0 '(93
67 %1 %1
,)( 2* 2*
0 '(93
2*
;6E;6 RXWSXW,)( '(93
5' 5' 5'
;6E;6 RXWSXW,)( '(93
%. %. %.
;6E;6 RXWSXW,)( '(93
; :+ :+ :+
;6E;6 RXWSXW,)( '(93
RXWSXW 670260'
; %8
$
;
$:,5(+$51(66$66< 287387$60
%. 97
;6E;6 ;6D;6
%. 97
;6E;6 '(93
%8 67
H/DEHOSFE$GGUHVV

;
:,5,1*B',$*5$03
$:,5(+$51(66$66< 287387
;
&'0 RXWSXW ;6E ;6D
3 3 ;6 ;6
<( <( <(
;6E;6 RXWSXW3 '(93
%. %. %.
;6E;6 RXWSXW3 '(93
:+ :+ :+
;6E;6 RXWSXW3 '(93
%8 %8 %8
;6E;6 RXWSXW3 '(93
97 97 97
;6E;6 RXWSXW3 '(93
%8 %8 %8
;6E;6 RXWSXW3 '(93
97 97 97
;6E;6 RXWSXW3 '(93
%8 %8 %8
;6E;6 RXWSXW3 '(93
97 97 97
;6E;6 RXWSXW3 '(93
%. %. %.
;6E;6 RXWSXW3 '(93
2* 2* 2*
;6E;6 RXWSXW3 '(93
:+ :+ :+
;6E;6 RXWSXW3 '(93
5' 5' 5'
;6E;6 RXWSXW3 '(93
%. %. %.
&RQQHFWLRQDGMXVWPHQW
;6E;6 RXWSXW3 '(93
670260' 5' 5'
%8 6 '(93
97 97

;
&'0
3
RXWSXW
3
$:,5(+$51(66$66< 287387$60 %.
;
6
6
;

'(93
'(93
'(93
%.
%.
RQ;6SLQSRV
<( ; 97
RXWSXW/('3
;
FGPSFE RXWSXW/('3
%8 ;
; '(93
5'
%. RXWSXWDVP ; '(93
; RXWSXW/('3 ; %. 97
:+ ((6; ;6E;6 ;6D;6
; RXWSXW/('3 ; %. %.
&'0 670260' 6HQVRU6 6 ;6E;6 '(93
; %8 5' %8 67
;6E;6

/
97
;6E;6
%.
;6E;6
%8((
; ;
&'0/(' RXWSXW
3 /('3
RXWSXW3
<( 'HQVLWRPHWHUKRPHSRVLWLRQ
%8
RXWSXW3
%.
RXWSXW3
:+
RXWSXW3
670260'
%8
;FGPOHGSFE
;
;
&'0/('
;
%/


; ; ; ; '$7( 1$0(
:,5,1*',$*5$0'6 3URMHFW
; ; ; ; 86(5 /7LERV
287387$60DVRI61
287387$60
; ; ; ; $335
; ; ; ; 1250 6KHHWQDPH 2XWSXWBDVP
6KHHW
IRUELGGHQ
)
; ; ; ;
$*)$
; ; ; ; RI
9 6+
$ % & ' ( ) ,'; &KDQJH15 '$7( 1$0( 5HSODFHPHQWIRU ;
$ % & ' ( )

;
;6E
;6 %1
'(93
%. :,5,1*B',$*5$03
'(93 ;
%80,1,),7-5
;
;
0
UG
0 EN
9DFXXPSXPS
; ;
;6D ;6E
5'
;6 ;6 %8
0UG '(93
%. %1
0EN '(93
%. :+
9 '(93
%. %1 :,5,1*B',$*5$03
9 '(93 ;
%. *<
9 '(93
; %. %1
9 '(93
;
670,1,),7-5 %80,1,),7-5
;
$3803 9$/9(6$66<&$%/(
9
/RZHUPDJD]LQHYDFXXPYDOYH

;
;
;
9

8SSHUPDJD]LQHYDFXXPYDOYH

; ; ; ; '$7( 1$0(
:,5,1*',$*5$0'6 3URMHFW
; ; ; ; 86(5 ;
3803 9$/9(6$60
3803 9$/9(6$60
; ; ; ; $335
; ; ; ; 1250 6KHHWQDPH 3XPSB B9DOYHVBDVP
6KHHW 7
)
; ; ; ;
IRUELGGHQ
$*)$
; ; ; ; RI 9 6+
03-2011 Edition 1, ;
$ % & ' ( )
$
; %
; $
; 0 /DVW
&LUFXLW
%80 00
5'
0 ;6;6;6
%.
%
;6;6;6
%802'8B,, )LUVW&LUFXLW
6702'8B,,
; ;
;6 ;6D
; ; 5'
;6;6 ;6 %.
; 66 000 '(93
%866 %. 5'
6666 %. %.
000 '(93
%.
;6;6;6 666666 '(93
5' 5' 5'
;6;6;6 666666 '(93
97 97 97
;6;6;6 666666 '(93
97 97 97
; %802'8B,,

6702'8B,,
;6;6;6 $3,&.83&$%/( 2*
666666
8SSHUB38,)(

'(93
'(93
2*
;
; 5' 5' :,5,1*B',$*5$03
8SSHUB38,)( '(93
; %. %.
$ 8SSHUB38,)( '(93
:+ :+
$),/03,&.83$66< 8SSHUB38,)( '(93
%/ :+ 5'
666 '(93
*1 97
666 '(93
%.%1 %.
;6;6;6666 '(93
)LOPHQWQDPH(LQKHLW %.
;6;6;6 '(93
97
%80,1,),7 670,1,),7

; ; 'UDZHU&RQQHFWRU
XSSHUSLFNXS 8SSHUB38
67 ,)(
2*
;6;6;6
5'
;6;6;6
%.
;6;6;6
; :+
;6;6;6
XSSHUSLFNXS 670260'
; %8
$
$
%/
H/DEHOSFE$GGUHVV

;
;
((6;3 ;
6
6HQVRU6 66
:+
;6;6;6
%1
;6;6;6
*1
;6;6;6
%8(,
8SSHU3LFNXSSDVWGHWHFWLRQ

; ; ; ; '$7( 1$0(
:,5,1*',$*5$0'6 3URMHFW
; ; ; ; 86(5 ;
833(53,&.83$60
833(53,&.83$66<
; ; ; ; $335
$ ; ; ; ; 1250 6KHHWQDPH 8SSHUBSLFNXS
6KHHW 8
)
; ; ; ;
%
IRUELGGHQ
$*)$
$ /DVW
; ; ; ; RI 9 6+
&LUFXLW
03-2011 Edition 1, ;
%)LUVW&LUFXLW
$ % & ' ( )
;
;
((6;3 ;
6
6HQVRU6 66
5'
;6;6;6
%.
;6;6;6
97
;6;6;6
%8(,
8SSHUPDJD]LQHHPSW\GHWHFWLRQ ;
;6
;
;6D
;6;6 ;6
$ ; ;
5'
97
666 '(93
5'
97
;
:,5,1*B',$*5$02

;
5) 5) 666 '(93
67 %. %. ;
5)67 %. %.
666 '(93
%.
;6;6;6 5)5)67 '(93 ;
:,5,1*B',$*5$02
5' 5' 5' ;
;6;6;6 5)5)67 '(93
; :+ :+ :+ ;
;6;6;6 5)5)67 '(93
5) <( <( <( ;
;6;6;6 5)5)67 '(93
; %8 %8 %8 ;
$ ;6;6;6 5)5)67 '(93
670260' ; ;
; %8 ; ;
%/ $:,5(+$51(66$66< 75$< ;
; ;
;
%. %. ;
;6;6;6 '(93
%. 9797
;6;6;6 '(93;6D;6
5),'7$*5($'(5 38 %8 %8

&RQQHFWLRQEHWZHHQDVVHPEOLHV
0O[5HFHSWDFOH+RXVLQJ
0DWHVZLWK0O['UDZHUFRQQHFWRU
; ;
;6E ;6D
; ;6 ;6
; %. %. ;
6 '(93 :,5,1*B',$*5$02
26+ ; 97 97 ;
; 6 '(93
6HQVRU6 5' 5' ;

6 5' %.
6 '(93
%.
:,5,1*B',$*5$02
;
;6E;6 6 '(93 :,5,1*B',$*5$02
97 97 97 ;
;6E;6 6 '(93
%. 5' 5' ;
;6E;6 6 '(93
; ;
%8(, ; ;
$:,5(+$51(66$66< 75$<'(7 ;
; ;
;
%. 97
;6E;6 ;6D;6
%. 97 ;
;6E;6 '(93
7DNHRYHUSDVWGHWHFWLRQ %8 %8
$
:,5(+$51(66$66< &$66$60
;
;
26+ ;
;
6HQVRU6 6
5'
;6E;6
97
;6E;6
%.
;6E;6
%8(,
7DNHRYHUSDVWGHWHFWLRQ

; ; ; ; '$7( 1$0(
:,5,1*',$*5$0'6 3URMHFW
; ; ; ; 86(5 ;
833(575$<$60
833(575$<$60
; ; ; ; $335
; ; ; ; 1250 6KHHWQDPH 8SSHUBWUD\
6KHHW 9
)
; ; ; ;
IRUELGGHQ
$*)$
; ; ; ; RI 9 6+
$ % & ,'; &KDQJH15 '$7( 1$0( 5HSODFHPHQWIRU ;
;
Spare Parts List
Document No: DD+DIS050.05M
Drystar 5302
Type 5366/100
5366_chap05_title_m.CDR
CONFIDENTIALITY NOTE:
Use, dissemination, distribution or reproduction of this document by unauthorized personnel is not permitted and may be unlawful.
The controlled version of this document resides on Agfa HealthCare Library. Any printed copy of this document is uncontrolled.
Edition 1, Revision 3 Document Node ID: 16880214

09-2011 Printed in Germany spare_parts_e_template_v09
DD+DIS050.05M Spare Parts List
Manufacturer
Agfa HealthCare N.V
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany

AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa HealthCare N.V., Belgium,
or its affiliates.
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the product.
WARNING:
Hazards may be introduced because of component failure or improper

operation.
INSTRUCTION:
• Replace defective parts with Agfa HealthCare original spare parts.
• Use only tools and measuring instruments which are suitable for the procedure.
• Only approved Agfa HealthCare accessories must be used. For a list of
compatible accessories contact your local Agfa HealthCare organization or
www.agfa.com.
NOTE:
Document Type ‘Order List’ in the Agfa HealthCare Library.


Document History
Edition, Release Changes compared to previous Version 1.2

Revision Date
1.3 09-2011 Index of Spare Parts Numbers updated.
Hook added in "DRIVE"
DEVIL - THEMIS - THANOS -REPLACEMENT KITS
added in "DRIVE / POWER UNIT"
NOTE:
Agfa reserves the right to deliver compatible parts or alternative parts.
Prices to the original order may differ.
Refurbished Spare Parts are indicated with Prefix RF+.

For more details contact your local Service Manager, e.g. availability or country specific rules.
Disclaimer
Agfa HealthCare warrants that the delivered products/spare parts have at least the same
functionalities (or an upgraded version). In case compatible or alternative products/spare
parts are delivered prices to the original order may differ as these products/spare parts will
be invoiced at current prices.
Contact
Spare Parts ordering
Europe Orderprocessing-europe@matrium.net
Overseas Orderprocessing-overseas@matrium.net
Spare Parts returns

Worldwide Returns@matrium.net
NOTE:
Recycling of the electronic and electrical waste equipment will ensure safety of the human
health and the environment.
For information about electronic and electrical waste equipment disposal, recovery and
collection points, please contact your local waste disposal service or producer / distributor of
this equipment.
If your equipment contains removable batteries or accumulators please dispose of these
separately according to local regulations.


Contents
VERKLEIDUNG
COVERS LEISTUNGSEINHEIT
REVÊTEMENT POWER UNIT
PAGES 6 - 7 MODULE DE PUISSANCE
PAGES 16 - 17
ANTRIEB LINKS
DRIVE LEFT
ENTRAÎNEMENT Á GAUCHE
PAGES 10 - 11
ANTRIEB
DRIVE
ENTRAÎNEMENT
PAGES 8 - 9
ANTRIEB / LEISTUNGSEINHEIT
DRIVE / POWER UNIT
ENTRAÎNEMENT / MODULE DE PUISSANCE
PAGES 12 - 15
5366_chap05_index_m.CDR


How to navigate the Spare Parts List online with the

Acrobat Reader
(1) Open Bookmarks.
(2) Click on "CONTENTS".
(3) See overview of the modules.

(4) Click on requested module.
(5) Appropriate page opens.
(6) Click on green arrow to

navigate back to the overview
of the modules.


04*
06*
05* 04*
05*
03
(MOD 01)
01 07*
05*
(MOD 10)
02
(MOD 02)
08
5366_chap05_01_m.CDR
COVERS


Pos. Nr. Teile-Nr. Benennung
Item no. Part No. Description
Pos. no. Nr. de Ref. Denomination
1 CM+3433741 TASTATUR / ANZEIGEMODUL (ROHS) (MOD 10)
KEYPAD / DISPLAY MODULE (ROHS) (MOD 10)
CLAVIER / MODULE AFFICHEUR (ROHS) (MOD 10)
2 CM+3492662 UNTERE ABLAGE W/O TAG (ROHS) (MOD 02)
LOWER TRAY W/O TAG (ROHS) (MOD 02)
RÉCEPTACLE EN TÔLE EN BAS W/O TAG (ROHS) (MOD 02)
3 CM+3492672 OBERE ABLAGE W/O TAG (ROHS) (MOD 01)
UPPER TRAY W/O TAG (ROHS) (MOD 01)
RÉCEPTACLE EN TÔLE EN HAUT W/O TAG (ROHS) (MOD 01)
4 CM+3492812 * OBERE & HINTERE OBERE VERKLEIDUNG (ROHS)
TOP COVER & REAR TOP COVER ASSY (ROHS)
COUVERCLE EN HAUT (ROHS)
5 CM+3492822 * LINKE, RECHTE & VORDERE ABDECKUNG (ROHS)
LEFT, RIGHT & FRONT COVER (ROHS)
COUVERCLE AVANT, GAUCHE & DROIT (ROHS)
6 CM+3492831 * FILMAUSGABE (ROHS)
OUTPUT TRAY (ROHS)
RECEPTACLE FILM (ROHS)
7 CM+3492841 * HANDGRIFFE (ROHS)
HAND GRIPS (ROHS)
POIGNÉE (ROHS)
8 CM+3392676 RF TAG READER (ROHS)
RF TAG READER ASSY (ROHS)
DISPOSITIF DE LECTURE DES ÉTIQUETTES (ROHS)
= Assembly
* = Spare part standardly is not kept in stock, extended delivery time is possible.
99 = Spare Part is not shown in Exploded Views.
RF+: Refurbished Spare Parts
COVERS


04
11
03
(MOD 16)
10
01
(MOD 06)
08
12 09
(MOD 11)
02
(MOD 03)
02
(MOD 04) 06
(MOD 13)
05
(MOD 14)
07
DRIVE


1 CM+3492724 AUSGABEMODUL (ROHS) (MOD 06)
OUTPUT MODULE (ROHS) (MOD 06)
MODULE DE SORTIE (ROHS) (MOD 06)
2 CM+3492687 AUFNAHMEMODUL (ROHS) (MOD 03,04)
PICK UP MODULE (ROHS) (MOD 03,04)
MODULE DE RÉCEPTION (ROHS) (MOD 03,04)
3 CM+3492732 TPH KÜHLGEBLÄSE (ROHS) (MOD 16)
TPH COOLING FAN (ROHS) (MOD 16)
VENTILATEUR TPH (ROHS) (MOD 16)
4 CM+3433501 MODUL 'TPH FILTER' (ROHS)
TPH FILTER MODULE (ROHS)
MODULE FILTRE TPH (ROHS)
5 CM+3492695 GETRIEBE & RIEMEN (ROHS) (MOD 14)
GEAR BOX & BELT (ROHS) (MOD 14)
ENGRENAGE & COURROIE (ROHS) (MOD 14)
6 CM+3492762 NOCKENWELLENANTRIEBSMODUL (ROHS) (MOD 13)
CAM DRIVE MODUL (ROHS) (MOD 13)
MODULE D'ENTRAÎNENMENT (ROHS) (MOD 13)
7 CM+3492872 TPH FLACHKABEL (ROHS)
TPH FLAT CABLE (ROHS)
CABLE PLAT TPH (ROHS)
8 CM+3097371 FILMSENSOR (ROHS) - (S5)
FILM SENSOR (ROHS) - (S5)
DETECTEUR FILM (ROHS) - (S5)
9 CM+3492803 EINGABESENSORMODUL (ROHS) (MOD 11)
INPUT SENSOR MODULE (ROHS) (MOD 11)
MODULE CAPTEURS D'ENTRÉE (ROHS) (MOD 11)
10 CM+3617033 UPGRADE KIT, OBERE AUFNHAMEEINHEIT (SB15 - DD+DIS200.10E)
UPPER PU UPGRADE KIT (SB15 - DD+DIS200.10E)
UNITÉ DE RECEPTION SUPÉRIEURE, KIT DE CONVERSION (SB15 - DD+DIS200.10E)
11 CM+6007170 OBERE / UNTERE AUFNAHMEEINHEIT, ACHSE D=24MM (SB15 - DD+DIS200.10E)
UPPER / LOWER PICKUP UNIT, SHAFT D=24MM (SB15 - DD+DIS200.10E)
UNITÉ DE RECEPTION SUPEÉRIEURE / INFÉRIEURE, AXE D=24MM (SB15 - DD+DIS200.10E)
12 CM+6040160 HAKEN (ROHS)
HOOK (ROHS)
CROCHET (ROHS)
= Assembly
DRIVE


03
07 (S9) 04
05
(MOD 15)
01
(MOD 17)
02
(MOD 07) 06
DRIVE LEFT


1 CM+3392172 PUMPEN- UND VENTILBAUGRUPPE (ROHS) (MOD 17)
PUMP & VALVES ASSY (ROHS) (MOD 17)
ENSEMBLE POMPES ET VALVES (ROHS) (MOD 17)
2 CM+3492702 WALZENANTRIEBSMODUL (ROHS) (MOD 07)
DRUM DRIVE MODULE (ROHS) (MOD 07)
MODULE D'ENTRAÎNEMENT DU CYLINDRE (ROHS) (MOD 07)
3 CM+3492711 DRUCKTROMMEL (ROHS)
PRINT DRUM MODULE (ROHS)
TAMBOUR D'IMPRESSION (ROHS)
4 CM+3433521 HAUPTANTRIEBSRAD & WALZENANTRIEBSRIEMEN (ROHS)
MAIN DRIVE PULLEY & DRUM BELT (ROHS)
ROUE D'ENTRAÎNEMENT & COURROIES D'ENTRAÎNEMENT DU TAMBOUR (ROHS)
5 CM+3492742 ANTRIEBSMODUL (ROHS) (MOD 15)
SUSPENSION DRIVE MODULE (ROHS) (MOD 15)
MODULE D'ENTRAÎNEMENT (ROHS) (MOD 15)
6 CM+3433750 OSB PCB (ROHS)
OSB PCB (ROHS)
OSB PCB (ROHS)
7 CM+3097911 LICHTSCHRANKE (ROHS) - (S9)
LIGHT BARRIER (ROHS) - (S9)
PHOTO CELLULE (ROHS) - (S9)
= Assembly
DRIVE LEFT


01
(MOD 05)
02
03
(MOD 20)
UP TO SN12609
10
05
06
04 (MOD 12)
(MOD 08)
07* (MOD 18) 09*

08 (MOD 18)
* IN COMBINATION WITH
THEMIS BOARD ONLY
DRIVE / POWER UNIT - UP TO SN12609


1 CM+3492644 THERMODRUCKKOPF DS530X (MOD 05)
THERMAL HEAD DS530X (MOD 05)
TÊTE THERMIQUE DS530X (MOD 05)
2 CM+3492773 NOCKENWELLENANTRIEB (ROHS)
CAM DRIVE SHAFT (ROHS)
ENTRAÎNEMENT A CAME (ROHS)
3 CM+3433401 VILIS KÜHLGEBLÄSE (MOD 20)
VILIS COOLING FAN (MOD 20)
VENTILATEUR VILIS (MOD 20)
4 CM+6037360 DEVIL / THEMIS (THANOS) / RAM REPLACEMENT ASSY (MOD 08) - BIS FN12609 (SW >= 2.1.X)
DEVIL / THEMIS (THANOS) / RAM REPLACEMENT ASSY (MOD 08) - UP TO SN12609 (SW >= 2.1.X)
DEVIL / THEMIS (THANOS) / RAM REPLACEMENT ASSY (MOD 08) - JUSQU'AU NS12609 (SW >= 2.1.X)
5 CM+6037350 DEVIL REPLACEMENT ASSY - BIS FN12609 (SW >= 2.1.X)
DEVIL REPLACEMENT ASSY - UP TO SN12609 (SW >= 2.1.X)
DEVIL REPLACEMENT ASSY - JUSQU'AU NS12609 (SW >= 2.1.X)
6 CM+6009773 TYNDALL PCB MIT RAM (MOD 12) - (SW >= 2.1.X)
TYNDALL PCB WITH RAM (MOD 12) - (SW >= 2.1.X)
TYNDALL PCB AVEC RAM (MOD 12) - (SW >= 2.1.X)
7 CM+3433703 512MB RAM MODUL (ROHS) (MOD 18) - BIS FN12609 (SW >= 1.9.0)
512MB RAM MODULE (ROHS) (MOD 18) - UP TO SN12609 (SW >= 1.9.0)
MODULE 512MB RAM (ROHS) (MOD 18) - JUSQU'AU NS12609 (SW >= 1.9.0)
8 CM+6009750 512MB DDR2 RAM (MOD 18) - AB FN12610 (SW >= 2.1.X)
512MB DDR2 RAM (MOD 18) - FROM SN12610 (SW >= 2.1.X)
512MB DDR2 RAM (MOD 18) - A PARTIR DE NS12610 (SW >= 2.1.X)
9 CM+3460393 KIT HEATSINK SPRING HOLDER (ROHS)
KIT HEATSINK SPRING HOLDER (ROHS)
KIT HEATSINK SPRING HOLDER (ROHS)
10 CM+3433562 COMPACT FLASH KARTE 1GB (ROHS)
COMPACT FLASH CARD 1GB (ROHS)
CARTE COMPACT FLASH 1GB (ROHS)
= Assembly
DRIVE / POWER UNIT - UP TO SN12609


01
(MOD 05)
02
03
(MOD 20)
FROM SN12610
04 (MOD 08)
08
05
06
(MOD 12)
07
(MOD 18)
DRIVE / POWER UNIT - FROM SN12610


1 CM+3492644 THERMODRUCKKOPF DS530X (MOD 05)
THERMAL HEAD DS530X (MOD 05)
TÊTE THERMIQUE DS530X (MOD 05)
2 CM+3492773 NOCKENWELLENANTRIEB (ROHS)
CAM DRIVE SHAFT (ROHS)
ENTRAÎNEMENT A CAME (ROHS)
3 CM+3433401 VILIS KÜHLGEBLÄSE (MOD 20)
VILIS COOLING FAN (MOD 20)
VENTILATEUR VILIS (MOD 20)
4 CM+6009784 DEVIUS / TYNDALL / RAM MODUL (MOD 08) - AB FN12610 (SW >= 2.1.X)
DEVIUS / TYNDALL / RAM MODULE (MOD 08) - FROM SN12610 (SW >= 2.1.X)
MODULE DEVIUS / TYNDALL / RAM (MOD 08) - A PARTIR DE NS12610 (SW >= 2.1.X)
5 CM+6009762 DEVIUS PCB - AB FN12610 (SW >= 2.1.X)
DEVIUS PCB - FROM SN12610 (SW >= 2.1.X)
DEVIUS PCB - A PARTIR DE NS12610 (SW >= 2.1.X)
6 CM+6009773 TYNDALL PCB MIT RAM (MOD 12) - (SW >= 2.1.X)
TYNDALL PCB WITH RAM (MOD 12) - (SW >= 2.1.X)
TYNDALL PCB AVEC RAM (MOD 12) - (SW >= 2.1.X)
7 CM+6009750 512MB DDR2 RAM (MOD 18) - AB FN12610 (SW >= 2.1.X)
512MB DDR2 RAM (MOD 18) - FROM SN12610 (SW >= 2.1.X)
512MB DDR2 RAM (MOD 18) - A PARTIR DE NS12610 (SW >= 2.1.X)
8 CM+3433562 COMPACT FLASH KARTE 1GB (ROHS)
COMPACT FLASH CARD 1GB (ROHS)
CARTE COMPACT FLASH 1GB (ROHS)
= Assembly
DRIVE / POWER UNIT - FROM SN12610


01
(MOD 09)
02, 03
04 05
06
Shaft holder left Shaft holder right Guide Latch

(Vertical Alignment) (Vertical Alignment) (Vertical Alignment) Name Quantity Purpose
Female vacuum connector 2 Vacuum connector inside printer.
Counterpart to male vacuum connector at pickup module.
Male vacuum connector 2 Vacuum connector at pickup module
Guide latch 2 Vertical alignment guide latch (left and right hand side)
(Vertical Alignment)
Gear box spring 1 Tension spring for gear box belt
Gear box belt 1 Belt for gear box
Male Female
vacuum vacuum
Gear Box Spring connector connector Gear Box Belt
POWER UNIT


1 CM+3492781 NETZTEIL - ROHS (MOD 09)
POWER SUPPLY - ROHS (MOD 09)
ALIMENTATION - ROHS (MOD 09)
2 CM+3260514 SCSI HARDDISK 73GB (ROHS) - BIS FN12609
SCSI HARDDISK 73GB (ROHS) - UP TO SN12609
SCSI HARDDISK 73GB (ROHS) - JUSQU'AU NS12609
3 CM+6009730 SATA HARDDISK - AB FN12610
SATA HARDDISK - FROM SN12610
SATA HARDDISK - A PARTIR DE NS12610
4 CM+3392031 SCSI HARDDISK KABEL (ROHS) - BIS FN12609
SCSI HARDDISK CABLE (ROHS) - UP TO SN12609
CABLE SCSI HARDDISK (ROHS) - JUSQU'AU NS12609
5 CM+6009740 SATA HARDDISK KABEL - AB FN12610
SATA HARDDISK CABLE - FROM SN12610
CABLE SATA HARDDISK - A PARTIR DE NS12610
6 CM+3492881 EINZELTEIL KIT (ROHS)
SMALL COMPONENTS KIT (ROHS)
KIT PIÈCES DÉTACHÉES (ROHS)
= Assembly
POWER UNIT


Spare Parts Kit Categories
R 'Repair' Parts required to repair a machine

Kit `R` should be part of the field service engineers` car stock.
Quantity covers requirements for ca. 10 machines.
Adapt quantity locally depending on:
• Number of machines
• Extension of the service area
• Local service structure (centralized / decentralized)
• Stockpilling
I 'Installation' Parts required to install a machine

Kit `I` should be available as case stock.
Includes all parts to perform the installation (does not comprise parts
included in the shipment).
Quantity covers one single machine installation.
M 'Maintenance' Parts required to maintain a machine

Kit `M` should be available as case stock.
Includes all parts required to perform a maintenance according to the
maintenance checklist.
Quantity covers one single maintenance.
L 'Local stock' Extremely expensive or bulky parts

Kit `L` should be part of the local central warehouse.
Determine quantity depending on costs and on the installed base.
Spare Parts Kit Order Numbers
Order Number Spare Part Kit Version

CM+053660100733 Drystar 5302 Sortiment M 5


Type Overview
This spare parts list is valid for the following machine type(s):
Device Name Type Number Specification

DRYSTAR 5302 5366/0100 EQOZV
Accessory Overview
Following accesssories are separately available:
Accessory Order Number

MOBILE KIT EX2DV


Chapter 8
HEALTHCARE Manufacturing Standard
Imaging Services
Modifications
DRYSTAR 5302
Type 5366/100

This document provides an overview of all product modifications which may be of
importance for Service. They are listed in chronological sequence.
Edition. Release Changes:

Revision Date
1.0 05-2008 Initial version
Document Title
n.a. n.a.

eq_08_modifications_e_template_v07
DD+DIS149.08E Manufacturing Standard Modifications
► Manufacturer
Publisher
D - 81539 München
Germany
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
the product.
NOTE:


OVERVIEW OF MODIFICATIONS:
Timeline Modification Referenced Documents
2008
April Introduction of “Upper Pickup Modification Kit” • SB No. 08
incl. Software 1.9.1_C1 DD+DIS400.07E
• Enclosure
DD+DIS399.07E
February Changed Compact Flash Card 128 MB to 1 GB None
2007
November Changed TPH Module CM+349264.2 None
November Changed Input Sensor Module CM+349280.1 None
August Software CR ROM 1.9.0_C4 as Successor of SB No. 07, DD+DIS263.07E
1.9.0_C2 for RoHS Spare Parts
August Changed RF Tag Reader CM+339267.3 None
July Changed Pickup Module CM+349268.3 None
July Introduction of Software 1.9.0_C4 SB No. 07, DD+DIS2634.07E
Enclosure DD+DIS268.07E
June Release of RoHS compliant Spare Parts SB No. 06, DD+DIS064.07E
June Release of RoHS compliant Printer / Introduction SB No. 06, DD+DIS064.07E
of Software 1.9.0_C2
March Changed TPH Module CM+349264.1 None
February Added Label at Printer Rear Side with None
Explanation of Network Activity LEDs
January Changed Display Module CM+343336.2 None
January Introduction of new Film Format Positioners in None
Upper Tray Module CM+349267.0 and Lower
Tray Module 349266.0


Timeline Modification Referenced Documents
2006
October Changed Gear Box Module (MOD14) SB No. 04 DD+DIS349.06E
CM+349269.2 in combination with DRYSTAR
5302 software patch 1.8.1_C1
August Intruduction of RoHS compliant Power Supply None
Module
July Introduction of Heat Sink Replacement Kit as • Enclosure
Spare Part DD+DIS194.06E
• Troubleshooting Guide
DD+DIS211.07E
May Changed Gear Box Module (MOD14) None
CM+349269.1
May Changed TPH Cooling Fan CM+349273.0 None
April Removed “Output Sensor Sensor S25” in Output None
Module
March Changed Display Module CM+343336.1 None
February Changed Pickup Module CM+349268.1 None
January Changed Output Module CM+349272.1 Troubleshooting Guide
DD+DIS211.07E
2005
November Introduction of Software Release 1.8.0_C2 SB No. 03, DD+DIS403.05E


1 Introduction of Software Release 1.8.0_C2
Reason Support of additional languages for the Operator and Key-Operator

menu.
Product(s) & SN ≥ 1156 (incl. SN 1143 and SN 1149) / Nov. 2005

Serial
Number(s)
Part Software only available via MEDNET, GSO library
Number(s)
Referenced SB No. 03, DD+DIS403.05E
Document(s)
2 Changed Output Module CM+349272.1
Reason Improvement of Film Run in Output Module
Product(s) & SN ≥ 1336 / January 2006

Serial
Number(s)
Part Output Module CM+349272.2
Number(s)
Referenced Troubleshooting Guide DD+DIS211.07E
Document(s)


3 Changed Pickup Module CM+349268.1
Reason • Improved 174 mm banding line (not visible in clinical images,

only visible in technical flatfield image).
• Improved production process.
Product(s) & SN ≥ 1398 / February 2006
Serial
Number(s)
Part Pickup Module CM+349268.2
Number(s)
Referenced None
Document(s)
4 Changed Display Module CM+343336.1
Reason Improved connector to prevent that cable to display board can be

removed accidentally at mounting of right cover.
Product(s) & SN ≥ 1468 / March 2006

Serial
Number(s)
Part Display module CM+343336.2
Number(s)
Referenced None
Document(s)


5 Removed “Output Sensor Sensor S25” in Output Module
Reason Output sensor is removed as is not used by software for film jam
detection
Product(s) & SN ≥ 1522 / April 2006
Serial
Number(s)
Part None
Number(s)
Referenced None
Document(s)
6 Changed TPH Cooling Fan CM+349273.0
Reason Improvement of production process: Some fans generated

disturbing noise in production.
Product(s) & SN ≥ 1578 / May 2006

Serial
Number(s)
Part TPH cooling fan CM+349273.1
Number(s)
Referenced None
Document(s)


7 Changed Gear Box Module (MOD14) CM+349269.1
Reason Improvement of production process
Product(s) & SN ≥ 1603 / May 2006

Serial
Number(s)
Part Gear box module CM+349269.2
Number(s)
Referenced None
Document(s)
8 Introduction of Heat Sink Replacement Kit as Spare Part
Reason To allow replacing heat sink at Themis CPU instead of replacing

the Themis CPU when the heat sink holder is broken.
Product(s) & Only introduced as spare part / July 2006

Serial
Number(s)
Part Heatsink Replacement Kit CM+346039.1
Number(s)
Referenced • Heatsink Kit Enclosure DD+DIS194.06E
Document(s)
• Troubleshooting Guide DD+DIS211.07E


9 Intruduction of RoHS compliant Power Supply Module
Reason Preparation of the printer for RoHS compliance.
Product(s) & SN ≥ 1863 plus 1847, 1853, 1856, 1848, 1854, 1858, 1850, 1855 /
Serial August 2006
Number(s)
Part Power Supply Module (RoHS) CM+349278.1
Number(s)
Referenced None
Document(s)
10 Changed Gear Box Module (MOD14) CM+349269.2 in

combination with DRYSTAR 5302 software patch 1.8.1_C1
Reason Improvement of film run
Product(s) & SN ≥ 2175 / October 2006

Serial
Number(s)
Part Gear box module CM+349269.3
Number(s)
Referenced SB No. 04 DD+DIS349.06E
Document(s)


11 Introduction of new Film Format Positioners in Upper Tray

Module CM+349267.0 and Lower Tray Module 349266.0
Reason Reduce tolerances of film in input tray: improve film positioning.
Product(s) & SN ≥ 2810 plus 2723, 2725, 2789, 2793, 2804, 2805, 2727, 2753,
Serial 2797, 2798, 2808, 2778, 2788, 2799, 2802 / January 2007
Number(s)
Part • Lower Tray CM+349266.1
Number(s)
• Upper Tray CM+349267.1
Referenced None
Document(s)
12 Changed Display Module CM+343336.2
Reason Improved production process to prevent pixel failures on LCD

displays in production.
Product(s) & SN ≥ 2808 plus 2726, 2727, 2793, 2794, 2800, 2801, 2806, 2788,
Serial 2789, 2795, 2796, 2802, 2803, 2790, 2792, 2797, 2799, 2804,
Number(s) 2805 / January 2007
Part Display Module CM+343336.3
Number(s)
Referenced None
Document(s)


13 Added Label at Printer Rear Side with Explanation of Network

Activity LEDs
Reason Allowing interpretation of network LEDs without service manual
Product(s) & SN ≥ 3001 / February 2007

Serial
Number(s)
Part None
Number(s)
Referenced None
Document(s)
14 Changed TPH Module CM+349264.1
Reason Improvement of production process: Heater foil was partly

detached.
Product(s) & SN ≥ 3049 without 3051, 3084, 3121, 3162, 3053, 3085, 3123,
Serial 3165, 3059, 3089, 3124, 3167, 3064, 3093, 3135, 3168, 3178 /
Number(s) March 2007
Part TPH Module CM+349264.2
Number(s)
Referenced None
Document(s)


15 Release of RoHS compliant Printer / Introduction of Software

1.9.0_C2
Reason Make printer compliant to the RoHS (Restriction of Hazardous

Substances) Directive No 2002/95/EC of the European Union.
Product(s) & SN ≥ 3930, plus 3642, 3645, 3711, 3714, 3798, 3803, 3815, 3856,
Serial 3862, 3864, 3865, 3867 to 3880, 3883, 3887, 3895, 3903 to 3909,
Number(s) 3911 to 3913, 3915 to 3924, 3926 to 3928 / June 2007
Part None
Number(s)
Document(s)
16 Release of RoHS compliant Spare Parts
Reason Make spare parts compliant to the RoHS (Restriction of Hazardous

Substances) Directive No 2002/95/EC of the European Union.
Product(s) & June 2007

Serial
Number(s)
Part • Devil (RoHS) CM+349286.0
Number(s) • Themis7 (RoHS) CM+343369.0
• Devil/Themis/RAM (RoHS) CM+349289.0
• 512 MB (RoHS) CM+343370.0
Document(s)


17 Introduction of Software 1.9.0_C4
Reason Improvement of production process: Sporadic film jams in the

output module and too large top border appeared.
Product(s) & SN ≥ 4368 plus 3923, 3924, 3976, 3988, 3995, 4000, 4006, 4007,
Serial 4009, 4012, 4013, 4015, 4018, 4020, 4024, 4025, 4027, 4030,
Number(s) 4031, 4033, 4034, 4035, 4039, 4041, 4042, 4043, 4045, 4046,
4048, 4051, 4053, 4054, 4056 to 4058, 4061 to 4067, 4070, 4071,
4073, 4075, 4076, 4079, 4082 to 4087, 4090, 4091, 4093 to 4095,
4097, 4098, 4100, 4101, 4103 to 4112, 4115, 4117, 4118 to 4124,
4130, 4135, 4136, 4159, 4161, 4164, 4169, 4172, 4183, 4186,
4187 to 4195, 4201, 4202, 4208, 4212, 4213, 4214, 4216, 4217,
4219 to 4226, 4228, 4230, 4231 to 4237, 4239 to 4249, 4251,
4252, 4254 to 4262, 4264, 4266, 4267 to 4316, 4318 to 4354,
4355, 4357, 4358 to 4365, 4366 / July 2007
Part None
Number(s)
Referenced • SB No. 07, DD+DIS263.07E
Document(s)
• Installation Instructions SW 1.9.0_C4, DD+DIS268.07E
18 Changed Pickup Module CM+349268.3
Reason Improvement of production process: Faults in pickup module due to

too high tolerances.
Product(s) & July 2007

Serial
Number(s)
Part Pickup Module CM+349268.4
Number(s)
Referenced None
Document(s)


19 Software CR ROM 1.9.0_C4 as Successor of 1.9.0_C2 for RoHS

Spare Parts
Reason RoHS spare parts were released with enclosed software CD ROM
1.9.0_C2.
Software 1.9.0_C4 is the successor of software 1.9.0_C2.
Product(s) & August 2007
Serial
Number(s)
Part • Devil (RoHS) CM+349286.1
Number(s) • Themis7 (RoHS) CM+343369.2
• Devil/Themis/RAM (RoHS) CM+349289.1
• 512 MB (RoHS) CM+343370.2

Document(s)
20 Changed RF Tag Reader CM+339267.3
Reason Make tag reader compatible to be used in DRYSTAR 5503, too.
Product(s) & August 2007

Serial
Number(s)
Part RF Tag Reader CM+339267.4
Number(s)
Referenced None
Document(s)


21 Changed Input Sensor Module CM+349280.1
Reason Improvement of production process
Product(s) & SN ≥ 5253 / November 2007

Serial
Number(s)
Part Input Sensor Module CM+349280.2
Number(s)
Referenced None
Document(s)
22 Changed TPH Module CM+349264.2
Reason Improvement of production process: Improved ground connection

to reduce pixel drops
Product(s) & Serial number not registered / November 2007

Serial
Number(s)
Part TPH Module CM+349264.3
Number(s)
Referenced None
Document(s)


23 Changed Compact Flash Card 128 MB to 1 GB
Reason Change of type of compact flash card for printer backup due to
purchasing reasons.
Product(s) & Printers and spare parts delivered as of February 2008

Serial
Number(s)
Part • Compact Flash 1 GB, CM+343356.2
Number(s)
Referenced • None
Document(s)
24 Introduction of “Upper Pickup Modification Kit”

incl. Software 1.9.1_C1
Reason Improvement of film run
Product(s) & • The “Upper Pickup Modification Kit” was introduced in

Serial production as of SN 5615.
Number(s)
• Software 1.9.1_C1 was introduced in production as of SN
5723 plus SNs 5660, 5665, 5667, 5669, 5672, 5676, 5677,
5679, 5683, 5684, 5717, 5719, 5721
• Introduction in April 2008
Part “Upper Pickup Modification Kit”, CM+361703.0
Number(s)
Referenced • SB No. 08 DD+DIS400.07E

Document(s)
• Upper Pickup Modification Kit” Enclosure DD+DIS399.07E


HEALTHCARE Maintenance
Global Services Organisation
Order-No.: DD+DIS149.05E
*1YZO5L1*
1 Piece YZO5L MA1
DRYSTAR 5302
Type 5366/100
The Maintenance document is separately available. Order No: DD+DIS149.05E


Maintenance DD+DIS149.05E
Caution:
This system uses high voltage. Please consider the respective safety regulations.
These instructions describe adjustments and routines which must only be performed by qualified
technical personnel.
Note:
Electrical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified electrician.

Mechanical repairs and connections must only be performed by a qualified technician.
CE Declaration:
According to the medical guidelines, the CE Declaration (CE Conformity) becomes invalid if the
product is changed without explicit consent of the manufacturer!
This applies to all parts, not only to safety elements.
We reserve the right to change data and characteristics in the light of technical
progress.

Chapter 9 DRYSTAR 5302 Edition 1, Revision 0
DD+DIS149.05E Maintenance
Chapter 9:
List of contents
1 Safety .................................................................................... 1
2 Introduction .......................................................................... 3
2.1 Maintenance frequency ....................................................................... 3
2.2 Required time ....................................................................................... 3
2.3 Required tools ...................................................................................... 3
2.4 Required cleaning material ................................................................. 4
2.5 Required spare parts ........................................................................... 4
3 Diagnostics........................................................................... 5
3.1 Questioning of the customer .............................................................. 5
3.2 Infocounter analysis ............................................................................ 5
3.2.1 Infocounter Analysis via Printers Infocounters Report ...................................... 6
3.2.2 Infocounter analysis via Service Command session......................................... 7
3.2.3 How to evaluate the Infocounter ....................................................................... 7
3.3 Image quality check ............................................................................. 9
4 Maintenance points - Power off ........................................ 10

4.1 Check of general condition ............................................................... 10
4.2 Check of condition of belts and gears ............................................. 10
4.3 Visual check of the cables................................................................. 10
4.4 Cleaning of the suction cups ............................................................ 11
4.5 Cleaning of Electronics Compartment ............................................. 11
4.6 Cleaning of Power Supply Air Inlet................................................... 12
4.7 Check and Cleaning of Drum ............................................................ 12
4.8 Cleaning of Thermal print head ........................................................ 13
4.9 Electrical check .................................................................................. 14
4.9.1 Basic Protective Earth Test............................................................................. 14
4.9.2 Electrical Check according to National Regulations. ...................................... 15
5 Maintenance points - Power on ........................................ 16
5.1 Check of safety switches................................................................... 16

Edition 1, Revision 0 DRYSTAR 5302 Chapter 9 / I
5.2 SW patch installation......................................................................... 16

5.3 Film calibration................................................................................... 17
5.4 Density Reproduction Check ............................................................ 17
5.5 Test image evaluation........................................................................ 19
5.6 Host system image quality check..................................................... 20
6 Completion of the maintenance........................................ 20

6.1 Backup Data on CF Card ................................................................... 20
6.2 Reset of the relative counters in the Infocounter............................ 21
6.3 Customer Conversation .................................................................... 21

Chapter 9 / II DRYSTAR 5302 Edition 1, Revision 0
1 Safety
⇒ The DRYSTAR 5302 is suitable for continuous operation.

⇒ The DRYSTAR 5302 enables or helps in the diagnosis of a patient.
When operating or maintaining the DRYSTAR 5302 always observe the

following safety guidelines:
• Have electrical or mechanical defects repaired by skilled personnel only!
• Do not override or disconnect the integrated safety features.
• Ventilation openings may not be covered.
• Always switch off the DRYSTAR 5302 and disconnect the power cord
from the outlet before carrying out any maintenance work.
Always take into account the markings provided on the inside and outside
of the printer. A brief overview of these markings and their meaning is
given below:
Safety warning, indicating that the DRYSTAR 5302 User and

Reference Manuals should be consulted before making any
connections to other equipment. The use of accessory equipment
not complying with the equivalent safety requirements of this
printer may lead to a reduced level of safety of the resulting
system. Consideration relating to the choice of accessory
equipment shall include:
Use of the accessory equipment in the patient vicinity.
Evidence that the safety certification of the accessory equipment
has been performed in accordance with the appropriate IEC
60601-1 and IEC 60601-1-2 harmonized national standard.
In addition, all configurations must comply with the medical
electrical systems standard IEC 60601-1-1. The party that makes
the connections acts as system configurator and is responsible
for complying with the systems' standard. If required contact your
Agfa Service Organization.
In order to reduce the risk of electric shock, do not remove any
covers.
Caution hot:
Keep hands clear from the Thermal Print Head.
Type B equipment:
Indicates that the DRYSTAR 5302 complies within the limits for
type B equipment.

Supplementary protective earth connector:

Provides a connection between the DRYSTAR 5302 and the
potential equalization busbar of the electrical system as found
in medical environments. This plug should never be
unplugged before the power is turned off and the power plug
has been removed.
Intergrounding connector:
Provides a connection between the printer and other
equipment which might exhibit minor ground potential
differences. These differences may degrade the quality of
communication between different equipment. Never remove
connections to this terminal.
Protective earth (ground)
Provides a connection between the printer and the protective
earth of the mains. Do not remove this connection, because
this will have a negative influence on the leakage current.
Power/Reset Button
Note that the power cord has to be disconnected from the wall
outlet in order to disconnect the unit entirely from the mains.
Precautions for use in USA only:
Make sure that the circuit is single-phase center-tapped, if the
printer is connected to a 240 V/60 Hz source instead of a
120 V/60 Hz source.
Transport after installation
Before moving the printer, always switch off the machine. The DRYSTAR
5302 should always be transported by 2 persons. When doing this, the
stability and the structure of the table top have to be taken into account.
The printer should not be placed on a soft surface, since this might
prevent appropriate ventilation and cause overheating. Nothing else
should be installed on the same table, and measures should be taken to
prevent table shock, while this may cause image artifacts. The appliance
shall only be transported with all covers closed. The appliance shall not be
transported continuously from one location to the other. Do not lift the
printer by the output tray.
Waste disposal and environmental regulations

In most countries DRYSTAR film is considered industrial waste and is not
allowed to be disposed of as household waste. Please consult your local
waste disposal regulations. Agfa recommends to have DRYSTAR film
waste hauled away by a licensed company.
After its life span, do not dispose of the DRYSTAR 5302 without
consideration of local waste disposal regulations. Please consult your
local service organization.

Chapter 9 / 2 DRYSTAR 5302 Edition 1, Revision 0
2 Introduction
The maintenance steps described in this document are based on the
technically required measures to guarantee the proper operation of the
printer.
The maintenance points have been arranged in a chronologically suitable
order to make the work routines as efficient as possible. The sequence of the
maintenance points in the checklist (see appendix) is identical with the
maintenance instructions.
Additional maintenance steps can be required according to national
regulations.
2.1 Maintenance frequency
The maintenance has to be carried out:

• every 25.000 printed films, or
• every 12 months, whichever comes first.
2.2 Required time
• Time required for the maintenance: ≤ 2 hours,
2.3 Required tools

Description Order Number / Comment
Calibrated densitometer recommended types are
• MacBeth TR-924
• X-Rite 301
• X-Rite 310
• X-Rite 331
• X-Rite 341
• Gretag D200-2
Flash light commercially available
Loop 8x CM+9.9579.9904.0
Service PC with Drystar 5302 Density For Service PC specifications refer to
Reproduction Check files chapter 3.2, Tools.
Density reproduction check files are
available via MEDNET, GSO Library
Waterproof pen commercially available
Wrist strap CM+9.9999.0830.0

2.4 Required cleaning material
Cleaning material Order Number

Agfa Cleaning Tissue (as alternative to CM+309931.0
Isopropyl alcohol or Ethanol and Lint
free cloth). Box of 50 pieces.
Isopropyl alcohol or Ethanol Commercially available
Lint free cloth Commercially available
Ink eraser 'Pelikan' 10+9.9999.1176.0
Vacuum cleaner
220/240V, 50Hz CM+9.9999.0895.0
110/115V, 60Hz CM+9.9999.0896.0
2.5 Required spare parts
The following spare parts are part of the Maintenance-assortment

CM+0 5366 0999 733
Description Order Number Case of Exchange/ Usage
Air Filter CM+343350.X Exchange each maintenance
Always have the latest Drystar 5302 software patches available on the
Service PC.
Depending of the urgency and classification of a software patch it might be
necessary to update the printer software.

3 Diagnostics
The diagnostics before the maintenance comprise following tasks:
Task Details see..
Questioning of the customer 3.1
Infocounter analysis 3.2
Image quality check 3.3
3.1 Questioning of the customer

• Ask the customer for any problem that appeared since the last
maintenance.
3.2 Infocounter analysis

To view the infocounter a service PC is required.
Two possibilities exist to get the infocounter on the Service PC:
# Type of Infocounter analysis: Refer to ...

A Via Printers Infocounters Report 3.2.1
B Via Service Command session 3.2.2
We recommend to use for Infocounter Analysis method A, 'Via Printers

Infocounters Report', as this is the fastest way to access the infocounter.
Method B, 'Via Service Command session ' might be useful, when you can
access a PC in the hospital network for a short time, to save the infocounter
file on the printer CF card for analysis on the Service PC.

Welcome to this
SERVICE TOOLS
List of errors
A Printer Infocounters report
QA Report Page
Software versions
Remote sessions
Show printer status
Enter service command session B
Scalingtools
Connectivity Setup
Welcome to this
7 Service Actions DryStar 5302 printer
LPD Profile Editor
5 Logging Printqueue editor
Service - Loggings
Controller logging
2. Infocounters
1. To printer flash card
ModuleModules
2. To this computer
repair
Go back
536609cf.cdr
Figure 1
3.2.1 Infocounter Analysis via Printers Infocounters Report

Required Tools
• Service PC, required to connect to the printer and analyze the infocounter.

Service PC
network
Tools - Printer Infocounters 536632el.cdr
Report"
(5) Analyze the infocounter file as
described in section 3.2.3, Figure 2

3.2.2 Infocounter analysis via Service Command session
Required Tools
• Service PC, required to connect to the printer and analyze the infocounter

Service PC
network
Tools - Enter Service Command 536632el.cdr
Session - 7 Service Actions - 5

Logging - 2 Infocounters"
(5) Save the infocounter file to the Figure 3
service PC or the CF card.
(6) Unzip the infocounters ZIP file
(7) Analyze the infocounter.txt file
as described in section 3.2.3,
3.2.3 How to evaluate the Infocounter
infocounter
1.1 Serial number and Compare device serial number with chapter 8
Installation date ‘Manufacturing Standard Modification’ to
determine whether the device possibly requires a
modification.
Refer to 3.3 (infocounter.txt), ‘HW Modification
History’, to check already made modifications.
1.4 Software Info Compare the currently installed SW version with
the latest SW version described in chapter 3.8,
SW releases, patches. In case a recommended
SW patch is available, install this SW patch.
Refer to section 5.2.

infocounter
2.3 Reliability Should normally be not higher than 0.05. Higher
fault rates need a thorough investigation.
3.3 Hardware Modification By comparing the status of the device with the
History available modifications (refer to Technical
Documentation chapter 8) the exact hardware
status can be determined.
3.4 Software modification By checking the software modification history it
history can be determined, whether a recent software
upgrade solved a problem, that occurred quite
often in the error list in the past
5.3 Retries Many retries (> 1%, based on relative prints)
have to be investigated: They may reduce the
throughput of the device.
5.7 Error History Check which errors occurred in the last days,
how often they appeared as well as the CBF
(cycles between failures) of these errors. This
gives an overview of the current status of the
machine.
5.8 Error list (sorted by Troubleshoot these errors with the help of the
relative) and technical documentation, chapter 3.3,
‘Troubleshooting’.
5.9 Error list (sorted by
total):

3.3 Image quality check
(1) In the browser pages select menu

"Service Engineer Tools - Enter
Print Testimage"
(2) Print following test images on the
largest format available in the film
magazines:
• STI1.ZIP
• STI2.ZIP
• medical_image.ZIP
The test image as displayed

in Figure 4 to Figure 6 will be
printed.
(3) Mark the test films with a

waterproof pen as testfilm before Figure 4
maintenance
Figure 5 Figure 6

4 Maintenance points - Power off

The maintenance with powered-off machine comprises following tasks:
Task Details: see...

Check of general condition 4.1
Check of condition of belts and gears 4.2
Visual check of the cables 4.3
Cleaning of the suction cups 4.4
Cleaning of Electronics 4.5
Cleaning of Power Supply Air Inlet 4.6
Check and Cleaning of Drum 4.7
Cleaning of Thermal print head 4.8
Electrical check 4.9
4.1 Check of general condition

(1) Perform a visual check of
• Power- and network cables.
• Covers
• The Output tray
• The upper and lower Input tray.
(2) Disconnect the power and network cable
(3) Remove the left and right cover to prepare the printer for the next steps
(4) Remove the films in the film trays including white plastic sheet
4.2 Check of condition of belts and gears

(1) Check all belts and gears for visible wear
4.3 Visual check of the cables

(1) Check cables inside the printer: The insulation may not show any sign of
wear or damage.

4.4 Cleaning of the suction cups

(1) Pull out the upper pickup unit
(2) Clean the suction cups with a lint
free cloth lightly moistened with
1
Isopropyl alcohol.
(3) Insert the upper pickup unit
(4) Repeat this step for the lower
pickup unit
536609da.cdr
Figure 7
536609cc.cdr 536609db.cdr
Figure 8 Figure 9
4.5 Cleaning of Electronics Compartment

(1) Remove the EMI shielding
(2) Clean the electronics
compartment with a vacuum
cleaner.
536609ac.cdr
Figure 10

4.6 Cleaning of Power Supply Air Inlet

(1) Clean the power supply air inlet
with a vacuum cleaner.
Figure 11
4.7 Check and Cleaning of Drum

(1) Open the top cover
(2) Open the "Hold down bracket"
(3) Open the TH Module
(4) Remove the flat belt
(5) Check the drum for dirt or
damage by turning at the drum
drive pulley.
(6) In case signs of damage are
visible, also check the STI2 test
image printed under step "3.3
Image quality check": A damage 536609df.cdr
will be visible in the flatfield area

Figure 12
of the STI2 test image in distance
of 111 mm.
(7) Clean the rubber of the drum with
a lint free cloth lightly moistened
with Isopropyl alcohol or Ethanol
(8) Remount the flat belt

4.8 Cleaning of Thermal print head

(1) Clean the TH resistor line with a
lint free cloth lightly moistened
with Isopropyl - alcohol or a
cleaning tissue.
• The last cleaning action must
be carried out in one way!
• For the Isopropyl alcohol
observe the rule: As less water
is in the alcohol as better. We
recommend using a 90%
536609cg.cdr
Isopropyl alcohol.
(2) Remount all covers Figure 13
(3) Insert both input trays
Caution:
• Be carefull at TH cleaning.
• The electronic circuits under the IC cover can be damaged.
• During cleaning do not press against the IC cover.
Only use very little alcohol to moisten the cloth.

4.9 Electrical check

The electrical check is split up in two steps:
Step Task Details see..

1 Perform the basic protective earth test 4.9.1
2 Perform the electrical check according to 4.9.2
National Regulations.
4.9.1 Basic Protective Earth Test

(1) Use a multimeter that is
capable to measure a
resistance < 1 Ohm
connector of the mains input
(3) Put the other probe at a few
could touch. 536631JN.cdr
The electrical resistance has to

be ≤ 0.2 Ohm.
Refer to Figure 14. 2
Figure 14

(4) Insert the power cord at the

printer side; leave it
disconnected at the wall side.
connector of the mains
connector.
(6) Put the other probe at a few 536631JN.cdr

could touch.
The electrical resistance in this
case has to be ≤ 0.3 Ohm.
Refer to Figure 15.
Figure 15
In case the electrical resistance of one measurement exceeds the limits (0.2
Ohm without mains cable; 0.3 Ohm with mains cable) check the printer for
loose grounding connections!
4.9.2 Electrical Check according to National Regulations.

(1) Perform the electrical check according to National Regulations.
The electrical checks that have to be performed in certain intervals (e.g. each
12 months) or after certain service actions (repair and/or maintenance)
depend on National Regulations.
Example for Germany: BGV A3 and DIN VDE 0751 or subsequent
regulations.

5 Maintenance points - Power on

The maintenance with powered-on machine comprises following tasks:
Task Details: see...
Check of safety switches 5.1
SW patch installation 5.2
Film calibration 5.3
Density Reproduction Check 5.4
Test image evaluation 5.5
Host system image quality check 5.6
5.1 Check of safety switches

(1) Switch on the printer. Wait till it
shows the READY screen (takes
approx. 7 minutes)
(2) Open top cover
(3) Check display message: It must
show "Close top cover"
536609fa.cdr
Figure 16
5.2 SW patch installation

(1) Install the latest SW patch, in case a recommended SW patch for the
printer is available. Refer to chapter 3.8, Software Releases, Patches.

5.3 Film calibration

How? (1) Select in key-operator menu
'6 Calibration - 1 Film
Calibration'
display.
(3) Repeat film calibration for
second input tray
536336as.cdr
Figure 17
5.4 Density Reproduction Check

Background With the density reproduction check the difference for a specific film type
Information between optical density defined in the sensitometric calibration file and the
printed optical density, measured with an external densitometer is checked.
This is a plausibility check for the CDM: In case the measured density values
are out of the specified range, the CDM requires a re-calibration.
This procedure must be carried out with every used film type:
(1) In the browser pages select menu "Service Engineer Tools - Enter
Service Command Session - 3 Print Testimage"
(2) Print out LinCheck.zip and measure the density of the eleven 100 % –
0% fields with a calibrated MacBeth TR-924, X-Rite 331, 341, X-Rite
301, X-Rite 310 or Gretag D200-2 densitometer.
(3) To check linearity fill in measured values in corresponding Excel file:
Ds5302 density reproduction check DT2B.xls or
Ds5302 density reproduction check DT2C.xls
These Excel files can be downloaded from MedNet, download area

'GSO library - Hardcopy - Dry Imagers - Drystar 5302 - Freeware'.

(4) After the measured values are filled in, the density reproduction is
calculated automatically.
(5) At the right hand side of the table is shown, whether the Density
Reproduction is ok or not. In case it is not ok you are requested to
carry out a CDM calibration.

4 Dmax = 314

100% 20 20 0 0
90% 47 49,4 -2,4 0
80% 73 78,8 -5,8 0
70%
60%
104
133
108,2
137,6
-4,2
-4,6
0
0
Density Reproduction = OK
50%
40%
163
189
167
196,4
-4
-7,4
0
0
No CDM calibration needed for DT2B film
30% 218 225,8 -7,8 0
20% 246 255,2 -9,2 0
10% 274 284,6 -10,6 0
0% 306 314 -8 0
When entering the measured density values the decimal point appears in a different spot,
e.g. measured value = 0.23, value to enter = 23.0
0 0 0 Density difference LinCheck image DT2B film in Ds 5302
30 -5 5
45 -7 7
20
60 -8 8
75 -9 9 15
90 -10 10 X-rite 310
105 -11 11 10 X-rite 331
Density Difference
120 -12 12 X-rite 341

135 -12 12 5
X-rite 301 Lower limit
150 -13 13 Mac Beth TR924
0 Upper limit
165 -13 13 Gretag D200-2
180 -14 14 Density difference
-5
195 -14 14
210 -14 14 -10
225 -15 15
240 -15 15 -15
255 -15 15
-20
270 -16 16
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350
285 -16 16
315 -16 16
536609af.cdr
Figure 18
(1) The measured density values have to be entered without decimal point.
(e.g. measured value = .23, value to enter = 23)

5.5 Test image evaluation

(1) In the browser pages select menu "Service Engineer Tools - Enter
Service Command Session - 3 Print Testimage".
(2) Print following test images on the largest format available in the film
trays:
• STI1.ZIP
• STI2.ZIP
• medical_image.ZIP
(3) Mark the test films with a waterproof pen as testfilms after maintenance
(4) Check all three images at the lightbox. Following items must been
checked:
o Line artifacts in transport direction
o Line artifacts vertical to the transport direction
o Point artifacts
o Surface artifacts
(5) Evaluate the test images at follows:

1. If no artifacts are seen on the STI1 / STI2 image continue with
next step
2. If artifacts seen on STI1 / STI2 image aren’t visible on the
medical_image continue with next step.
3. In other case (i.e. artifacts which are visible in STI1 / STI2 are
visible on medical_image, too) refer to Technical Documentation
chapter "3.3 Troubleshooting”
(6) Compare the test images "after maintenance" with the test images made
"before maintenance": The image quality of the last printed
medical_image and STI1/STI2 test image must be equal or better than
the images made before maintenance.

5.6 Host system image quality check

(1) Print a diagnostic image from every host system.
(2) Check images of each host at the lightbox for artifacts in diagnostic
image.
(3) In case artifacts are visible, compare with artifacts in last STI1 /STI2
image.
o In case artifacts are also visible in STI1 / STI2 image, refer to
Technical Documentation chapter "3.3 Troubleshooting”.
o In case artifact is only visible in images of a specific host but not in
STI1 / STI2 image, initiate a service call of modality service engineer
6 Completion of the maintenance

The Completion of the maintenance comprises following tasks:
Task Details see..

Backup Data on CF Card 6.1
Reset of Maintenance Action counters and relative 6.2
Counters in the Infocounter
Customer Conversation 6.3
6.1 Backup Data on CF Card
(1) Open the upper film tray and take

out the CF card.
(2) Insert the CF card in the printer
CF card reader
(3) In the Key-operator menu select
"4 Save configuration".
printer display.
536609fl.cdr
536336as.cdr
Figure 19
536609fl.cdr
536336as.cdr

Figure 20
6.2 Reset of Maintenance Action counters and relative Counters in the

Infocounter
(1) In the Browser menu select "Service Engineer Tools - Enter Service
Command Session - 7 Service Actions - 4 Maintenance - 4 Clear relative
counters".
(2) Select ' 7 Service Actions - 4 Maintenance - 1 Maintenance Settings'
(3) Select 'y' for yes at each desired 'Reset Item'
(4) Select "Accept Changes". Refer to Figure 21
(5) When leaving the Service menu select "Preventive maintenance" as
service action.
Welcome to this
Service - Service actions

Maintenance Action Cycles Factory Current Active Reset Item
to go settings settings
1
Y Y
Thermal head cleaning required 0 5000 5000 N N
Y Y
Replace thermal head anti dust filter 19030 25000 25000 N N
52520 Y Y
Replace thermal head (end of life) 62500 62500 N N
1898 5000 5000 Y Y

Film calibration upper tray required N N
2505 5000 5000 Y Y
Film calibration lower tray required N N
0 5000 5000 Y Y
Service maintenance required N N
Accept Changes Discard Changes Reset Values

536609fk.cdr
Figure 21
6.3 Customer Conversation

(1) Fill out the Maintenance checklist and hand it out to the customer.
(2) Explain the results of the maintenance to the customer.

AGFA and the Agfa-Rhombus are trademarks of Agfa-Gevaert AG, Germany
Herausgegeben von / Published by / Edité par /
Agfa-Gevaert AG
Fototechnik
D - 81539 München
Printed in Germany / Imprimé en Allemagne

HEALTHCARE Maintenance
Global Services Organisation Checklist
Order-No.: DD+DIS149.05E
DRYSTAR 5302
Type 5366/100
Work Instruction for order no. SN Film cycles
The maintenance has to be carried out:
Every 12 months or 25 000 printed films
Maintenance must be carried out according to the maintenance instructions DD+DIS149.05E.
Diagnostics not
OK OK
Questioning of the • Questioning of the customer about problems with
customer the printer.
Infocounter analysis • Read-out and analyzation of the infocounter
Image quality check • Printing of STI1, STI2 and medical test image for
comparison with test images at final system check


Maintenance Checklist DD+DIS149.05E
Maintenance points - Power off not

OK OK
Check of general • Visual check of power and network cable.
condition • Visual check of covers and film magazines
Check of condition of • Visual check of all belts and gears in the printer.
belts and gears
Visual check of the • Check of cables inside the printer for damage
cables
Cleaning of the suction • Cleaning of the suction cups of both film pickup
cups assemblies with a lint free cloth lightly moistened
with Isopropyl alcohol
Cleaning of Electronics • Cleaning of the Electronic rack with a vacuum
rack cleaner.
Cleaning of Power • Cleaning of the Power supply air inlet with a
supply air inlet vacuum cleaner
Check and Cleaning of • Check of the rubber of the drum for damage.
Drum • Cleaning of the rubber of the drum with a lint free
cloth lightly moistened with Isopropyl alcohol or
Ethanol.
Cleaning of Thermal • Cleaning of the Thermal print head with a lint free
print head cloth lightly moistened with Isopropyl alcohol
Electrical check • Check of the protective earth resistance

Maintenence Checklist Page 2 / 4 DRYSTAR 5302 Edition 1, Revision 0
DD+DIS149.05E Maintenance Checklist
Maintenance points - Power on not

OK OK
Check of safety • Opening of top cover to check function of safety
switche switche
SW patch installation • Installation of SW patch, in case a recommended
SW patch for the printer is available
Film calibration • Calibration of the films in both input trays.
Density Reproduction • Density Reproduction Check to confirm proper
Check operating CDM. Execution of CDM calibration if
not okay.
Test image evaluation • Printing of STI1, STI2 and medical test image
• Comparison with test images made during printer
diagnostics
• Check for artifacts on the film. In case of artifacts
in STI1 / STI2 and medical test image
troubleshooting as described in chapter 3.3
Troubleshooting.
Host system image • Printing of diagnostic image from every host
quality check system
• Check concerning artifacts in diagnostic image.
Comparison with artifacts in last STI1 /STI2
image.
o In case artifacts are also visible in STI1 / STI2
image, troubleshooting as described in chapter
3.3 Troubleshooting.
o In case artifact is only visible in images of a
specific host but not in STI1 / STI2 image,
initiation of service call of modality service
engineer
Completion not
OK OK
Backup • Backup of machine specific parameters
Reset of Maintenance • Reset of Maintenance action counters
action counters and
• Reset of relative infocounter
relative infocounter
• Confirmation of the maintenance in the printer
service menu.
Customer conversation • Explanation of results of preventive maintenance.

Edition 1, Revision 0 DRYSTAR 5302 Maintenence Checklist Page 3 / 4
Maintenance Checklist DD+DIS149.05E
Remarks:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
................................................................... ...................................................................
Date / Signature Service Technician Customer

Maintenence Checklist Page 4 / 4 DRYSTAR 5302 Edition 1, Revision 0
Imaging Services Service Bulletins
Drystar 5302
Type 5366/0100
► Please note
Service Bulletins are not part of the Service Manual for Download.
Please download the Service Bulletins from the GSO Library:

MEDNET GSO Hardcopy Dry Imagers Drystar 5302 Service Bulletin

service_bulletin_cover_e_template_v01
DD+DIS150.05E Service Bulletins


Imaging Services Installation Planning
DRYSTAR 5302
Type 5366/100
This documentation is separately available. Order No: DD+DIS148.05E.
CONFIDENTIALITY NOTE:
Use, dissemination, distribution or reproduction of this document by unauthorized personnel is not permitted and may be unlawful.

eq_11_install-planning_e_template_v04
1
1 2 3
DD+DIS148.05E Installation Planning
WARNING:
INSTRUCTION:
the equipment.
(2) Strictly observe all safety directions within the "Generic Safety Directions" and
on the product.


1 2 3
This document contains all planning data including the required measures to be carried
out on site prior to the machine delivery.
This chapter is divided into:
• construction planning data
• technical connection and performance data
• safety instructions, listing of certificates

1.2 11-2007 • Adapted scope of delivery (Before: Only English user
manual delivered as paper manual; Now: additional
Chinese simplified and Spanish). See section 3.1
• Added detailed specifications for power cables which
are part of delivery. See section 3.1
• Corrected wrong outlet and cable specification for US:
Wrong: NEMA 6-15p outlet/cable
Correct: NEMA 5-15p outlet/cable.
See section 8.
Document Title
n.a. n.a.


1 2 3
LIST OF CONTENTS
1 INSTALLATION PLANNING CHECKLIST................................................................................6

2 SYSTEM OVERVIEW...............................................................................................................7
3 SCOPE OF DELIVERY AND ACCESSORIES.........................................................................8
3.1 Scope of delivery ......................................................................................................................8
3.2 Options......................................................................................................................................9
4 MACHINE DIMENSIONS .......................................................................................................10

5 MINIMUM FREE SPACE FOR OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE .....................................11
6 SYSTEM INTEGRATION .......................................................................................................12
6.1 Network integration parameters..............................................................................................12
6.2 Modality Setup Parameters.....................................................................................................14
6.3 Setup of Security and Privacy (optional).................................................................................16
6.3.1 List of Key-operator, Service People and Specialists with Access Rights .............................16
6.3.2 Audit Logging Server and NTP Server parameters ................................................................18
6.3.3 Availability of certificates.........................................................................................................18
6.4 Service Host Parameters ........................................................................................................18
6.5 Example for System Integration..............................................................................................19
7 AMBIENT CONDITIONS ........................................................................................................20

7.1 During operation .....................................................................................................................20
7.2 During transport and storage ..................................................................................................20
8 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ..............................................................................................21

8.1 Electrical connections at the printer ........................................................................................22
9 SPECIFICATIONS..................................................................................................................22
9.1 Type overview .........................................................................................................................22
9.2 Functional data .......................................................................................................................23
9.2.1 Pixel Matrices..........................................................................................................................23
9.3 Electrical data..........................................................................................................................24
9.4 Climatic data ...........................................................................................................................24
9.5 Sound emission data ..............................................................................................................24
9.6 Interface data ..........................................................................................................................24


1 2 3
9.7 Service data ............................................................................................................................24
9.8 Dimensions and weight...........................................................................................................25
9.8.1 Dimensions, packed machine .................................................................................................25
9.8.2 Dimensions, closed machine ..................................................................................................25
9.8.3 Dimensions, opened machine.................................................................................................25
9.8.4 Weight .....................................................................................................................................25
10 SAFETY STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS .......................................................................26


1 2 3
1 Installation Planning Checklist

# Step Goal See Okay
section
1. Make yourself familiar with the To see in which surrounding the printer 2
System Overview will be installed
2. Make yourself familiar with the Basic information, to see whether 3.1
scope of delivery additional, site specific material for
installation might be required
3. Make yourself familiar with the To be able to order required accessories 3.2
available accessories before the installation
4. Have a look at the machine To be able to check, whether the printer 4
dimensions fits in the desired installation place
5. Check the required free space To see whether enough free space for 5
around the printer. operation, repair and maintenance is
available.
6. Organize the required network To have all parameters in advance, to 6
parameters to hook up the printer prevent a delay during installation
in the existing network.
7. Get up-to-date Connectivity To be prepared for modality specific 6.2
Release Documents for the adjustments at the printer
modalities which shall print on the
printer
8. Compare the required ambient To prevent installation of the printer in an 7
and climatic conditions with the inappropriate environment, leading to
condition at the installation place. functional faults.
9. Check the required electrical To be able to initiate all required 8
connection prerequisites in advance to allow proper
electrical connections
10. Make yourself familiar with the To have all printer parameters available 9
printer specifications which might be required for people who
are in involved in installation and
operation of the printer.
11. Have a look at the printer safety To have the safety standards and 10
standards and regulations regulations for which the printer is tested
available in case they are requested by
the hospital administration.
12. Confirm the installation readiness To be sure that all required pre- Last
installation conditions are fulfilled. Page


1 2 3
2 System Overview
536611JK.CDR
Figure 1
Device Comment
Modality The modality has to support the DICOM print protocol
DRYSTAR 5302 Dry printer for 14x17", 14x14", 14x11", 10x12", 8x10" DT2
blue base or clear base films
NOTE:
Remark to an installation in a 'HIPAA conform environment':
In Figure 1 two additional, optional modules are not listed:
1) Audit logging server: This is a computer in the networking allowing to store all
communication between the different devices in the network.
2) NTP (Network Time Protocol) Server: This is a computer providing time
synchronization. It is useful for audit logging, so that all messages of all
devices have the same time reference.
Both devices are only required in a 'HIPAA' environment, where high data security is
required.
For more information refer to section 6.3.


1 2 3
3 Scope of Delivery and Accessories
3.1 Scope of delivery

NOTE:
The printer is delivered with all parts, which are required to install it in an existing
Ethernet network.
Device name: DRYSTAR 5302

Type: 5366/100
ABC Code EQOZV
Scope of delivery
• 1 Basic DRYSTAR 5302 including:
- 2 input trays adjustable for all film sizes
- 1 output tray
• 1 Compact Flash card (stored in backup CF card slot in input tray)
• 2 power cables, 3 m long (Europe / US)
• 1 UTP network cable, 5 m long (2 x RJ45 connection) incl. extension piece
• 1 Reference manual (English)
• 3 User Manuals (English; Chinese simplified, Spanish)
• 1 CD with all user manuals and Plug&Play installation manuals in all languages*
• 1 packing list
• 1 Plug and Play Installation manual (English)
• 25 films 14x17" DT 2B for test purposes
• 25 films 8x10" DT 2B for test purposes
• 2 sets film type labels
• 1 Chinese warning sticker
• 1 CE declaration of conformity
• 1 China ROHS declaration
• 1 Installation Report
*available languages: Chinese simplified, Chinese traditional, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English, Estonian,
Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Latvian, Lithuanian, Norwegian,
Polish, Portuguese, Russian, Slovakian, Slovenian, Spanish, Swedish, Thai, Turkish, Vietnamese


1 2 3
IMPORTANT:
The printer is delivered with two 3 m power cables. See Figure 9.
• For US: NEMA 5-15P with IEC C13 plug (female)
• For Europe: CEE7/7 with IEC C13 plug (female)
Organize a power cable for your country locally.
See section 8 for “Mains connection in the installation room” specifications.
3.2 Options
Item Order Number Comment

Mobile Kit EX2DV To be used in earthquake areas and in mobile
usage. May not be used in military vessels.
Figure 2
NOTE:
REMOTE SERVICE:
In general it is possible to diagnose and repair the printer to a certain extent remotely.
To enable remote service of the printer remote access has first to be organized.
Remote Access is established via the Agfa own Secure Remote Service System
(SRSS).
For more information to the SRSS refer to MEDNET – GSO Library - Technical
Services - Service Delivery - SRSS


1 2 3
4 Machine dimensions
Closed machine:
67,6 cm
.2 m 26.6"
28 5 c
"
.
71
72,
8
28. cm 536611jo.cdr
7"
Figure 3
Opened machine:
76 cm
29,9"
,7 m
45 6 c
"
11
536611jn.cdr
536611jp.cdr
Figure 4 Figure 5


1 2 3
5 Minimum free space for operation and maintenance
23 m m
60
0
. 6"
23 mm
0
60
.6"
23 mm
80
0
.6"
31 mm
0
.5"
54
23 m m
60
0
.6"
23 mm
0
60
.6"
536611JL.cdr
Space required for servicing and installation Space required for normal use
Figure 6
NOTE:
In case the minimum free space for installation and repair is not available, the printer
can be carried at a different place. The printer weight is 90 kg (198 lb). It can be
carried by three people.
Caution:
The device is heavy (90 kg;198 lb). Risk of injuries.
• At least three people have to lift the device from one position to the other.
• Use proper foot and hand protection when lifting the device.
• The table might break and cause injuries or damage to the device. The device
weight may be too heavy for the table.
• Communicate to the customer, that the table must be able to carry more
than 90 kg (198 lb)


1 2 3
6 System integration
The system integration comprises the following tasks:
Task Refer to
Network integration of the printer 6.1
Modality setup 6.2
Setup of security and privacy (optional) 6.3
Setup of the Agfatek Link Service Host 6.4
For each of these steps various parameters are required in advance. They can be
entered in the following tables:
6.1 Network integration parameters
To connect the printer to the hospital network, the following parameters are required by
the hospital network administrator:
Parameter Default Value
Printer IP address 169.254.10.10 .............................................
Hostname ds5302 .............................................
Subnet mask 255.255.0.0 .............................................
Router IP address - .............................................
Printer AE title* DS5302 .............................................
Domain name - .............................................
The Hospital Network Administrator needs the following information about the printer:
Network connection RJ45 UTP, 100BaseT acc. to IEC601
Transmission protocol DICOM Version 3.0; FTP, Telnet, HTTP, SNMP,
SMTP
Image formats DICOM


1 2 3
*NOTE:
• It is possible to define more than one AE title at the printer – this means it's
possible to have two or more “logical” DRYSTAR 5302 printers.
• To configure logical SCP printers can be necessary, in case for example printing is
initiated at a PACS system, which has several modalities as input.
Example:
The PACS system collects CR and CT images.
• CR images shall be printed with taste LUT Kanamori
• CT images shall be printed with linear taste LUT.
Problem:
The workstation at the PACS system has one AE title only. The DRYSTAR 5302 does
not recognize, for which type of modality (CR or CT) the user wants to print.
Solution:
• Create one logical printer 'DRYSTAR5302_CR' and one 'DRYSTAR5302_CT'.
• Create two different host profiles for the two logical printers, one with Kanamori
LUT, the other with linear taste LUT.
• In the workstation setup both printers: The user has to select the proper logical
printer, depending on the application.
⇒ The number of logical SCP printers is not limited. As each configured SCP server
consumes resources of the printer, use as little SCP servers as possible. Rule of
thumb: Define max. 4 logical printers.


1 2 3
6.2 Modality Setup Parameters
To connect the printer to the DICOM modality, the following parameters are required by
the hospital network administrator:
Modality 1: ................................................... (nickname* of the modality; max. 8

characters (letters/figures))
Parameter Value
Modality brand ...........................................................................
Modality type ...........................................................................
Modality AE_title ...........................................................................

Parameter Value
Modality brand ...........................................................................
Modality type ...........................................................................

Parameter Value
Modality brand ...........................................................................
Modality type ...........................................................................

Parameter Value
Modality brand ...........................................................................
Modality type ...........................................................................


1 2 3
NOTE:
*Nickname: The name of the modality which is used by the personnel.
Example: The workstation "Siemens Icon Power PC" could be named
"Icon" in the daily use. At the printer configuration this name is entered
as "nickname".
IMPORTANT:
For printer connectivity have the up-to-date Interface Status Report and
corresponding Connectivity Release Document available:
Interface Status Report:
The up-to-date interface status report lists all modalities, for which the connectivity to
the DRYSTAR 5302 is tested and released.
The ISR (Interface Status Report) is available on MEDNET - HealthCare Library -
General Info - Connectivity & Application - Interface Status Report - Application Info
(only via Intranet – not via Internet).
The ISR also lists the Connectivity Release Document numbers.
Example see Figure 7
PHILIPS, CR DRYSTAR 4500(M)/5500/5300

EASYVISION RAD 4.2 Image : ETHERNET II
DICOM 3.0
Control : ETHERNET II
DICOM PRINT MANAGEMENT SCU
Status : Released for installation
Document : 000874
Remarks :
5365_reg11_006_e.cdr
Connectivity Release
Document Number
Figure 7
Connectivity Release Documents:

Specific connectivity information for the DRYSTAR 5302 can be found in the
Connectivity Release Documents.
The Connectivity Release Documents are available on MEDNET (Intranet and
Internet), Imaging Library - General Info - Connectivity & Application
Not all modalities that are tested for Drystar 4500 (M)/5500/5300 are also tested for
Drystar 5302. As the controller part for all printers is identical, except behaviour
regarding film sizes and output tray, modalities that are tested for Drystar 4500
(M)/5500/5300 can also be connected to
Drystar 5302.
Exception: The Drystar 5302 - in opposite to Drystar 4500 M,
Drystar 5500/5503 - cannot be used for Mammography applications.


1 2 3
6.3 Setup of Security and Privacy (optional)

In case HIPAA compliance is required, following items have to be checked in advance:
Item Refer to
Users and service people who may have access 6.3.1
Audit Logging Server and NTP Server parameters 6.3.2
Availability of certificates 6.3.3
NOTE:
The parameters for 'Security and Privacy' have to be determined and entered by the
'hospital security responsible person'.
Please hand out the pages of this subsection (6.3) to the 'hospital security responsible
person'.
6.3.1 List of Key-operator, Service People and Specialists with Access Rights
The list of Key-operators is limited to 50. The Key-Operator has access to the Key-
Operator webpages of the printer.
Following conventions are valid:

• Username: min. 4 characters, max 20 characters
• Network password: min. 4 characters, max 10 characters
# User name Password

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.


1 2 3
The list of service people is limited to 8. The service people have access to the
service web pages.

# Service person name Password

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
The list of Specialists is limited to 1. The Specialist has access to the specialist web
pages.

# Specialist name Password

1.


1 2 3
6.3.2 Audit Logging Server and NTP Server parameters

To setup the Audit Logging and NTP server in the printer, request the following
parameters from the hospital network administrator:
Parameter Value
Audit Logging IP address ................................................................
Audit Logging port number ................................................................
NTP server IP address ...............................................................
NTP server port number ...............................................................
6.3.3 Availability of certificates

Check with the hospital network administrator, that certificates are available for all
devices, which shall be HIPAA compliant.
NOTE:
• Agfa devices which are according to the HIPAA specifications have Agfa
certificates already loaded.
• All certificates issued by Agfa have a validity period of 10 years
6.4 Service Host Parameters
NOTE:
The AGFATEK LINK Service Host is optional in the network.
It is an optional part of the SRSS (Secure Remote Service System).
For more information to the SRSS refer to MEDNET – GSO Library - Technical
Services - Service Delivery - SRSS
Parameter Default Value

Service Host IP address 192.9.200.155 .............................................
Phone Number -- .............................................


1 2 3
6.5 Example for System Integration
IP Address:192.9.200.155 Digitizer:
CR 75.0
Service
Host
ADC QS
Ultrasound
Nickname: Digitizer 53
63
Printer 11
Modality Brand: AGFA ad
.cd
r
Modality Type: CR QS
Calling AE-Title: QS
Nickname: Ultrasound
Modality Brand: ACUSON
Modality Type: ASPEN
Calling AE-Title: US_ASPEN
IP address: 192.9.200.201
Hostname: ds5302
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Router IP address: -
Printer AE Title: DS5302
Domain name: -
Figure 8


1 2 3
7 Ambient conditions
7.1 During operation
Ambient temperature: min.: +15°C (59°F)

max.: +30°C (86°F)
Relative humidity: min.: 20%

(non condensing) max.: 75%
7.2 During transport and storage
NOTE:
• Climate conditions for storage must be in accordance with
EN60721-3-1-class 1K4
• Climate conditions for transport must be in accordance with
EN60721-3-2(1993)-class 2K4
Ambient temperature min.: - 25°C (-13°F)

during storage: max.: + 55°C (131°F)
Relative humidity min.: 10%

during storage: max.: 95%
Absolute humidity min.: 0.1 g/m³

during storage: max.: 35 g/m³
Rate of temperature max.: 1 °C/min.

change during storage
Air pressure during Min. 70 kPa

storage max.: 106 kPa
Ambient temperature min.: - 40°C (-40°F)

during transport: max.: + 70°C (158°F)
Relative humidity min.: 10%

during transport: max.: 95%


1 2 3
8 Electrical connections
Installation guidelines Electrical installations have to be done in accordance
with national regulations. Examples:
VDE (Germany) Electrical installations in the
installation room must be in compliance with the
regulations IEC 364, VDE 0100, and VDE 0107.
UL (US) Electrical installations in the installation
room must be in compliance with the regulations:
“National Electrical Code" (NEC) (NFPA70).
IMPORTANT:
A ground fault interrupter (GFI) (IN = 30 mA) must be installed at a suitable point in
the circuit (in compliance with VDE 664).
Mains connection in the VDE Double earthed pin outlet in compliance with
installation room DIN 49441 and with CEE 7 standard cover V II.
UL Earthed contact outlet for the NEMA 5-15 P plug
Mains cable Euro- CEE7/7 - H05VV - F3G - 3 x 2.5 mm² with

(part of the delivery) Version: IEC C13 plug (female); cable length 3 m
US/CAN- NEMA 5-15P - SJT, 3 x AWG 18 with
Version: IEC C13 plug (female); Cable length 3 m
US Europe
IEC C13 CEE7/7
NEMA 5-15P IEC C13

5366_chap11_001.cdr
Figure 9
Network cable UTP; AWG24; Length: 5 m

(part of the delivery)
Main switch Upon machine installation, it must be ensured that either

the mains connector or an all-pole circuit breaker for the
installation on site is located close to the machine and
easily accessible.


1 2 3
8.1 Electrical connections at the printer
Ground plug. 100 - 240 V AC

6 mm metric thread power supply
Equipotential plug
Network connection.
RJ45 UTP for 100BaseT network,
according to IEC 601
Service Interface.
RS232 Interface male
DTE 9 pin sub D (nullmodem)
536611JM.cdr
Figure 10
9 Specifications
9.1 Type overview
Printer Type
DRYSTAR 5302 5366/100


1 2 3
9.2 Functional data
Film sizes 14x17", 14x14", 14x11", 10x12", 8x10"

Throughput (films/hour) 8x10": 140 14x17": 75
Access time1st film approx. (seconds) 77
Printable area(pixels) Refer to 9.2.1
resolution(DPI) 320 (79.4 µm Pixel size)
Bits per pixel / number of grey steps 12 / 4096
Daylight film loading yes
Films per film magazine 100 films
Number of film magazines 2
Image recording type Direct thermography
Densitometer built in yes
Automatic density control yes
Hard disk capacity ≥ 73 GB
RAM Memory Plugged on Themis: 512 MB
Warm-up time Approx. 7 min. (cold printer)
9.2.1 Pixel Matrices

The DRYSTAR 5302 has two film supply trays that can be configured to 14x17",
14x14", 14x11", 10x14" or 8x10" film size. If trim is used around the images (trim is a
small, white frame around each image on the film), the diagnostic area is 6 pixels
smaller at each edge of the film.
DRYSTAR 5302 Diagnostic Printable Area in Pixels
No Annotations Annotations
Film Size
Width Height Width Height
8x10" 2376 3070 2376 2705
10x12" 3070 3653 3070 3288
14x11" 3348 4358 2983 4358
14x14" 4358 4303 4358 3938
14x17" 4358 5232 4358 4867
Table 1: Pixel Matrices


1 2 3
9.3 Electrical data
Rated voltage [~V] 100-240 AC (autosensing)

Frequency [Hz] 50/60
Power consumption [W] 70 standby
250 printing average
530 peak
9.4 Climatic data
Heat emission [kJ/h] 252 standby

900 printing average
1908 maximum
9.5 Sound emission data
Noise level: in standby: 53 dB(A) maximum

in operation: 62 dB(A) maximum
9.6 Interface data
Image / control data interface DICOM 3.0 Print SCP

Maximum number of simultaneous 10
DICOM associations
9.7 Service data
InfoCounter yes
Error diagnostics built in yes
Module exchange concept yes
Remote/preventive service capable yes


1 2 3
9.8 Dimensions and weight
9.8.1 Dimensions, packed machine
Length / depth (cm / inch) 90 / 35.4

Width (cm / inch) 87 / 34.2
Height (cm / inch) 69 / 27.2
Height incl. Pallet (cm / inch) 84 / 33.1
9.8.2 Dimensions, closed machine
Width (cm / inch) 72,8 / 28.6

Length / depth (cm / inch) 71,5 / 28.2
Height with output tray (cm / inch) 67,6 / 26.6
Height without output tray (cm / inch) 53,6 / 21.1
9.8.3 Dimensions, opened machine
Width (cm / inch) 72,8 / 28.6

Length / depth (cm / inch) 116 / 45.7
with film trays opened
Height (cm / inch) 76 / 29.9
with top cover opened
9.8.4 Weight
Printer alone (kg / lb) 90 / 198

Printer with packing incl. palette (kg / lb) 120,5 / 265,6


1 2 3
10 Safety Standards and Regulations
The printer has been tested and found to comply with the following international
standards and regulations:
• Medical Devices Directive 93/42/EEC

• CFR Part 21
Safety standards:
• IEC 60601-1 + A1 + A2
• EN 60601-1 + A1 + A2
• UL 60601-1:2003
• CSA 22.2 No. 601.1-M90
• GB4943-2001
Radio-interference regulations (interference suppression):
• FCC Rules 47 CFR part 15 subpart B, class A

• FCC rules 47 CFT part 15 subpart C, class B
• IEC 60601-1-2
• CISPR 11, class A
• CISPR 22, class A
• IEC 61000-4-3
• IEC 61000-4-4
• IEC 61000-4-5
• IEC 61000-4-6
• IEC 61000-3-2
• IEC 61000-3-3
• IEC 61000-4-11
• ETSI 300330
• GB9254-1998 (Class A)
• GB17625.1-2003
The DRYSTAR 5302 carries the FCC ID: HPL5366, CE, TUV, cULus and CCC label.


HEALTHCARE INSTALLATION SITE
Imaging Services READINESS CHECKLIST
Name of Field Service Engineer: _________________ Checking date:____________

Client name: ___________________________________________________________
Client address: __________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________
Contact person,
name and title: ___________________________________________________________
Client phone number: ________________________ Extension:_________________
Type of systems: ___________________ Order /OGT number: _____________________
# Item Refer to okay
1 All parts, which are required additionally to the "scope of 3.1

delivery" are available at the installation site
3 The planned installation place has enough space for 4 and 5

installation, operation and repair
4 The required system integration parameters are available 6
5 The required connectivity Release Documents are available 6.2
6 The Host System is installed and the Host System Service --

Engineer is scheduled to setup the printer at the host system.
7 The ambient conditions are within the given limits 7
8 The electrical connection is available as specified 8
Remarks:______________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
Signature of the FSE or Product Specialist:
1
Published by
D - 81539 München
Germany


DD+DIS150.05E Glossary and Key Word Index
Chapter 12:
List of contents
1 Glossary.............................................................................................. 1
2 Key Word Index ................................................................................ 10

Edition 1, Revision 0 DRYSTAR 5302 Chapter 12 / I
2005-09-09 (Typ 5366/100) Agfa Company Confidential
1 Glossary
2-Propanol (Isopropyl Alcohol used for cleaning purposes.

alcohol)
A
ADC Agfa Diagnostic Center.
A device developed by AGFA to scan X-ray
exposed phosphor plates.
AE-Title Application Entity Title.
A DICOM capable device in the network is
unambiguously identified by its IP address,
hostname and AE-Title .
Drystar 5300 has the AE-Title "DS5300" by
default. The AE-Title for the Drystar 5300 in
the DICOM Host must be identical with the
AE-Title in the Drystar 5300 itself.
The AE-Title is set up during installation.
To make a clear distinction between AE-title
and IP address, it is recommended to use
only lower case characters for the hostname.
Preferably use the same name as for the AE-
title, but in lowercase.
AGFATEK LINK Device out of the AGFATEK product
spectrum for remote service. Enables to make
a dial-up-networking connection between
local PC and the AGFA network.
Anti-static wrist strap Wrist strap made of synthetic material with
integrated thread-like metal.
Used for "grounding" the service engineer
during service at printed circuit boards.
Prevents electronic components from being
destroyed by static discharge.
APIP Agfa Picture Archiving Protocol. AGFA
network protocol for communication between
medical devices. More and more DICOM
supersedes APIP.

Glossary and Key Word Index DD+DIS150.05E
B
B/W Black and White.
Battery RAM A RAM component, whose contents is being
stored by the tension of a battery.
Blue Based Film Film with a blue colored support layer.
The fog level of this film is approx. 0.2 O.D.
See also "Clear Based Film"
Browser Application used for reading Internet pages.
The commonly used browsers are Microsoft
Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator.
C
Calibration Process which determines a reproducible
correlation between input and output values.
Clear Based Film Film with a transparent support layer.
The fog level of this film is approx. 0.15 O.D.
See also "Blue Based Film"
COM1, COM2 Names for the first two serial interfaces of a
computer
CPU (Devil) Board Printed circuit board to control the main
functions of the printer, CPU.
D
DA Converter Digital Analog Converter.
DCE Data Communications Equipment.
Term out of the RS232 specification. DCE
equipment sends data on pin 3 and receives
on pin 2. The RS232 interface from modems
or PC's is almost always DCE. To connect a
DCE with a DTE device, a standard RS232
cable is required. To establish a DCE - DCE
connection, respectively a DTE - DTE
connection a nullmodem cable is required.
See also DTE.
Densitometer Device used for measuring the optical density
of the film.

DICOM Digital Imaging and Communication in

Medicine.
A network protocol, which is wide spread in
the medical world, and used for interchanging
text and images.
DICOM PMS DICOM Print Management Service.
A device which provides DICOM PMS
(= provider) makes it possible to print DICOM
images. A device which uses DICOM PMS
(= user) is able to control a DICOM printer.
The Drystar 5300 is a DICOM PMS Provider.
Dmin / Dmax Minimal / maximal optical density on the film.
DNS Domain Name System
The DNS server builds up the connection
between IP-address and Domain name.
Domain Name The Domain Name is the name for a device in
the network.
It provides for a more comfortable contact to a
network node by calling it via name instead of
the IP address. In the internet for example the
IP address 19.5.6.121 can be contacted by
the name 'johnson.com'. To identify a device
in the network via a name it has to be
registered in a DNS server. The network
system administrator determines the domain
name for Drystar 5300.
DPI Dots Per Inch.
Pixels per Inch (1 inch = 2,54 cm)
DRA Direct Remote Access.
Remote service
DTE Data Terminal Equipment.
Term out of the RS232 Specification. DTE
equipment sends data on pin 2 and receives
on pin 3.
See also DCE.
E
EEPROM Electrically Erasable, Programmable Read
Only Memory.
Memory chip that can be electronically erased
and programmed again.
EMC ElectroMagnetic Compatibility.

EMI ElectroMagnetic Interference.

EPROM Erasable, Programmable Read Only Memory.
Memory chip that can be erased by ultraviolet
light and be electronically programmed again.
Ethernet Network carrier technology for LANs (Local
Area Networks).
F
FIFO First In, First Out.
Way of storing data that first selects the data
that have been entered first.
Used in (print) queues.
Film batch Number printed on the film packet.
It changes with every new film emulsion. Only
the films with the same film batch have
exactly the same characteristics.
Film Sensitometry Calibration of the film.
By calibrating, the printer gets a table with
certain density values for certain control
values.
Film type Film of a certain producer or a similar
producer but with different characteristics
(sensitivity, contrast).
FireWire Serial bus standard also known as
IEEE1394. Data rate up to 400 Mb/s.
Flash EPROM An EPROM in which data have to be deleted
in fixed blocks instead of separate bytes.
Fog level Lowest optical density that can be measured
on the film.
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array.
A logic chip, which can be programmed. An
FPGA can be programmed after its
production.
FSE Field Service Engineer. Service technician.
FTP File Transfer Protocol.
A network protocol required for file transfer
within the network.

H
Heat sink Assembly to absorb and dissipate heat.
It is used with the thermal print head to
dissipate its surplus heat energy.
HTTP HyperText Transmission Protocol.
Protocol that determines the data format and
the way of transmission of HTML-pages in the
World Wide Web (WWW).
Host In the computer world a host computer is a
device, which provides services and settings
for other computers.
Especially in the world of medical devices a
host system is the device at which the printer
is going to be connected to.
Hyper Terminal A Windows program used for serial data
communication between two computers.
I
ICM Image Composition Map.
Complete image data for a complete film.
These image data correspond to the several
pixels on the film that is going to be printed.
IEC International Electro technical Commission
Infocounter File in the printer, which logs lots of
information and events.
The infocounter contains for example the date
of the installation, the SW version and all the
errors that have occurred.
IP-Address Internet Protocol Address.
A 32 Bit address, which is assigned to each
TCP/IP host. Example: 192.9.200.201.
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network.
Telecommunication network which allows
different ways of communication (language,
text, data, images) to be transferred in one
united public net.

Java An object oriented programming language

developed by the American company Sun
Microsystems. It is independent of the
computer system used.
Java is used for browsers in the WWW.
K
KEY6 Assy Printed circuit board to control the printer
keypad.
L
LCD-Display Liquid Crystal Display.
By supplying a voltage the liquid crystals are
arranged such that a contrast is visible.
LED Light Emitting Diode.
Diode which emits green, yellow or red light.
LUT Look-Up Table,
contrast reference curve, e.g. Kanamori LUT.
N
Netmask Also called subnet mask. A 32 bit mask that
displays which bits are in use for the subnet
address. Subnets are used in a network to
keep it well-structured.
Null Modem Cable A RS232 cable where all the wires are
crossed over. This way for example the
receive wire at the one side is connected with
the transmit wire of the other side.
O
O.D. Optical Density
P
PACS Picture Archiving and Communication
System.

PCB Printed Circuit Board.

Pick-up Module Assembly in the printer that provides for the
transport of a film out of the input tray.
Pixel One of the individual dots that make up an
image on the film.
E.g. a 10x12" film contains 4968 x 5900
pixels.
PMS DICOM Print Management Service.
A device that provides DICOM PMS
(= provider), makes printing of DICOM
images possible. A device using DICOM
PMS (= user) can control a DICOM printer.
Drystar 5300 is a DICOM PMS provider.
Portex AGFA own operating system for medical
devices.
Postscript Imperative programming language for the
device independent description of print pages
which brings the complete data (text, images,
graphics) and their positions to a standardized
data structure. PostScript was developed in
1982 by the American company Adobe
Systems and evolved in the meantime to a
quasi-standard. A further development is
PostScript Level 2, which has got among
others things an optimized data compression.
Print drum A rubber drum in the printer that guides the
film along the thermal print head.
Prompt A symbol that appears on a computer
terminal screen. Example: C:\>
R
RAM Random Access Memory
Free accessible memory. The RAM-board is
used to store intermediate data.
RJ45 Recommended Jack 45.
A connector specification used with UTP
cables. The connectors are 8-pole flat
connectors.

Router A device in the network to connect two or

more networks. It routes incoming data
packages to the corresponding network. The
network system administrator defines the IP-
address of the router for the printer. Only if
the router IP-address is known by the printer
it is possible for the printer to send
information via the network back to devices
which are located in another segment of the
network.
RS232 Interface Computer interface to convert computer
internal parallel data into serial data and vice
versa. The interface is defined via RS232
(Recommended Standard).
RS232 cable Cable following the RS232 standard
(Recommended Standard) to connect two
RS232 interfaces (for example connection
between modem and PC).
S
SCSI Small Computer Systems Interface.
Service Interface RS232 Interface at the printer.
Service key Service tool.
Used to bridge safety switches to make it
possible to control all the devices despite the
device is opened.
SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television
Engineers.
The printer is able to print out the black/white
test image named after the SMPTE for test
purposes.
SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol.
Protocol to send e-mails between computers
in the internet.
T
TCP/IP Transport Control Protocol / Internet Protocol.
Widespread network protocol.
Telnet A network protocol that provides for logging in
to a network computer system.

TIF Tagged Image Format.

A standard format to store pixel oriented
images. GIF and JPG are more and more
superseding TIF.
TH Abbreviation of Thermal Print Head.
THEMIS board Board on the Devil Board. Responsible for
operating system and image processing..
Thermal Print Head Resistor line that transfers the image to the
film.
U
USB Universal Serial Bus.
PC bus system to attach peripherals like
scanner, keyboards etc. to PC's. Data rate
12 Mb/s and up to 480 Mb/s for USB-2.
UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair.
A network cable where the wires are twisted
and without additional shielding.
V
VDE Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker.
Association of German Electro-Technicians
X
XT X-Terminal.
An Agfa program for serial data
communication between two computers.

2 Key Word Index

Order no.:
DD+DIS150.05E
DRYSTAR 5302
Type 5366/100
1st Edition
HEALTHCARE ReadMeFirst
Imaging Services Service Manual for Download

This document describes how to
• add the “order list for documentation”.
• print.
• add comments.

1.2 06-2008 Added how to integrate the order list for documentation in a
printed manual. See section 1.
06-2008 printed in Germany
Document Node ID: 16099429
ReadMeFirst
1 Integrating the Order List for Documentation
IMPORTANT:
The “order list for documentation” is not part of the service manual for download.
Purpose of the “order list for documentation”:
To verify the latest level and completeness of your Service Manual.
(1) In the MEDNET GSO library select the product of your interest.
(2) Select “Order list and Front page → PRODUCT - Chapter 00 - Order List for
Documentation”.
(3) Download the “order list for documentation” to your computer.
(4) When creating a paper manual:
Print the order list and put it behind the cover sheet.
2 Printing single Pages, Chapters or the complete Manual
IMPORTANT:
Preferably print this manual double-sided:
This PDF manual contains empty pages at the end of several chapters, to have the
next chapter starting with an uneven page number when printed doubles-sided.
If printed one-sided, dispose these empty pages.
Preferably print circuit diagrams on a DIN A3 or ANSI B (Ledger) printer, if

available.
Some pages – especially circuit diagrams for equipment – have been created on paper
size larger than DIN A4/Letter. Printing these pages on DIN A4/Letter may result in
reduced legibility. It is recommended to print these pages separately on a DIN A3 or
ANSI B (Ledger) printer.

Edition 1, Revision 2 Page 2 of 5

ReadMeFirst
2.1 Printing single Pages or Chapters
To print single chapters or pages of a chapter proceed as follows:

(1) Click the bookmark of the desired chapter.
(2) Write down or remember the shown PDF page number. See Figure 1.
Figure 1: PDF page number in the Adobe reader toolbar
(3) Go the end of the section or desired range of pages.

(4) Select "Print".
(5) Select the page range.
(6) Select "Reduce to printer margins" and "Auto-rotate and Center".
(7) Select “OK”.
Figure 2: Print dialogue for printing single pages or chapters


ReadMeFirst
NOTE:
“Shrink to printable area” may be named on other Adobe Reader versions
“reduce to printer margins” or “shrink oversized pages to paper size”.
2.2 Printing the complete Service Manual
To print the complete service manual proceed as follows:

(1) Select "Print".
(2) Select “All”.
(3) Select "shrink to printable area" and "Auto-rotate and Center"
(see NOTE above).
(4) Select “OK”.
Figure 3: Print dialogue for printing the complete manual
3 Adding Comments
• If you open this file in an Adobe Reader version ≥ 7, the comment toolbar will
show-up.
• This allows adding comments, to highlight or underline text and many more text
manipulations.
Figure 4: Adobe Reader comments toolbar


ReadMeFirst
3.1 Exporting your Comments
NOTE:
Exporting your comments allows importing them again in a next version of the manual.
(1) In the drop down menu “Comment & Markup” select "Show comments List".
Figure 5: Drop down menu “Comment & Markup”
(2) Select the desired comments: Press the CTRL-key for multiple selections.
(3) Select “Options - Export Selected Comments”.
(4) Save the file with any name.
3.2 Importing Comments
(1) In the drop down menu “Comment & Markup” select "Show comments List".
(2) Select “Options - Import Comments”.
(3) Browse for the comments file and press “select”.
NOTE:
The imported comments possibly appear on different pages, if the file where the
comments have been imported has a different number of pages.



Drystar 5302

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Drystar 5302

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HEALTHCARE Technical

Global Services Organisation

printed in Germany 2005-09-09

2. Functional Description High voltage ! Waiting time

3. Repair and Service

4. Reference and Circuit

5. Spare Parts List

8. Manufacturing Standard Conventions

Action, Switch the machine on Switch the machine on

Action with the mouse or the <omni-cd.exe> Double-click the

Generic Safety Directions

► Purpose of this Document

Edition. Release Changes

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

2 USED ICONS ........................................................................................................ 6

7 INTENDED USER ............................................................................................... 11

8 QUALIFICATIONS FOR OPERATION AND SERVICE TASKS.......................... 11

9 ENVIRONMENTAL AND OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS............. 12

10 CONNECTIONS TO OTHER EQUIPMENT ........................................................ 13

11 ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS ................................................................ 14

13 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR OPERATION......................................................... 17

14 RADIATION PROTECTION ................................................................................ 18

15 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR CLEANING AND DISINFECTION......................... 18

16 GENERAL SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR SERVICE ACTIVITIES ....................... 19

17 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION PLANNING ACTIVITIES ............ 20

18 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES................................ 22

19 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR ACTIVITIES ........ 23

20 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR REMOTE SERVICE ACTIVITIES ......................... 26

21 SAFETY DIRECTIONS FOR TRANSPORT AND SHIPMENT OF SPARE

22 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING MODIFICATIONS.................................27

23 SAFETY DIRECTIONS CONCERNING HAZARDOUS MATERIALS .................27

25 WASTE DISPOSAL .............................................................................................28

26 ERASING PROTECTED HEALTH INFORMATION (PHI) ...................................28

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

The installation and service of equipment described herein is to be performed by qualified

Agfa HealthCare makes no warranties or representation, expressed or implied, with

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Icon Name and Circumstances

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

3.2 System Labels

Hot Surface Laser Beam Magnetic Field Ionizing Radiation

Obstacles Corrosive Liquid High Voltage Hand Injuries

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

3.3 System Labels concerning Laser Radiation

Class # Meaning Example Label

Class 1: Not dangerous to the human eye, even

Class 1 M: Not dangerous to the human eye if no

effects, especially with low ambient light CLASS 1M LASER PRODUCT

Class 2: Dangerous to the human eye for

effects, especially with low ambient light CLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Class # Meaning Example Label

Class 2M: Dangerous to the human eye when

Class 3R: Possibly dangerous to the human eye for

CLASS 3R LASER PRODUCT

Class 3B: Normally dangerous to the human eye

CLASS 3B LASER PRODUCT

Class 4: Dangerous to the human eye for direct

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

Agfa – Gevaert N.V.

DOCUMENT CONTROL NOTE:

8 Qualifications for Operation and Service Tasks